US11645175B2 - Automatic failover of a storage manager - Google Patents

Automatic failover of a storage manager Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US11645175B2
US11645175B2 US17/175,259 US202117175259A US11645175B2 US 11645175 B2 US11645175 B2 US 11645175B2 US 202117175259 A US202117175259 A US 202117175259A US 11645175 B2 US11645175 B2 US 11645175B2
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
data
failover
storage
storage manager
node
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active, expires
Application number
US17/175,259
Other versions
US20220261321A1 (en
Inventor
Dmitriy Borisovich Zakharkin
Manoj Kumar PRADHAN
Manoj Kumar Vijayan
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Commvault Systems Inc
Original Assignee
Commvault Systems Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Commvault Systems Inc filed Critical Commvault Systems Inc
Priority to US17/175,259 priority Critical patent/US11645175B2/en
Assigned to COMMVAULT SYSTEMS, INC. reassignment COMMVAULT SYSTEMS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PRADHAN, MANOJ KUMAR, VIJAYAN, MANOJ KUMAR, ZAKHARKIN, DMITRIY BORISOVICH
Assigned to JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., AS ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT reassignment JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., AS ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: COMMVAULT SYSTEMS, INC.
Publication of US20220261321A1 publication Critical patent/US20220261321A1/en
Priority to US18/127,575 priority patent/US20230236940A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US11645175B2 publication Critical patent/US11645175B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F11/00Error detection; Error correction; Monitoring
    • G06F11/07Responding to the occurrence of a fault, e.g. fault tolerance
    • G06F11/16Error detection or correction of the data by redundancy in hardware
    • G06F11/20Error detection or correction of the data by redundancy in hardware using active fault-masking, e.g. by switching out faulty elements or by switching in spare elements
    • G06F11/2053Error detection or correction of the data by redundancy in hardware using active fault-masking, e.g. by switching out faulty elements or by switching in spare elements where persistent mass storage functionality or persistent mass storage control functionality is redundant
    • G06F11/2089Redundant storage control functionality
    • G06F11/2092Techniques of failing over between control units
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F11/00Error detection; Error correction; Monitoring
    • G06F11/07Responding to the occurrence of a fault, e.g. fault tolerance
    • G06F11/14Error detection or correction of the data by redundancy in operation
    • G06F11/1402Saving, restoring, recovering or retrying
    • G06F11/1446Point-in-time backing up or restoration of persistent data
    • G06F11/1448Management of the data involved in backup or backup restore
    • G06F11/1451Management of the data involved in backup or backup restore by selection of backup contents
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2201/00Indexing scheme relating to error detection, to error correction, and to monitoring
    • G06F2201/82Solving problems relating to consistency

Definitions

  • Businesses recognize the commercial value of their data and seek reliable, cost-effective ways to protect the information stored on their computer networks while minimizing impact on productivity.
  • a company might back up critical computing systems such as databases, file servers, web servers, virtual machines, and so on as part of a daily, weekly, or monthly maintenance schedule.
  • the company may similarly protect computing systems used by its employees, such as those used by an accounting department, marketing department, engineering department, and so forth.
  • companies also continue to seek innovative techniques for managing data growth, for example by migrating data to lower-cost storage over time, reducing redundant data, pruning lower priority data, etc.
  • Enterprises also increasingly view their stored data as a valuable asset and look for solutions that leverage their data. For instance, data analysis capabilities, information management, improved data presentation and access features, and the like, are in increasing demand.
  • the company may employ a storage manager that manages information stored as primary data by one or more client computing devices.
  • Each of the client computing devices may back up the primary data to one or more secondary computer devices.
  • the company may use one or more networks, where each network includes one or more client computing devices, and the client computing devices, storage manager, and secondary storage computing devices communicate using the one or more networks.
  • the storage manager may be backed up by a failover node, where the failover node takes on the jobs and responsibilities of the storage manager when the storage manager experiences a failure.
  • the storage manager may experience a failure for a number reasons, such as a hardware failure, a power outage, corrupted data, or any other number of reasons.
  • a hardware failure such as a hardware failure, a power outage, corrupted data, or any other number of reasons.
  • reverting to the failover node may be premature, and instantiating the failover node may introduce delays in the operational status of the client computing devices and/or the secondary storage computing devices that rely on the storage manager.
  • the information management system includes one or more networks of various devices and components, such as one or more client computing devices, storage managers, and failover nodes.
  • Each storage manager may be associated with a failover node, where the failover node is configured to determine whether the associated storage manager has failed and, if so, to designate another storage manager as the operational storage manager.
  • a storage manager selected from the multiple storage managers may be designated as the “active” storage manager.
  • the active storage manager is the storage manager that is online, communicating with the various devices across the one or more networks, such as the one or more client computing devices, secondary storage computing devices, failover nodes, and offline storage managers (e.g., a storage manager that is not currently active but is able to receive and/or send communications across one or more networks), and is managing the primary data and/or secondary data of the information management system.
  • the active storage manager may be backed up to, and/or synchronized with, other storage managers.
  • the active storage manager may backup and/or synchronize to other offline storage managers and/or failover nodes in communication with the active storage manager.
  • the backup of the active storage manager may occur on a repeated, periodic basis, such as every hour, every day, every other day, etc.
  • the active storage manager may backup or synchronize its data to a second, designated storage manager, to one or more of the offline storage managers, to one or more of the failover nodes, or to all of the storage managers (failover or non-failover) in communication with the active storage manager.
  • a failover node in communication with the previously, active storage manager performs this determination.
  • the failover node may perform this determination by checking which of the other storage managers has a most recent backup or synchronization of a previously, active storage manager relative to the other storage managers that were being used for backup and/or synchronization.
  • the failover node may select a previously offline storage manager to be the new, active storage manager where the previously offline storage manager has a most recent backup of the previous active storage manager.
  • the new, active storage manager (e.g., the second active storage manager) may then communicate with the one or more client computing devices, the one or more secondary storage devices, and so forth, and inform each of these devices that the second active storage manager is the active storage manager, and that these devices should accept instructions from the second active storage manager.
  • a monitoring node may be a device, such as a client computing device, storage manager, secondary storage computing device, that is configured to communicate a status message to another monitoring node.
  • each monitoring node may be configured to communicate with each other monitoring node.
  • the monitoring nodes may be configured to communicate a status message to each other monitoring node to determine whether the other monitoring node is reachable.
  • the transmitting monitoring node may be considered a source monitoring node, while the monitoring nodes to whom the status messages are sent may be considered destination monitoring nodes.
  • the source monitoring node may wait a predetermined time period after each status message is sent to receive an acknowledgment message from a corresponding destination monitoring node.
  • the source monitoring node aggregates the responses from the destination monitoring nodes into a session message that the source monitoring node may then send to the failover node.
  • the session message may also include an identifier or flag to indicate whether an acknowledgment message was not received for a particular monitoring node (e.g., the particular monitoring node was unresponsive).
  • the failover node then collects the session messages from each of the monitoring nodes.
  • the failover node may maintain a data structure that lists and/or updates the status of each of the monitoring nodes based on the collected session messages.
  • the data structure may be a two-dimensional table, and the intersections within the table store a value that indicates whether a source monitoring node received an acknowledgment from a destination monitoring node.
  • the failover node may then communicate this data structure as one or more session messages to each of the monitoring nodes, such that each monitoring node is provided with a copy of the data structure.
  • the failover node may reference the node status data structure in determining whether the active failover node has actually failed. For example, the failover node may periodically send a status message to the active storage manager to ensure that the active storage manager is online. In this example, the failover node may fail to receive an acknowledgement message from the active storage manager within a predetermined time period. This failure may signal to the failover node that the active storage manager has failed. To confirm whether the active storage manager has failed, the failover node may reference the node status data structure to determine whether other monitoring nodes have received acknowledgement messages from the active storage manager. The failover node may be further configured with one or more failover rules that define or specify the circumstances under which the failover node may confirm that the active storage manager has failed.
  • the failover node may execute the rules using the node status values from the node status data structure to determine and/or confirm whether the storage manager has actually failed. Where the storage manager has actually failed, the failover node may enter a failover state, where the failover node then determines which of the storage managers then becomes the active storage manager. The failover node may select the new, active storage manager from the other storage managers based on one or more factors including, but not limited to, geographical proximity to the failed storage manager, synchronization or backup time, a numerical or priority identifier, or any other factor and/or combination thereof.
  • FIG. 1 A is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary information management system.
  • FIG. 1 B is a detailed view of a primary storage device, a secondary storage device, and some examples of primary data and secondary copy data.
  • FIG. 1 C is a block diagram of an exemplary information management system including a storage manager, one or more data agents, and one or more media agents.
  • FIG. 1 D is a block diagram illustrating a scalable information management system.
  • FIG. 1 E illustrates certain secondary copy operations according to an exemplary storage policy.
  • FIG. 1 F- 1 H are block diagrams illustrating suitable data structures that may be employed by the information management system.
  • FIG. 2 A illustrates a system and technique for synchronizing primary data to a destination such as a failover site using secondary copy data.
  • FIG. 2 B illustrates an information management system architecture incorporating use of a network file system (NFS) protocol for communicating between the primary and secondary storage subsystems.
  • NFS network file system
  • FIG. 2 C is a block diagram of an example of a highly scalable managed data pool architecture.
  • FIG. 3 A illustrates an information management system configured to perform automatic failover of a storage manager, in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 B illustrates the information management system of FIG. 3 A , where one or more devices have been designated as monitoring nodes, in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates communication pathways of a selected group of monitoring nodes illustrated in FIG. 3 B , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a client computing device of the information management system of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a storage manager of the information management system of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a failover node of the information management system of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a messaging diagram for updating monitoring node statuses of the information management system of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIGS. 9 A- 9 B illustrate a method, in accordance with an example embodiment, for updating node statuses within the information management system of FIG. 3 A and determining whether to enter a failover state of an active storage manager.
  • FIGS. 10 A- 10 B illustrate a method, in accordance with an example embodiment, for activating a failover node of the information management system illustrated in FIG. 3 A .
  • FIG. 1 A shows one such information management system 100 (or “system 100 ”), which generally includes combinations of hardware and software configured to protect and manage data and metadata that are generated and used by computing devices in system 100 .
  • System 100 may be referred to in some embodiments as a “storage management system” or a “data storage management system.”
  • System 100 performs information management operations, some of which may be referred to as “storage operations” or “data storage operations,” to protect and manage the data residing in and/or managed by system 100 .
  • the organization that employs system 100 may be a corporation or other business entity, non-profit organization, educational institution, household, governmental agency, or the like.
  • systems and associated components described herein may be compatible with and/or provide some or all of the functionality of the systems and corresponding components described in one or more of the following U.S. patents/publications and patent applications assigned to Commvault Systems, Inc., each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety herein:
  • System 100 includes computing devices and computing technologies.
  • system 100 can include one or more client computing devices 102 and secondary storage computing devices 106 , as well as storage manager 140 or a host computing device for it.
  • Computing devices can include, without limitation, one or more: workstations, personal computers, desktop computers, or other types of generally fixed computing systems such as mainframe computers, servers, and minicomputers.
  • Other computing devices can include mobile or portable computing devices, such as one or more laptops, tablet computers, personal data assistants, mobile phones (such as smartphones), and other mobile or portable computing devices such as embedded computers, set top boxes, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable computers, etc.
  • Servers can include mail servers, file servers, database servers, virtual machine servers, and web servers.
  • Any given computing device comprises one or more processors (e.g., CPU and/or single-core or multi-core processors), as well as corresponding non-transitory computer memory (e.g., random-access memory (RAM)) for storing computer programs which are to be executed by the one or more processors.
  • processors e.g., CPU and/or single-core or multi-core processors
  • non-transitory computer memory e.g., random-access memory (RAM)
  • Other computer memory for mass storage of data may be packaged/configured with the computing device (e.g., an internal hard disk) and/or may be external and accessible by the computing device (e.g., network-attached storage, a storage array, etc.).
  • a computing device includes cloud computing resources, which may be implemented as virtual machines. For instance, one or more virtual machines may be provided to the organization by a third-party cloud service vendor.
  • computing devices can include one or more virtual machine(s) running on a physical host computing device (or “host machine”) operated by the organization.
  • host machine a physical host computing device operated by the organization.
  • the organization may use one virtual machine as a database server and another virtual machine as a mail server, both virtual machines operating on the same host machine.
  • a Virtual machine (“VM”) is a software implementation of a computer that does not physically exist and is instead instantiated in an operating system of a physical computer (or host machine) to enable applications to execute within the VM's environment, i.e., a VM emulates a physical computer.
  • a VM includes an operating system and associated virtual resources, such as computer memory and processor(s).
  • a hypervisor operates between the VM and the hardware of the physical host machine and is generally responsible for creating and running the VMs.
  • Hypervisors are also known in the art as virtual machine monitors or a virtual machine managers or “VMMs”, and may be implemented in software, firmware, and/or specialized hardware installed on the host machine. Examples of hypervisors include ESX Server, by VMware, Inc. of Palo Alto, Calif.; Microsoft Virtual Server and Microsoft Windows Server Hyper-V, both by Microsoft Corporation of Redmond, Wash.; Sun xVM by Oracle America Inc. of Santa Clara, Calif.; and Xen by Citrix Systems, Santa Clara, Calif. The hypervisor provides resources to each virtual operating system such as a virtual processor, virtual memory, a virtual network device, and a virtual disk. Each virtual machine has one or more associated virtual disks.
  • the hypervisor typically stores the data of virtual disks in files on the file system of the physical host machine, called virtual machine disk files (“VMDK” in VMware lingo) or virtual hard disk image files (in Microsoft lingo).
  • VMDK virtual machine disk files
  • VMFS Virtual Machine File System
  • a virtual machine reads data from and writes data to its virtual disk much the way that a physical machine reads data from and writes data to a physical disk. Examples of techniques for implementing information management in a cloud computing environment are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,285,681. Examples of techniques for implementing information management in a virtualized computing environment are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,307,177.
  • Information management system 100 can also include electronic data storage devices, generally used for mass storage of data, including, e.g., primary storage devices 104 and secondary storage devices 108 .
  • Storage devices can generally be of any suitable type including, without limitation, disk drives, storage arrays (e.g., storage-area network (SAN) and/or network-attached storage (NAS) technology), semiconductor memory (e.g., solid state storage devices), network attached storage (NAS) devices, tape libraries, or other magnetic, non-tape storage devices, optical media storage devices, combinations of the same, etc.
  • storage devices form part of a distributed file system.
  • storage devices are provided in a cloud storage environment (e.g., a private cloud or one operated by a third-party vendor), whether for primary data or secondary copies or both.
  • system 100 can refer to generally all of the illustrated hardware and software components in FIG. 1 C , or the term may refer to only a subset of the illustrated components.
  • system 100 generally refers to a combination of specialized components used to protect, move, manage, manipulate, analyze, and/or process data and metadata generated by client computing devices 102 .
  • system 100 in some cases does not include the underlying components that generate and/or store primary data 112 , such as the client computing devices 102 themselves, and the primary storage devices 104 .
  • secondary storage devices 108 e.g., a third-party provided cloud storage environment
  • “information management system” or “storage management system” may sometimes refer to one or more of the following components, which will be described in further detail below: storage manager, data agent, and media agent.
  • One or more client computing devices 102 may be part of system 100 , each client computing device 102 having an operating system and at least one application 110 and one or more accompanying data agents executing thereon; and associated with one or more primary storage devices 104 storing primary data 112 .
  • Client computing device(s) 102 and primary storage devices 104 may generally be referred to in some cases as primary storage subsystem 117 .
  • data generation sources include one or more client computing devices 102 .
  • a computing device that has a data agent 142 installed and operating on it is generally referred to as a “client computing device” 102 , and may include any type of computing device, without limitation.
  • a client computing device 102 may be associated with one or more users and/or user accounts.
  • a “client” is a logical component of information management system 100 , which may represent a logical grouping of one or more data agents installed on a client computing device 102 .
  • Storage manager 140 recognizes a client as a component of system 100 , and in some embodiments, may automatically create a client component the first time a data agent 142 is installed on a client computing device 102 . Because data generated by executable component(s) 110 is tracked by the associated data agent 142 so that it may be properly protected in system 100 , a client may be said to generate data and to store the generated data to primary storage, such as primary storage device 104 .
  • client computing device does not imply that a client computing device 102 is necessarily configured in the client/server sense relative to another computing device such as a mail server, or that a client computing device 102 cannot be a server in its own right.
  • a client computing device 102 can be and/or include mail servers, file servers, database servers, virtual machine servers, and/or web servers.
  • Each client computing device 102 may have application(s) 110 executing thereon which generate and manipulate the data that is to be protected from loss and managed in system 100 .
  • Applications 110 generally facilitate the operations of an organization, and can include, without limitation, mail server applications (e.g., Microsoft Exchange Server), file system applications, mail client applications (e.g., Microsoft Exchange Client), database applications or database management systems (e.g., SQL, Oracle, SAP, Lotus Notes Database), word processing applications (e.g., Microsoft Word), spreadsheet applications, financial applications, presentation applications, graphics and/or video applications, browser applications, mobile applications, entertainment applications, and so on.
  • Each application 110 may be accompanied by an application-specific data agent 142 , though not all data agents 142 are application-specific or associated with only application.
  • a file manager application e.g., Microsoft Windows Explorer
  • Client computing devices 102 can have at least one operating system (e.g., Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X, iOS, IBM z/OS, Linux, other Unix-based operating systems, etc.) installed thereon, which may support or host one or more file systems and other applications 110 .
  • a virtual machine that executes on a host client computing device 102 may be considered an application 110 and may be accompanied by a specific data agent 142 (e.g., virtual server data agent).
  • Client computing devices 102 and other components in system 100 can be connected to one another via one or more electronic communication pathways 114 .
  • a first communication pathway 114 may communicatively couple client computing device 102 and secondary storage computing device 106 ;
  • a second communication pathway 114 may communicatively couple storage manager 140 and client computing device 102 ;
  • a third communication pathway 114 may communicatively couple storage manager 140 and secondary storage computing device 106 , etc. (see, e.g., FIG. 1 A and FIG. 1 C ).
  • a communication pathway 114 can include one or more networks or other connection types including one or more of the following, without limitation: the Internet, a wide area network (WAN), a local area network (LAN), a Storage Area Network (SAN), a Fibre Channel (FC) connection, a Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) connection, a virtual private network (VPN), a token ring or TCP/IP based network, an intranet network, a point-to-point link, a cellular network, a wireless data transmission system, a two-way cable system, an interactive kiosk network, a satellite network, a broadband network, a baseband network, a neural network, a mesh network, an ad hoc network, other appropriate computer or telecommunications networks, combinations of the same or the like.
  • WAN wide area network
  • LAN local area network
  • SAN Storage Area Network
  • FC Fibre Channel
  • SCSI Small Computer System Interface
  • VPN virtual private network
  • TCP/IP token ring or TCP/IP based network
  • intranet network
  • Communication pathways 114 in some cases may also include application programming interfaces (APIs) including, e.g., cloud service provider APIs, virtual machine management APIs, and hosted service provider APIs.
  • APIs application programming interfaces
  • the underlying infrastructure of communication pathways 114 may be wired and/or wireless, analog and/or digital, or any combination thereof; and the facilities used may be private, public, third-party provided, or any combination thereof, without limitation.
  • a “subclient” is a logical grouping of all or part of a client's primary data 112 .
  • a subclient may be defined according to how the subclient data is to be protected as a unit in system 100 .
  • a subclient may be associated with a certain storage policy.
  • a given client may thus comprise several subclients, each subclient associated with a different storage policy.
  • some files may form a first subclient that requires compression and deduplication and is associated with a first storage policy.
  • Other files of the client may form a second subclient that requires a different retention schedule as well as encryption, and may be associated with a different, second storage policy.
  • the primary data may be generated by the same application 110 and may belong to one given client, portions of the data may be assigned to different subclients for distinct treatment by system 100 . More detail on subclients is given in regard to storage policies below.
  • Primary data 112 is generally production data or “live” data generated by the operating system and/or applications 110 executing on client computing device 102 .
  • Primary data 112 is generally stored on primary storage device(s) 104 and is organized via a file system operating on the client computing device 102 .
  • client computing device(s) 102 and corresponding applications 110 may create, access, modify, write, delete, and otherwise use primary data 112 .
  • Primary data 112 is generally in the native format of the source application 110 .
  • Primary data 112 is an initial or first stored body of data generated by the source application 110 .
  • Primary data 112 in some cases is created substantially directly from data generated by the corresponding source application 110 . It can be useful in performing certain tasks to organize primary data 112 into units of different granularities.
  • primary data 112 can include files, directories, file system volumes, data blocks, extents, or any other hierarchies or organizations of data objects.
  • a “data object” can refer to (i) any file that is currently addressable by a file system or that was previously addressable by the file system (e.g., an archive file), and/or to (ii) a subset of such a file (e.g., a data block, an extent, etc.).
  • Primary data 112 may include structured data (e.g., database files), unstructured data (e.g., documents), and/or semi-structured data. See, e.g., FIG. 1 B .
  • Metadata generally includes information about data objects and/or characteristics associated with the data objects. For simplicity herein, it is to be understood that, unless expressly stated otherwise, any reference to primary data 112 generally also includes its associated metadata, but references to metadata generally do not include the primary data.
  • Metadata can include, without limitation, one or more of the following: the data owner (e.g., the client or user that generates the data), the last modified time (e.g., the time of the most recent modification of the data object), a data object name (e.g., a file name), a data object size (e.g., a number of bytes of data), information about the content (e.g., an indication as to the existence of a particular search term), user-supplied tags, to/from information for email (e.g., an email sender, recipient, etc.), creation date, file type (e.g., format or application type), last accessed time, application type (e.g., type of application that generated the data object), location/network (e.g., a current, past or future location of the data object and network pathways to/from the data object), geographic location (e.g., GPS coordinates), frequency of change (e.g., a period in which the data object is modified), business unit (e.g.,
  • some applications 110 and/or other components of system 100 maintain indices of metadata for data objects, e.g., metadata associated with individual email messages.
  • metadata e.g., metadata associated with individual email messages.
  • Primary storage devices 104 storing primary data 112 may be relatively fast and/or expensive technology (e.g., flash storage, a disk drive, a hard-disk storage array, solid state memory, etc.), typically to support high-performance live production environments. Primary data 112 may be highly changeable and/or may be intended for relatively short term retention (e.g., hours, days, or weeks). According to some embodiments, client computing device 102 can access primary data 112 stored in primary storage device 104 by making conventional file system calls via the operating system. Each client computing device 102 is generally associated with and/or in communication with one or more primary storage devices 104 storing corresponding primary data 112 .
  • a client computing device 102 is said to be associated with or in communication with a particular primary storage device 104 if it is capable of one or more of: routing and/or storing data (e.g., primary data 112 ) to the primary storage device 104 , coordinating the routing and/or storing of data to the primary storage device 104 , retrieving data from the primary storage device 104 , coordinating the retrieval of data from the primary storage device 104 , and modifying and/or deleting data in the primary storage device 104 .
  • a client computing device 102 may be said to access data stored in an associated storage device 104 .
  • Primary storage device 104 may be dedicated or shared. In some cases, each primary storage device 104 is dedicated to an associated client computing device 102 , e.g., a local disk drive. In other cases, one or more primary storage devices 104 can be shared by multiple client computing devices 102 , e.g., via a local network, in a cloud storage implementation, etc. As one example, primary storage device 104 can be a storage array shared by a group of client computing devices 102 , such as EMC Clariion, EMC Symmetrix, EMC Celerra, Dell EqualLogic, IBM XIV, NetApp FAS, HP EVA, and HP 3PAR.
  • EMC Clariion EMC Symmetrix
  • EMC Celerra Dell EqualLogic
  • IBM XIV NetApp FAS
  • HP EVA HP 3PAR
  • System 100 may also include hosted services (not shown), which may be hosted in some cases by an entity other than the organization that employs the other components of system 100 .
  • the hosted services may be provided by online service providers.
  • Such service providers can provide social networking services, hosted email services, or hosted productivity applications or other hosted applications such as software-as-a-service (SaaS), platform-as-a-service (PaaS), application service providers (ASPs), cloud services, or other mechanisms for delivering functionality via a network.
  • each hosted service may generate additional data and metadata, which may be managed by system 100 , e.g., as primary data 112 .
  • the hosted services may be accessed using one of the applications 110 .
  • a hosted mail service may be accessed via browser running on a client computing device 102 .
  • Secondary data 112 stored on primary storage devices 104 may be compromised in some cases, such as when an employee deliberately or accidentally deletes or overwrites primary data 112 . Or primary storage devices 104 can be damaged, lost, or otherwise corrupted. For recovery and/or regulatory compliance purposes, it is therefore useful to generate and maintain copies of primary data 112 . Accordingly, system 100 includes one or more secondary storage computing devices 106 and one or more secondary storage devices 108 configured to create and store one or more secondary copies 116 of primary data 112 including its associated metadata. The secondary storage computing devices 106 and the secondary storage devices 108 may be referred to as secondary storage subsystem 118 .
  • Secondary copies 116 can help in search and analysis efforts and meet other information management goals as well, such as: restoring data and/or metadata if an original version is lost (e.g., by deletion, corruption, or disaster); allowing point-in-time recovery; complying with regulatory data retention and electronic discovery (e-discovery) requirements; reducing utilized storage capacity in the production system and/or in secondary storage; facilitating organization and search of data; improving user access to data files across multiple computing devices and/or hosted services; and implementing data retention and pruning policies.
  • restoring data and/or metadata if an original version is lost e.g., by deletion, corruption, or disaster
  • e-discovery electronic discovery
  • reducing utilized storage capacity in the production system and/or in secondary storage facilitating organization and search of data
  • improving user access to data files across multiple computing devices and/or hosted services and implementing data retention and pruning policies.
  • a secondary copy 116 can comprise a separate stored copy of data that is derived from one or more earlier-created stored copies (e.g., derived from primary data 112 or from another secondary copy 116 ).
  • Secondary copies 116 can include point-in-time data, and may be intended for relatively long-term retention before some or all of the data is moved to other storage or discarded.
  • a secondary copy 116 may be in a different storage device than other previously stored copies; and/or may be remote from other previously stored copies.
  • Secondary copies 116 can be stored in the same storage device as primary data 112 .
  • a disk array capable of performing hardware snapshots stores primary data 112 and creates and stores hardware snapshots of the primary data 112 as secondary copies 116 .
  • Secondary copies 116 may be stored in relatively slow and/or lower cost storage (e.g., magnetic tape).
  • a secondary copy 116 may be stored in a backup or archive format, or in some other format different from the native source application format or other format of primary data 112 .
  • Secondary storage computing devices 106 may index secondary copies 116 (e.g., using a media agent 144 ), enabling users to browse and restore at a later time and further enabling the lifecycle management of the indexed data.
  • a pointer or other location indicia e.g., a stub
  • system 100 may create and manage multiple secondary copies 116 of a particular data object or metadata, each copy representing the state of the data object in primary data 112 at a particular point in time. Moreover, since an instance of a data object in primary data 112 may eventually be deleted from primary storage device 104 and the file system, system 100 may continue to manage point-in-time representations of that data object, even though the instance in primary data 112 no longer exists.
  • the operating system and other applications 110 of client computing device(s) 102 may execute within or under the management of virtualization software (e.g., a VMM), and the primary storage device(s) 104 may comprise a virtual disk created on a physical storage device.
  • System 100 may create secondary copies 116 of the files or other data objects in a virtual disk file and/or secondary copies 116 of the entire virtual disk file itself (e.g., of an entire .vmdk file).
  • Secondary copies 116 are distinguishable from corresponding primary data 112 .
  • secondary copies 116 can be stored in a different format from primary data 112 (e.g., backup, archive, or other non-native format). For this or other reasons, secondary copies 116 may not be directly usable by applications 110 or client computing device 102 (e.g., via standard system calls or otherwise) without modification, processing, or other intervention by system 100 which may be referred to as “restore” operations.
  • Secondary copies 116 may have been processed by data agent 142 and/or media agent 144 in the course of being created (e.g., compression, deduplication, encryption, integrity markers, indexing, formatting, application-aware metadata, etc.), and thus secondary copy 116 may represent source primary data 112 without necessarily being exactly identical to the source.
  • data agent 142 and/or media agent 144 e.g., compression, deduplication, encryption, integrity markers, indexing, formatting, application-aware metadata, etc.
  • secondary copies 116 may be stored on a secondary storage device 108 that is inaccessible to application 110 running on client computing device 102 and/or hosted service.
  • Some secondary copies 116 may be “offline copies,” in that they are not readily available (e.g., not mounted to tape or disk). Offline copies can include copies of data that system 100 can access without human intervention (e.g., tapes within an automated tape library, but not yet mounted in a drive), and copies that the system 100 can access only with some human intervention (e.g., tapes located at an offsite storage site).
  • Creating secondary copies can be challenging when hundreds or thousands of client computing devices 102 continually generate large volumes of primary data 112 to be protected. Also, there can be significant overhead involved in the creation of secondary copies 116 . Moreover, specialized programmed intelligence and/or hardware capability is generally needed for accessing and interacting with secondary storage devices 108 . Client computing devices 102 may interact directly with a secondary storage device 108 to create secondary copies 116 , but in view of the factors described above, this approach can negatively impact the ability of client computing device 102 to serve/service application 110 and produce primary data 112 . Further, any given client computing device 102 may not be optimized for interaction with certain secondary storage devices 108 .
  • system 100 may include one or more software and/or hardware components which generally act as intermediaries between client computing devices 102 (that generate primary data 112 ) and secondary storage devices 108 (that store secondary copies 116 ).
  • these intermediate components provide other benefits. For instance, as discussed further below with respect to FIG. 1 D , distributing some of the work involved in creating secondary copies 116 can enhance scalability and improve system performance.
  • the intermediate components can include one or more secondary storage computing devices 106 as shown in FIG. 1 A and/or one or more media agents 144 .
  • Media agents are discussed further below (e.g., with respect to FIGS. 1 C- 1 E ).
  • These special-purpose components of system 100 comprise specialized programmed intelligence and/or hardware capability for writing to, reading from, instructing, communicating with, or otherwise interacting with secondary storage devices 108 .
  • Secondary storage computing device(s) 106 can comprise any of the computing devices described above, without limitation. In some cases, secondary storage computing device(s) 106 also include specialized hardware componentry and/or software intelligence (e.g., specialized interfaces) for interacting with certain secondary storage device(s) 108 with which they may be specially associated.
  • specialized hardware componentry and/or software intelligence e.g., specialized interfaces
  • client computing device 102 may communicate the primary data 112 to be copied (or a processed version thereof generated by a data agent 142 ) to the designated secondary storage computing device 106 , via a communication pathway 114 .
  • Secondary storage computing device 106 in turn may further process and convey the data or a processed version thereof to secondary storage device 108 .
  • One or more secondary copies 116 may be created from existing secondary copies 116 , such as in the case of an auxiliary copy operation, described further below.
  • FIG. 1 B is a detailed view of some specific examples of primary data stored on primary storage device(s) 104 and secondary copy data stored on secondary storage device(s) 108 , with other components of the system removed for the purposes of illustration.
  • primary storage device(s) 104 Stored on primary storage device(s) 104 are primary data 112 objects including word processing documents 119 A-B, spreadsheets 120 , presentation documents 122 , video files 124 , image files 126 , email mailboxes 128 (and corresponding email messages 129 A-C), HTML/XML or other types of markup language files 130 , databases 132 and corresponding tables or other data structures 133 A- 133 C.
  • Some or all primary data 112 objects are associated with corresponding metadata (e.g., “Meta 1 - 11 ”), which may include file system metadata and/or application-specific metadata.
  • metadata e.g., “Meta 1 - 11 ”
  • Stored on the secondary storage device(s) 108 are secondary copy 116 data objects 134 A-C which may include copies of or may otherwise represent corresponding primary data 112 .
  • Secondary copy data objects 134 A-C can individually represent more than one primary data object.
  • secondary copy data object 134 A represents three separate primary data objects 133 C, 122 , and 129 C (represented as 133 C′, 122 ′, and 129 C′, respectively, and accompanied by corresponding metadata Meta 11 , Meta 3 , and Meta 8 , respectively).
  • secondary storage computing devices 106 or other components in secondary storage subsystem 118 may process the data received from primary storage subsystem 117 and store a secondary copy including a transformed and/or supplemented representation of a primary data object and/or metadata that is different from the original format, e.g., in a compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, or other modified format.
  • Secondary storage computing devices 106 can generate new metadata or other information based on said processing, and store the newly generated information along with the secondary copies.
  • Secondary copy data object 1346 represents primary data objects 120 , 1336 , and 119 A as 120 ′, 1336 ′, and 119 A′, respectively, accompanied by corresponding metadata Meta 2 , Meta 10 , and Meta 1 , respectively.
  • secondary copy data object 134 C represents primary data objects 133 A, 1196 , and 129 A as 133 A′, 1196 ′, and 129 A′, respectively, accompanied by corresponding metadata Meta 9 , Meta 5 , and Meta 6 , respectively.
  • System 100 can incorporate a variety of different hardware and software components, which can in turn be organized with respect to one another in many different configurations, depending on the embodiment. There are critical design choices involved in specifying the functional responsibilities of the components and the role of each component in system 100 . Such design choices can impact how system 100 performs and adapts to data growth and other changing circumstances.
  • FIG. 1 C shows a system 100 designed according to these considerations and includes: storage manager 140 , one or more data agents 142 executing on client computing device(s) 102 and configured to process primary data 112 , and one or more media agents 144 executing on one or more secondary storage computing devices 106 for performing tasks involving secondary storage devices 108 .
  • Storage manager 140 is a centralized storage and/or information manager that is configured to perform certain control functions and also to store certain critical information about system 100 —hence storage manager 140 is said to manage system 100 .
  • the number of components in system 100 and the amount of data under management can be large. Managing the components and data is therefore a significant task, which can grow unpredictably as the number of components and data scale to meet the needs of the organization.
  • responsibility for controlling system 100 or at least a significant portion of that responsibility, is allocated to storage manager 140 .
  • Storage manager 140 can be adapted independently according to changing circumstances, without having to replace or re-design the remainder of the system.
  • a computing device for hosting and/or operating as storage manager 140 can be selected to best suit the functions and networking needs of storage manager 140 .
  • Storage manager 140 may be a software module or other application hosted by a suitable computing device. In some embodiments, storage manager 140 is itself a computing device that performs the functions described herein. Storage manager 140 comprises or operates in conjunction with one or more associated data structures such as a dedicated database (e.g., management database 146 ), depending on the configuration. The storage manager 140 generally initiates, performs, coordinates, and/or controls storage and other information management operations performed by system 100 , e.g., to protect and control primary data 112 and secondary copies 116 . In general, storage manager 140 is said to manage system 100 , which includes communicating with, instructing, and controlling in some circumstances components such as data agents 142 and media agents 144 , etc.
  • a dedicated database e.g., management database 146
  • the storage manager 140 generally initiates, performs, coordinates, and/or controls storage and other information management operations performed by system 100 , e.g., to protect and control primary data 112 and secondary copies 116 .
  • storage manager 140 is said to manage system
  • storage manager 140 may communicate with, instruct, and/or control some or all elements of system 100 , such as data agents 142 and media agents 144 . In this manner, storage manager 140 manages the operation of various hardware and software components in system 100 . In certain embodiments, control information originates from storage manager 140 and status as well as index reporting is transmitted to storage manager 140 by the managed components, whereas payload data and metadata are generally communicated between data agents 142 and media agents 144 (or otherwise between client computing device(s) 102 and secondary storage computing device(s) 106 ), e.g., at the direction of and under the management of storage manager 140 .
  • Control information can generally include parameters and instructions for carrying out information management operations, such as, without limitation, instructions to perform a task associated with an operation, timing information specifying when to initiate a task, data path information specifying what components to communicate with or access in carrying out an operation, and the like.
  • information management operations are controlled or initiated by other components of system 100 (e.g., by media agents 144 or data agents 142 ), instead of or in combination with storage manager 140 .
  • storage manager 140 provides one or more of the following functions:
  • Storage manager 140 may maintain an associated database 146 (or “storage manager database 146 ” or “management database 146 ”) of management-related data and information management policies 148 .
  • Database 146 is stored in computer memory accessible by storage manager 140 .
  • Database 146 may include a management index 150 (or “index 150 ”) or other data structure(s) that may store: logical associations between components of the system; user preferences and/or profiles (e.g., preferences regarding encryption, compression, or deduplication of primary data or secondary copies; preferences regarding the scheduling, type, or other aspects of secondary copy or other operations; mappings of particular information management users or user accounts to certain computing devices or other components, etc.; management tasks; media containerization; other useful data; and/or any combination thereof.
  • management index 150 or other data structure(s) that may store: logical associations between components of the system; user preferences and/or profiles (e.g., preferences regarding encryption, compression, or deduplication of primary data or secondary copies; preferences regarding the scheduling, type, or other aspects of secondary copy or other operations;
  • index 150 may use index 150 to track logical associations between media agents 144 and secondary storage devices 108 and/or movement of data to/from secondary storage devices 108 .
  • index 150 may store data associating a client computing device 102 with a particular media agent 144 and/or secondary storage device 108 , as specified in an information management policy 148 .
  • an information management policy 148 can include a stored data structure or other information source that specifies parameters (e.g., criteria and rules) associated with storage management or other information management operations.
  • Storage manager 140 can process an information management policy 148 and/or index 150 and, based on the results, identify an information management operation to perform, identify the appropriate components in system 100 to be involved in the operation (e.g., client computing devices 102 and corresponding data agents 142 , secondary storage computing devices 106 and corresponding media agents 144 , etc.), establish connections to those components and/or between those components, and/or instruct and control those components to carry out the operation. In this manner, system 100 can translate stored information into coordinated activity among the various computing devices in system 100 .
  • an information management operation to perform identify the appropriate components in system 100 to be involved in the operation (e.g., client computing devices 102 and corresponding data agents 142 , secondary storage computing devices 106 and corresponding media agents 144 , etc.), establish connections to those components and/or between those components, and/or instruct and control those components to carry out the operation.
  • system 100 can translate stored information into coordinated activity among the various computing devices in system 100 .
  • Management database 146 may maintain information management policies 148 and associated data, although information management policies 148 can be stored in computer memory at any appropriate location outside management database 146 .
  • an information management policy 148 such as a storage policy may be stored as metadata in a media agent database 152 or in a secondary storage device 108 (e.g., as an archive copy) for use in restore or other information management operations, depending on the embodiment.
  • Information management policies 148 are described further below.
  • management database 146 comprises a relational database (e.g., an SQL database) for tracking metadata, such as metadata associated with secondary copy operations (e.g., what client computing devices 102 and corresponding subclient data were protected and where the secondary copies are stored and which media agent 144 performed the storage operation(s)).
  • management database 146 may comprise data needed to kick off secondary copy operations (e.g., storage policies, schedule policies, etc.), status and reporting information about completed jobs (e.g., status and error reports on yesterday's backup jobs), and additional information sufficient to enable restore and disaster recovery operations (e.g., media agent associations, location indexing, content indexing, etc.).
  • secondary copy operations e.g., storage policies, schedule policies, etc.
  • status and reporting information about completed jobs e.g., status and error reports on yesterday's backup jobs
  • additional information sufficient to enable restore and disaster recovery operations e.g., media agent associations, location indexing, content indexing, etc.
  • Storage manager 140 may include a jobs agent 156 , a user interface 158 , and a management agent 154 , all of which may be implemented as interconnected software modules or application programs. These are described further below.
  • Jobs agent 156 in some embodiments initiates, controls, and/or monitors the status of some or all information management operations previously performed, currently being performed, or scheduled to be performed by system 100 .
  • a job is a logical grouping of information management operations such as daily storage operations scheduled for a certain set of subclients (e.g., generating incremental block-level backup copies 116 at a certain time every day for database files in a certain geographical location).
  • jobs agent 156 may access information management policies 148 (e.g., in management database 146 ) to determine when, where, and how to initiate/control jobs in system 100 .
  • User interface 158 may include information processing and display software, such as a graphical user interface (GUI), an application program interface (API), and/or other interactive interface(s) through which users and system processes can retrieve information about the status of information management operations or issue instructions to storage manager 140 and other components.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • API application program interface
  • users may issue instructions to the components in system 100 regarding performance of secondary copy and recovery operations. For example, a user may modify a schedule concerning the number of pending secondary copy operations.
  • a user may employ the GUI to view the status of pending secondary copy jobs or to monitor the status of certain components in system 100 (e.g., the amount of capacity left in a storage device).
  • Storage manager 140 may track information that permits it to select, designate, or otherwise identify content indices, deduplication databases, or similar databases or resources or data sets within its information management cell (or another cell) to be searched in response to certain queries. Such queries may be entered by the user by interacting with user interface 158 .
  • Various embodiments of information management system 100 may be configured and/or designed to generate user interface data usable for rendering the various interactive user interfaces described.
  • the user interface data may be used by system 100 and/or by another system, device, and/or software program (for example, a browser program), to render the interactive user interfaces.
  • the interactive user interfaces may be displayed on, for example, electronic displays (including, for example, touch-enabled displays), consoles, etc., whether direct-connected to storage manager 140 or communicatively coupled remotely, e.g., via an internet connection.
  • the present disclosure describes various embodiments of interactive and dynamic user interfaces, some of which may be generated by user interface agent 158 , and which are the result of significant technological development.
  • User interfaces described herein may provide improved human-computer interactions, allowing for significant cognitive and ergonomic efficiencies and advantages over previous systems, including reduced mental workloads, improved decision-making, and the like.
  • User interface 158 may operate in a single integrated view or console (not shown).
  • the console may support a reporting capability for generating a variety of reports, which may be tailored to a particular aspect of information management.
  • User interfaces are not exclusive to storage manager 140 and in some embodiments a user may access information locally from a computing device component of system 100 .
  • a user may access information locally from a computing device component of system 100 .
  • some information pertaining to installed data agents 142 and associated data streams may be available from client computing device 102 .
  • some information pertaining to media agents 144 and associated data streams may be available from secondary storage computing device 106 .
  • Management agent 154 can provide storage manager 140 with the ability to communicate with other components within system 100 and/or with other information management cells via network protocols and application programming interfaces (APIs) including, e.g., HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, REST, virtualization software APIs, cloud service provider APIs, and hosted service provider APIs, without limitation.
  • APIs application programming interfaces
  • Management agent 154 also allows multiple information management cells to communicate with one another.
  • system 100 in some cases may be one information management cell in a network of multiple cells adjacent to one another or otherwise logically related, e.g., in a WAN or LAN. With this arrangement, the cells may communicate with one another through respective management agents 154 . Inter-cell communications and hierarchy is described in greater detail in e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
  • An “information management cell” may generally include a logical and/or physical grouping of a combination of hardware and software components associated with performing information management operations on electronic data, typically one storage manager 140 and at least one data agent 142 (executing on a client computing device 102 ) and at least one media agent 144 (executing on a secondary storage computing device 106 ).
  • the components shown in FIG. 1 C may together form an information management cell.
  • a system 100 may be referred to as an information management cell or a storage operation cell.
  • a given cell may be identified by the identity of its storage manager 140 , which is generally responsible for managing the cell.
  • Multiple cells may be organized hierarchically, so that cells may inherit properties from hierarchically superior cells or be controlled by other cells in the hierarchy (automatically or otherwise).
  • cells may inherit or otherwise be associated with information management policies, preferences, information management operational parameters, or other properties or characteristics according to their relative position in a hierarchy of cells.
  • Cells may also be organized hierarchically according to function, geography, architectural considerations, or other factors useful or desirable in performing information management operations. For example, a first cell may represent a geographic segment of an enterprise, such as a Chicago office, and a second cell may represent a different geographic segment, such as a New York City office.
  • Other cells may represent departments within a particular office, e.g., human resources, finance, engineering, etc.
  • a first cell may perform one or more first types of information management operations (e.g., one or more first types of secondary copies at a certain frequency), and a second cell may perform one or more second types of information management operations (e.g., one or more second types of secondary copies at a different frequency and under different retention rules).
  • first types of information management operations e.g., one or more first types of secondary copies at a certain frequency
  • second cell may perform one or more second types of information management operations (e.g., one or more second types of secondary copies at a different frequency and under different retention rules).
  • the hierarchical information is maintained by one or more storage managers 140 that manage the respective cells (e.g., in corresponding management database(s) 146 ).
  • a variety of different applications 110 can operate on a given client computing device 102 , including operating systems, file systems, database applications, e-mail applications, and virtual machines, just to name a few. And, as part of the process of creating and restoring secondary copies 116 , the client computing device 102 may be tasked with processing and preparing the primary data 112 generated by these various applications 110 . Moreover, the nature of the processing/preparation can differ across application types, e.g., due to inherent structural, state, and formatting differences among applications 110 and/or the operating system of client computing device 102 . Each data agent 142 is therefore advantageously configured in some embodiments to assist in the performance of information management operations based on the type of data that is being protected at a client-specific and/or application-specific level.
  • Data agent 142 is a component of information system 100 and is generally directed by storage manager 140 to participate in creating or restoring secondary copies 116 .
  • Data agent 142 may be a software program (e.g., in the form of a set of executable binary files) that executes on the same client computing device 102 as the associated application 110 that data agent 142 is configured to protect.
  • Data agent 142 is generally responsible for managing, initiating, or otherwise assisting in the performance of information management operations in reference to its associated application(s) 110 and corresponding primary data 112 which is generated/accessed by the particular application(s) 110 .
  • data agent 142 may take part in copying, archiving, migrating, and/or replicating of certain primary data 112 stored in the primary storage device(s) 104 .
  • Data agent 142 may receive control information from storage manager 140 , such as commands to transfer copies of data objects and/or metadata to one or more media agents 144 .
  • Data agent 142 also may compress, deduplicate, and encrypt certain primary data 112 , as well as capture application-related metadata before transmitting the processed data to media agent 144 .
  • Data agent 142 also may receive instructions from storage manager 140 to restore (or assist in restoring) a secondary copy 116 from secondary storage device 108 to primary storage 104 , such that the restored data may be properly accessed by application 110 in a suitable format as though it were primary data 112 .
  • Each data agent 142 may be specialized for a particular application 110 .
  • different individual data agents 142 may be designed to handle Microsoft Exchange data, Lotus Notes data, Microsoft Windows file system data, Microsoft Active Directory Objects data, SQL Server data, Share Point data, Oracle database data, SAP database data, virtual machines and/or associated data, and other types of data.
  • a file system data agent may handle data files and/or other file system information. If a client computing device 102 has two or more types of data 112 , a specialized data agent 142 may be used for each data type.
  • the client computing device 102 may use: (1) a Microsoft Exchange Mailbox data agent 142 to back up the Exchange mailboxes; (2) a Microsoft Exchange Database data agent 142 to back up the Exchange databases; (3) a Microsoft Exchange Public Folder data agent 142 to back up the Exchange Public Folders; and (4) a Microsoft Windows File System data agent 142 to back up the file system of client computing device 102 .
  • these specialized data agents 142 are treated as four separate data agents 142 even though they operate on the same client computing device 102 .
  • Other examples may include archive management data agents such as a migration archiver or a compliance archiver, Quick Recovery® agents, and continuous data replication agents.
  • Application-specific data agents 142 can provide improved performance as compared to generic agents. For instance, because application-specific data agents 142 may only handle data for a single software application, the design, operation, and performance of the data agent 142 can be streamlined. The data agent 142 may therefore execute faster and consume less persistent storage and/or operating memory than data agents designed to generically accommodate multiple different software applications 110 .
  • Each data agent 142 may be configured to access data and/or metadata stored in the primary storage device(s) 104 associated with data agent 142 and its host client computing device 102 , and process the data appropriately. For example, during a secondary copy operation, data agent 142 may arrange or assemble the data and metadata into one or more files having a certain format (e.g., a particular backup or archive format) before transferring the file(s) to a media agent 144 or other component.
  • the file(s) may include a list of files or other metadata.
  • a data agent 142 may be distributed between client computing device 102 and storage manager 140 (and any other intermediate components) or may be deployed from a remote location or its functions approximated by a remote process that performs some or all of the functions of data agent 142 .
  • a data agent 142 may perform some functions provided by media agent 144 .
  • Other embodiments may employ one or more generic data agents 142 that can handle and process data from two or more different applications 110 , or that can handle and process multiple data types, instead of or in addition to using specialized data agents 142 .
  • one generic data agent 142 may be used to back up, migrate and restore Microsoft Exchange Mailbox data and Microsoft Exchange Database data, while another generic data agent may handle Microsoft Exchange Public Folder data and Microsoft Windows File System data.
  • off-loading certain responsibilities from client computing devices 102 to intermediate components such as secondary storage computing device(s) 106 and corresponding media agent(s) 144 can provide a number of benefits including improved performance of client computing device 102 , faster and more reliable information management operations, and enhanced scalability.
  • media agent 144 can act as a local cache of recently-copied data and/or metadata stored to secondary storage device(s) 108 , thus improving restore capabilities and performance for the cached data.
  • Media agent 144 is a component of system 100 and is generally directed by storage manager 140 in creating and restoring secondary copies 116 . Whereas storage manager 140 generally manages system 100 as a whole, media agent 144 provides a portal to certain secondary storage devices 108 , such as by having specialized features for communicating with and accessing certain associated secondary storage device 108 . Media agent 144 may be a software program (e.g., in the form of a set of executable binary files) that executes on a secondary storage computing device 106 . Media agent 144 generally manages, coordinates, and facilitates the transmission of data between a data agent 142 (executing on client computing device 102 ) and secondary storage device(s) 108 associated with media agent 144 .
  • a data agent 142 executing on client computing device 102
  • secondary storage device(s) 108 associated with media agent 144 .
  • media agent 144 may interact with media agent 144 to gain access to data stored on associated secondary storage device(s) 108 , (e.g., to browse, read, write, modify, delete, or restore data).
  • media agents 144 can generate and store information relating to characteristics of the stored data and/or metadata, or can generate and store other types of information that generally provides insight into the contents of the secondary storage devices 108 —generally referred to as indexing of the stored secondary copies 116 .
  • Each media agent 144 may operate on a dedicated secondary storage computing device 106 , while in other embodiments a plurality of media agents 144 may operate on the same secondary storage computing device 106 .
  • a media agent 144 may be associated with a particular secondary storage device 108 if that media agent 144 is capable of one or more of: routing and/or storing data to the particular secondary storage device 108 ; coordinating the routing and/or storing of data to the particular secondary storage device 108 ; retrieving data from the particular secondary storage device 108 ; coordinating the retrieval of data from the particular secondary storage device 108 ; and modifying and/or deleting data retrieved from the particular secondary storage device 108 .
  • Media agent 144 in certain embodiments is physically separate from the associated secondary storage device 108 .
  • a media agent 144 may operate on a secondary storage computing device 106 in a distinct housing, package, and/or location from the associated secondary storage device 108 .
  • a media agent 144 operates on a first server computer and is in communication with a secondary storage device(s) 108 operating in a separate rack-mounted RAID-based system.
  • a media agent 144 associated with a particular secondary storage device 108 may instruct secondary storage device 108 to perform an information management task. For instance, a media agent 144 may instruct a tape library to use a robotic arm or other retrieval means to load or eject a certain storage media, and to subsequently archive, migrate, or retrieve data to or from that media, e.g., for the purpose of restoring data to a client computing device 102 .
  • a secondary storage device 108 may include an array of hard disk drives or solid state drives organized in a RAID configuration, and media agent 144 may forward a logical unit number (LUN) and other appropriate information to the array, which uses the received information to execute the desired secondary copy operation.
  • Media agent 144 may communicate with a secondary storage device 108 via a suitable communications link, such as a SCSI or Fibre Channel link.
  • Each media agent 144 may maintain an associated media agent database 152 .
  • Media agent database 152 may be stored to a disk or other storage device (not shown) that is local to the secondary storage computing device 106 on which media agent 144 executes. In other cases, media agent database 152 is stored separately from the host secondary storage computing device 106 .
  • Media agent database 152 can include, among other things, a media agent index 153 (see, e.g., FIG. 1 C ). In some cases, media agent index 153 does not form a part of and is instead separate from media agent database 152 .
  • Media agent index 153 may be a data structure associated with the particular media agent 144 that includes information about the stored data associated with the particular media agent and which may be generated in the course of performing a secondary copy operation or a restore. Index 153 provides a fast and efficient mechanism for locating/browsing secondary copies 116 or other data stored in secondary storage devices 108 without having to access secondary storage device 108 to retrieve the information from there.
  • index 153 may include metadata such as a list of the data objects (e.g., files/subdirectories, database objects, mailbox objects, etc.), a logical path to the secondary copy 116 on the corresponding secondary storage device 108 , location information (e.g., offsets) indicating where the data objects are stored in the secondary storage device 108 , when the data objects were created or modified, etc.
  • location information e.g., offsets
  • index 153 includes metadata associated with the secondary copies 116 that is readily available for use from media agent 144 .
  • some or all of the information in index 153 may instead or additionally be stored along with secondary copies 116 in secondary storage device 108 .
  • a secondary storage device 108 can include sufficient information to enable a “bare metal restore,” where the operating system and/or software applications of a failed client computing device 102 or another target may be automatically restored without manually reinstalling individual software packages (including operating systems).
  • index 153 may operate as a cache, it can also be referred to as an “index cache.”
  • information stored in index cache 153 typically comprises data that reflects certain particulars about relatively recent secondary copy operations. After some triggering event, such as after some time elapses or index cache 153 reaches a particular size, certain portions of index cache 153 may be copied or migrated to secondary storage device 108 , e.g., on a least-recently-used basis. This information may be retrieved and uploaded back into index cache 153 or otherwise restored to media agent 144 to facilitate retrieval of data from the secondary storage device(s) 108 .
  • the cached information may include format or containerization information related to archives or other files stored on storage device(s) 108 .
  • media agent 144 generally acts as a coordinator or facilitator of secondary copy operations between client computing devices 102 and secondary storage devices 108 , but does not actually write the data to secondary storage device 108 .
  • storage manager 140 (or media agent 144 ) may instruct a client computing device 102 and secondary storage device 108 to communicate with one another directly.
  • client computing device 102 transmits data directly or via one or more intermediary components to secondary storage device 108 according to the received instructions, and vice versa.
  • Media agent 144 may still receive, process, and/or maintain metadata related to the secondary copy operations, i.e., may continue to build and maintain index 153 .
  • payload data can flow through media agent 144 for the purposes of populating index 153 , but not for writing to secondary storage device 108 .
  • Media agent 144 and/or other components such as storage manager 140 may in some cases incorporate additional functionality, such as data classification, content indexing, deduplication, encryption, compression, and the like. Further details regarding these and other functions are described below.
  • certain functions of system 100 can be distributed amongst various physical and/or logical components.
  • one or more of storage manager 140 , data agents 142 , and media agents 144 may operate on computing devices that are physically separate from one another.
  • This architecture can provide a number of benefits. For instance, hardware and software design choices for each distributed component can be targeted to suit its particular function.
  • the secondary computing devices 106 on which media agents 144 operate can be tailored for interaction with associated secondary storage devices 108 and provide fast index cache operation, among other specific tasks.
  • client computing device(s) 102 can be selected to effectively service applications 110 in order to efficiently produce and store primary data 112 .
  • one or more of the individual components of information management system 100 can be distributed to multiple separate computing devices.
  • database 146 may be migrated to or may otherwise reside on a specialized database server (e.g., an SQL server) separate from a server that implements the other functions of storage manager 140 .
  • This distributed configuration can provide added protection because database 146 can be protected with standard database utilities (e.g., SQL log shipping or database replication) independent from other functions of storage manager 140 .
  • Database 146 can be efficiently replicated to a remote site for use in the event of a disaster or other data loss at the primary site. Or database 146 can be replicated to another computing device within the same site, such as to a higher performance machine in the event that a storage manager host computing device can no longer service the needs of a growing system 100 .
  • FIG. 1 D shows an embodiment of information management system 100 including a plurality of client computing devices 102 and associated data agents 142 as well as a plurality of secondary storage computing devices 106 and associated media agents 144 . Additional components can be added or subtracted based on the evolving needs of system 100 . For instance, depending on where bottlenecks are identified, administrators can add additional client computing devices 102 , secondary storage computing devices 106 , and/or secondary storage devices 108 . Moreover, where multiple fungible components are available, load balancing can be implemented to dynamically address identified bottlenecks. As an example, storage manager 140 may dynamically select which media agents 144 and/or secondary storage devices 108 to use for storage operations based on a processing load analysis of media agents 144 and/or secondary storage devices 108 , respectively.
  • a first media agent 144 may provide failover functionality for a second failed media agent 144 .
  • media agents 144 can be dynamically selected to provide load balancing.
  • Each client computing device 102 can communicate with, among other components, any of the media agents 144 , e.g., as directed by storage manager 140 .
  • each media agent 144 may communicate with, among other components, any of secondary storage devices 108 , e.g., as directed by storage manager 140 .
  • operations can be routed to secondary storage devices 108 in a dynamic and highly flexible manner, to provide load balancing, failover, etc.
  • Further examples of scalable systems capable of dynamic storage operations, load balancing, and failover are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,246,207.
  • certain components may reside and execute on the same computing device.
  • one or more of the components shown in FIG. 1 C may be implemented on the same computing device.
  • a storage manager 140 , one or more data agents 142 , and/or one or more media agents 144 are all implemented on the same computing device.
  • one or more data agents 142 and one or more media agents 144 are implemented on the same computing device, while storage manager 140 is implemented on a separate computing device, etc. without limitation.
  • system 100 can be configured to perform a variety of information management operations, which may also be referred to in some cases as storage management operations or storage operations. These operations can generally include (i) data movement operations, (ii) processing and data manipulation operations, and (iii) analysis, reporting, and management operations.
  • Data movement operations are generally storage operations that involve the copying or migration of data between different locations in system 100 .
  • data movement operations can include operations in which stored data is copied, migrated, or otherwise transferred from one or more first storage devices to one or more second storage devices, such as from primary storage device(s) 104 to secondary storage device(s) 108 , from secondary storage device(s) 108 to different secondary storage device(s) 108 , from secondary storage devices 108 to primary storage devices 104 , or from primary storage device(s) 104 to different primary storage device(s) 104 , or in some cases within the same primary storage device 104 such as within a storage array.
  • Data movement operations can include by way of example, backup operations, archive operations, information lifecycle management operations such as hierarchical storage management operations, replication operations (e.g., continuous data replication), snapshot operations, deduplication or single-instancing operations, auxiliary copy operations, disaster-recovery copy operations, and the like. As will be discussed, some of these operations do not necessarily create distinct copies. Nonetheless, some or all of these operations are generally referred to as “secondary copy operations” for simplicity, because they involve secondary copies. Data movement also comprises restoring secondary copies.
  • a backup operation creates a copy of a version of primary data 112 at a particular point in time (e.g., one or more files or other data units). Each subsequent backup copy 116 (which is a form of secondary copy 116 ) may be maintained independently of the first.
  • a backup generally involves maintaining a version of the copied primary data 112 as well as backup copies 116 .
  • a backup copy in some embodiments is generally stored in a form that is different from the native format, e.g., a backup format. This contrasts to the version in primary data 112 which may instead be stored in a format native to the source application(s) 110 .
  • backup copies can be stored in a format in which the data is compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, and/or otherwise modified from the original native application format.
  • a backup copy may be stored in a compressed backup format that facilitates efficient long-term storage.
  • Backup copies 116 can have relatively long retention periods as compared to primary data 112 , which is generally highly changeable. Backup copies 116 may be stored on media with slower retrieval times than primary storage device 104 . Some backup copies may have shorter retention periods than some other types of secondary copies 116 , such as archive copies (described below). Backups may be stored at an offsite location.
  • Backup operations can include full backups, differential backups, incremental backups, “synthetic full” backups, and/or creating a “reference copy.”
  • a full backup (or “standard full backup”) in some embodiments is generally a complete image of the data to be protected. However, because full backup copies can consume a relatively large amount of storage, it can be useful to use a full backup copy as a baseline and only store changes relative to the full backup copy afterwards.
  • a differential backup operation tracks and stores changes that occurred since the last full backup. Differential backups can grow quickly in size, but can restore relatively efficiently because a restore can be completed in some cases using only the full backup copy and the latest differential copy.
  • An incremental backup operation generally tracks and stores changes since the most recent backup copy of any type, which can greatly reduce storage utilization. In some cases, however, restoring can be lengthy compared to full or differential backups because completing a restore operation may involve accessing a full backup in addition to multiple incremental backups.
  • Synthetic full backups generally consolidate data without directly backing up data from the client computing device.
  • a synthetic full backup is created from the most recent full backup (i.e., standard or synthetic) and subsequent incremental and/or differential backups. The resulting synthetic full backup is identical to what would have been created had the last backup for the subclient been a standard full backup.
  • a synthetic full backup does not actually transfer data from primary storage to the backup media, because it operates as a backup consolidator.
  • a synthetic full backup extracts the index data of each participating subclient. Using this index data and the previously backed up user data images, it builds new full backup images (e.g., bitmaps), one for each subclient. The new backup images consolidate the index and user data stored in the related incremental, differential, and previous full backups into a synthetic backup file that fully represents the subclient (e.g., via pointers) but does not comprise all its constituent data.
  • volume level backup operations generally involve copying of a data volume (e.g., a logical disk or partition) as a whole.
  • information management system 100 generally tracks changes to individual files and includes copies of files in the backup copy.
  • block-level backups files are broken into constituent blocks, and changes are tracked at the block level.
  • system 100 reassembles the blocks into files in a transparent fashion. Far less data may actually be transferred and copied to secondary storage devices 108 during a file-level copy than a volume-level copy.
  • a block-level copy may transfer less data than a file-level copy, resulting in faster execution.
  • restoring a relatively higher-granularity copy can result in longer restore times. For instance, when restoring a block-level copy, the process of locating and retrieving constituent blocks can sometimes take longer than restoring file-level backups.
  • a reference copy may comprise copy(ies) of selected objects from backed up data, typically to help organize data by keeping contextual information from multiple sources together, and/or help retain specific data for a longer period of time, such as for legal hold needs.
  • a reference copy generally maintains data integrity, and when the data is restored, it may be viewed in the same format as the source data.
  • a reference copy is based on a specialized client, individual subclient and associated information management policies (e.g., storage policy, retention policy, etc.) that are administered within system 100 .
  • an archive operation creates an archive copy 116 by both copying and removing source data. Or, seen another way, archive operations can involve moving some or all of the source data to the archive destination. Thus, data satisfying criteria for removal (e.g., data of a threshold age or size) may be removed from source storage.
  • the source data may be primary data 112 or a secondary copy 116 , depending on the situation.
  • archive copies can be stored in a format in which the data is compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, and/or otherwise modified from the format of the original application or source copy. In addition, archive copies may be retained for relatively long periods of time (e.g., years) and, in some cases are never deleted. In certain embodiments, archive copies may be made and kept for extended periods in order to meet compliance regulations.
  • Archiving can also serve the purpose of freeing up space in primary storage device(s) 104 and easing the demand on computational resources on client computing device 102 . Similarly, when a secondary copy 116 is archived, the archive copy can therefore serve the purpose of freeing up space in the source secondary storage device(s) 108 . Examples of data archiving operations are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,107,298.
  • Snapshot operations can provide a relatively lightweight, efficient mechanism for protecting data.
  • a snapshot may be thought of as an “instant” image of primary data 112 at a given point in time, and may include state and/or status information relative to an application 110 that creates/manages primary data 112 .
  • a snapshot may generally capture the directory structure of an object in primary data 112 such as a file or volume or other data set at a particular moment in time and may also preserve file attributes and contents.
  • a snapshot in some cases is created relatively quickly, e.g., substantially instantly, using a minimum amount of file space, but may still function as a conventional file system backup.
  • a “hardware snapshot” (or “hardware-based snapshot”) operation occurs where a target storage device (e.g., a primary storage device 104 or a secondary storage device 108 ) performs the snapshot operation in a self-contained fashion, substantially independently, using hardware, firmware and/or software operating on the storage device itself.
  • the storage device may perform snapshot operations generally without intervention or oversight from any of the other components of the system 100 , e.g., a storage array may generate an “array-created” hardware snapshot and may also manage its storage, integrity, versioning, etc. In this manner, hardware snapshots can off-load other components of system 100 from snapshot processing.
  • An array may receive a request from another component to take a snapshot and then proceed to execute the “hardware snapshot” operations autonomously, preferably reporting success to the requesting component.
  • a “software snapshot” (or “software-based snapshot”) operation occurs where a component in system 100 (e.g., client computing device 102 , etc.) implements a software layer that manages the snapshot operation via interaction with the target storage device. For instance, the component executing the snapshot management software layer may derive a set of pointers and/or data that represents the snapshot. The snapshot management software layer may then transmit the same to the target storage device, along with appropriate instructions for writing the snapshot.
  • a software snapshot product is Microsoft Volume Snapshot Service (VSS), which is part of the Microsoft Windows operating system.
  • snapshots do not actually create another physical copy of all the data as it existed at the particular point in time, but may simply create pointers that map files and directories to specific memory locations (e.g., to specific disk blocks) where the data resides as it existed at the particular point in time.
  • a snapshot copy may include a set of pointers derived from the file system or from an application.
  • the snapshot may be created at the block-level, such that creation of the snapshot occurs without awareness of the file system.
  • Each pointer points to a respective stored data block, so that collectively, the set of pointers reflect the storage location and state of the data object (e.g., file(s) or volume(s) or data set(s)) at the point in time when the snapshot copy was created.
  • An initial snapshot may use only a small amount of disk space needed to record a mapping or other data structure representing or otherwise tracking the blocks that correspond to the current state of the file system. Additional disk space is usually required only when files and directories change later on. Furthermore, when files change, typically only the pointers which map to blocks are copied, not the blocks themselves. For example for “copy-on-write” snapshots, when a block changes in primary storage, the block is copied to secondary storage or cached in primary storage before the block is overwritten in primary storage, and the pointer to that block is changed to reflect the new location of that block. The snapshot mapping of file system data may also be updated to reflect the changed block(s) at that particular point in time.
  • a snapshot includes a full physical copy of all or substantially all of the data represented by the snapshot. Further examples of snapshot operations are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,529,782.
  • a snapshot copy in many cases can be made quickly and without significantly impacting primary computing resources because large amounts of data need not be copied or moved.
  • a snapshot may exist as a virtual file system, parallel to the actual file system. Users in some cases gain read-only access to the record of files and directories of the snapshot. By electing to restore primary data 112 from a snapshot taken at a given point in time, users may also return the current file system to the state of the file system that existed when the snapshot was taken.
  • Replication is another type of secondary copy operation.
  • Some types of secondary copies 116 periodically capture images of primary data 112 at particular points in time (e.g., backups, archives, and snapshots). However, it can also be useful for recovery purposes to protect primary data 112 in a more continuous fashion, by replicating primary data 112 substantially as changes occur.
  • a replication copy can be a mirror copy, for instance, where changes made to primary data 112 are mirrored or substantially immediately copied to another location (e.g., to secondary storage device(s) 108 ). By copying each write operation to the replication copy, two storage systems are kept synchronized or substantially synchronized so that they are virtually identical at approximately the same time. Where entire disk volumes are mirrored, however, mirroring can require significant amount of storage space and utilizes a large amount of processing resources.
  • secondary copy operations are performed on replicated data that represents a recoverable state, or “known good state” of a particular application running on the source system.
  • known good replication copies may be viewed as copies of primary data 112 . This feature allows the system to directly access, copy, restore, back up, or otherwise manipulate the replication copies as if they were the “live” primary data 112 . This can reduce access time, storage utilization, and impact on source applications 110 , among other benefits.
  • system 100 can replicate sections of application data that represent a recoverable state rather than rote copying of blocks of data. Examples of replication operations (e.g., continuous data replication) are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,617,262.
  • Deduplication or single-instance storage is useful to reduce the amount of non-primary data.
  • some or all of the above-described secondary copy operations can involve deduplication in some fashion.
  • New data is read, broken down into data portions of a selected granularity (e.g., sub-file level blocks, files, etc.), compared with corresponding portions that are already in secondary storage, and only new/changed portions are stored. Portions that already exist are represented as pointers to the already-stored data.
  • a deduplicated secondary copy 116 may comprise actual data portions copied from primary data 112 and may further comprise pointers to already-stored data, which is generally more storage-efficient than a full copy.
  • system 100 may calculate and/or store signatures (e.g., hashes or cryptographically unique IDs) corresponding to the individual source data portions and compare the signatures to already-stored data signatures, instead of comparing entire data portions.
  • signatures e.g., hashes or cryptographically unique IDs
  • deduplication operations may therefore be referred to interchangeably as “single-instancing” operations.
  • deduplication operations can store more than one instance of certain data portions, yet still significantly reduce stored-data redundancy.
  • deduplication portions such as data blocks can be of fixed or variable length. Using variable length blocks can enhance deduplication by responding to changes in the data stream, but can involve more complex processing.
  • system 100 utilizes a technique for dynamically aligning deduplication blocks based on changing content in the data stream, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,364,652.
  • System 100 can deduplicate in a variety of manners at a variety of locations. For instance, in some embodiments, system 100 implements “target-side” deduplication by deduplicating data at the media agent 144 after being received from data agent 142 .
  • media agents 144 are generally configured to manage the deduplication process. For instance, one or more of the media agents 144 maintain a corresponding deduplication database that stores deduplication information (e.g., data block signatures). Examples of such a configuration are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 9,020,900.
  • “source-side” (or “client-side”) deduplication can also be performed, e.g., to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted by data agent 142 to media agent 144 .
  • Storage manager 140 may communicate with other components within system 100 via network protocols and cloud service provider APIs to facilitate cloud-based deduplication/single instancing, as exemplified in U.S. Pat. No. 8,954,446.
  • Some other deduplication/single instancing techniques are described in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2006/0224846 and in U.S. Pat. No. 9,098,495.
  • files and other data over their lifetime move from more expensive quick-access storage to less expensive slower-access storage.
  • Operations associated with moving data through various tiers of storage are sometimes referred to as information lifecycle management (ILM) operations.
  • ILM information lifecycle management
  • HSM hierarchical storage management
  • an HSM operation may involve movement of data from primary storage devices 104 to secondary storage devices 108 , or between tiers of secondary storage devices 108 . With each tier, the storage devices may be progressively cheaper, have relatively slower access/restore times, etc. For example, movement of data between tiers may occur as data becomes less important over time.
  • an HSM operation is similar to archiving in that creating an HSM copy may (though not always) involve deleting some of the source data, e.g., according to one or more criteria related to the source data.
  • an HSM copy may include primary data 112 or a secondary copy 116 that exceeds a given size threshold or a given age threshold.
  • HSM data that is removed or aged from the source is replaced by a logical reference pointer or stub.
  • the reference pointer or stub can be stored in the primary storage device 104 or other source storage device, such as a secondary storage device 108 to replace the deleted source data and to point to or otherwise indicate the new location in (another) secondary storage device 108 .
  • system 100 uses the stub to locate the data and can make recovery of the data appear transparent, even though the HSM data may be stored at a location different from other source data. In this manner, the data appears to the user (e.g., in file system browsing windows and the like) as if it still resides in the source location (e.g., in a primary storage device 104 ).
  • the stub may include metadata associated with the corresponding data, so that a file system and/or application can provide some information about the data object and/or a limited-functionality version (e.g., a preview) of the data object.
  • An HSM copy may be stored in a format other than the native application format (e.g., compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, and/or otherwise modified).
  • copies which involve the removal of data from source storage and the maintenance of stub or other logical reference information on source storage may be referred to generally as “on-line archive copies.”
  • copies which involve the removal of data from source storage without the maintenance of stub or other logical reference information on source storage may be referred to as “off-line archive copies.” Examples of HSM and ILM techniques are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
  • An auxiliary copy is generally a copy of an existing secondary copy 116 .
  • an initial secondary copy 116 may be derived from primary data 112 or from data residing in secondary storage subsystem 118 , whereas an auxiliary copy is generated from the initial secondary copy 116 .
  • Auxiliary copies provide additional standby copies of data and may reside on different secondary storage devices 108 than the initial secondary copies 116 .
  • auxiliary copies can be used for recovery purposes if initial secondary copies 116 become unavailable. Exemplary auxiliary copy techniques are described in further detail in U.S. Pat. No. 8,230,195.
  • System 100 may also make and retain disaster recovery copies, often as secondary, high-availability disk copies.
  • System 100 may create secondary copies and store them at disaster recovery locations using auxiliary copy or replication operations, such as continuous data replication technologies.
  • disaster recovery locations can be remote from the client computing devices 102 and primary storage devices 104 , remote from some or all of the secondary storage devices 108 , or both.
  • Data manipulation and processing may include encryption and compression as well as integrity marking and checking, formatting for transmission, formatting for storage, etc.
  • Data may be manipulated “client-side” by data agent 142 as well as “target-side” by media agent 144 in the course of creating secondary copy 116 , or conversely in the course of restoring data from secondary to primary.
  • System 100 in some cases is configured to process data (e.g., files or other data objects, primary data 112 , secondary copies 116 , etc.), according to an appropriate encryption algorithm (e.g., Blowfish, Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Triple Data Encryption Standard (3-DES), etc.) to limit access and provide data security.
  • System 100 in some cases encrypts the data at the client level, such that client computing devices 102 (e.g., data agents 142 ) encrypt the data prior to transferring it to other components, e.g., before sending the data to media agents 144 during a secondary copy operation.
  • client computing device 102 may maintain or have access to an encryption key or passphrase for decrypting the data upon restore.
  • Encryption can also occur when media agent 144 creates auxiliary copies or archive copies. Encryption may be applied in creating a secondary copy 116 of a previously unencrypted secondary copy 116 , without limitation.
  • secondary storage devices 108 can implement built-in, high performance hardware-based encryption.
  • system 100 may also or alternatively compress data in the course of generating a secondary copy 116 .
  • Compression encodes information such that fewer bits are needed to represent the information as compared to the original representation.
  • Compression techniques are well known in the art. Compression operations may apply one or more data compression algorithms. Compression may be applied in creating a secondary copy 116 of a previously uncompressed secondary copy, e.g., when making archive copies or disaster recovery copies. The use of compression may result in metadata that specifies the nature of the compression, so that data may be uncompressed on restore if appropriate.
  • Data analysis, reporting, and management operations can differ from data movement operations in that they do not necessarily involve copying, migration or other transfer of data between different locations in the system.
  • data analysis operations may involve processing (e.g., offline processing) or modification of already stored primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 .
  • data analysis operations are performed in conjunction with data movement operations.
  • Some data analysis operations include content indexing operations and classification operations which can be useful in leveraging data under management to enhance search and other features.
  • information management system 100 analyzes and indexes characteristics, content, and metadata associated with primary data 112 (“online content indexing”) and/or secondary copies 116 (“off-line content indexing”).
  • Content indexing can identify files or other data objects based on content (e.g., user-defined keywords or phrases, other keywords/phrases that are not defined by a user, etc.), and/or metadata (e.g., email metadata such as “to,” “from,” “cc,” “bcc,” attachment name, received time, etc.).
  • Content indexes may be searched and search results may be restored.
  • System 100 generally organizes and catalogues the results into a content index, which may be stored within media agent database 152 , for example.
  • the content index can also include the storage locations of or pointer references to indexed data in primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 .
  • Results may also be stored elsewhere in system 100 (e.g., in primary storage device 104 or in secondary storage device 108 ).
  • Such content index data provides storage manager 140 or other components with an efficient mechanism for locating primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 of data objects that match particular criteria, thus greatly increasing the search speed capability of system 100 .
  • search criteria can be specified by a user through user interface 158 of storage manager 140 .
  • system 100 analyzes data and/or metadata in secondary copies 116 to create an “off-line content index,” this operation has no significant impact on the performance of client computing devices 102 and thus does not take a toll on the production environment.
  • Examples of content indexing techniques are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 8,170,995.
  • One or more components can be configured to scan data and/or associated metadata for classification purposes to populate a database (or other data structure) of information, which can be referred to as a “data classification database” or a “metabase.”
  • a database or other data structure
  • the data classification database(s) can be organized in a variety of different ways, including centralization, logical sub-divisions, and/or physical sub-divisions.
  • one or more data classification databases may be associated with different subsystems or tiers within system 100 . As an example, there may be a first metabase associated with primary storage subsystem 117 and a second metabase associated with secondary storage subsystem 118 .
  • metabase(s) may be associated with individual components, e.g., client computing devices 102 and/or media agents 144 .
  • a data classification database may reside as one or more data structures within management database 146 , may be otherwise associated with storage manager 140 , and/or may reside as a separate component.
  • metabase(s) may be included in separate database(s) and/or on separate storage device(s) from primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 , such that operations related to the metabase(s) do not significantly impact performance on other components of system 100 .
  • metabase(s) may be stored along with primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 .
  • Files or other data objects can be associated with identifiers (e.g., tag entries, etc.) to facilitate searches of stored data objects.
  • identifiers e.g., tag entries, etc.
  • the metabase can also allow efficient, automatic identification of files or other data objects to associate with secondary copy or other information management operations.
  • a metabase can dramatically improve the speed with which system 100 can search through and identify data as compared to other approaches that involve scanning an entire file system. Examples of metabases and data classification operations are provided in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,734,669 and 7,747,579.
  • Operations management can generally include monitoring and managing the health and performance of system 100 by, without limitation, performing error tracking, generating granular storage/performance metrics (e.g., job success/failure information, deduplication efficiency, etc.), generating storage modeling and costing information, and the like.
  • storage manager 140 or another component in system 100 may analyze traffic patterns and suggest and/or automatically route data to minimize congestion.
  • the system can generate predictions relating to storage operations or storage operation information. Such predictions, which may be based on a trending analysis, may predict various network operations or resource usage, such as network traffic levels, storage media use, use of bandwidth of communication links, use of media agent components, etc. Further examples of traffic analysis, trend analysis, prediction generation, and the like are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
  • a master storage manager 140 may track the status of subordinate cells, such as the status of jobs, system components, system resources, and other items, by communicating with storage managers 140 (or other components) in the respective storage operation cells. Moreover, the master storage manager 140 may also track status by receiving periodic status updates from the storage managers 140 (or other components) in the respective cells regarding jobs, system components, system resources, and other items. In some embodiments, a master storage manager 140 may store status information and other information regarding its associated storage operation cells and other system information in its management database 146 and/or index 150 (or in another location).
  • the master storage manager 140 or other component may also determine whether certain storage-related or other criteria are satisfied, and may perform an action or trigger event (e.g., data migration) in response to the criteria being satisfied, such as where a storage threshold is met for a particular volume, or where inadequate protection exists for certain data. For instance, data from one or more storage operation cells is used to dynamically and automatically mitigate recognized risks, and/or to advise users of risks or suggest actions to mitigate these risks.
  • an action or trigger event e.g., data migration
  • an information management policy may specify certain requirements (e.g., that a storage device should maintain a certain amount of free space, that secondary copies should occur at a particular interval, that data should be aged and migrated to other storage after a particular period, that data on a secondary volume should always have a certain level of availability and be restorable within a given time period, that data on a secondary volume may be mirrored or otherwise migrated to a specified number of other volumes, etc.). If a risk condition or other criterion is triggered, the system may notify the user of these conditions and may suggest (or automatically implement) a mitigation action to address the risk.
  • certain requirements e.g., that a storage device should maintain a certain amount of free space, that secondary copies should occur at a particular interval, that data should be aged and migrated to other storage after a particular period, that data on a secondary volume should always have a certain level of availability and be restorable within a given time period, that data on a secondary volume may be mirrored or otherwise migrated to a specified number
  • the system may indicate that data from a primary copy 112 should be migrated to a secondary storage device 108 to free up space on primary storage device 104 .
  • risk factors examples include, but not limited to, risk factors, risk factors, and other triggering criteria.
  • system 100 may also determine whether a metric or other indication satisfies particular storage criteria sufficient to perform an action.
  • a storage policy or other definition might indicate that a storage manager 140 should initiate a particular action if a storage metric or other indication drops below or otherwise fails to satisfy specified criteria such as a threshold of data protection.
  • risk factors may be quantified into certain measurable service or risk levels. For example, certain applications and associated data may be considered to be more important relative to other data and services. Financial compliance data, for example, may be of greater importance than marketing materials, etc. Network administrators may assign priority values or “weights” to certain data and/or applications corresponding to the relative importance. The level of compliance of secondary copy operations specified for these applications may also be assigned a certain value.
  • the health, impact, and overall importance of a service may be determined, such as by measuring the compliance value and calculating the product of the priority value and the compliance value to determine the “service level” and comparing it to certain operational thresholds to determine whether it is acceptable. Further examples of the service level determination are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
  • System 100 may additionally calculate data costing and data availability associated with information management operation cells. For instance, data received from a cell may be used in conjunction with hardware-related information and other information about system elements to determine the cost of storage and/or the availability of particular data. Exemplary information generated could include how fast a particular department is using up available storage space, how long data would take to recover over a particular pathway from a particular secondary storage device, costs over time, etc. Moreover, in some embodiments, such information may be used to determine or predict the overall cost associated with the storage of certain information. The cost associated with hosting a certain application may be based, at least in part, on the type of media on which the data resides, for example. Storage devices may be assigned to a particular cost categories, for example. Further examples of costing techniques are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
  • Report types may include: scheduling, event management, media management and data aging. Available reports may also include backup history, data aging history, auxiliary copy history, job history, library and drive, media in library, restore history, and storage policy, etc., without limitation. Such reports may be specified and created at a certain point in time as a system analysis, forecasting, or provisioning tool. Integrated reports may also be generated that illustrate storage and performance metrics, risks and storage costing information. Moreover, users may create their own reports based on specific needs.
  • User interface 158 can include an option to graphically depict the various components in the system using appropriate icons. As one example, user interface 158 may provide a graphical depiction of primary storage devices 104 , secondary storage devices 108 , data agents 142 and/or media agents 144 , and their relationship to one another in system 100 .
  • the operations management functionality of system 100 can facilitate planning and decision-making. For example, in some embodiments, a user may view the status of some or all jobs as well as the status of each component of information management system 100 . Users may then plan and make decisions based on this data. For instance, a user may view high-level information regarding secondary copy operations for system 100 , such as job status, component status, resource status (e.g., communication pathways, etc.), and other information. The user may also drill down or use other means to obtain more detailed information regarding a particular component, job, or the like. Further examples are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
  • System 100 can also be configured to perform system-wide e-discovery operations in some embodiments.
  • e-discovery operations provide a unified collection and search capability for data in the system, such as data stored in secondary storage devices 108 (e.g., backups, archives, or other secondary copies 116 ).
  • system 100 may construct and maintain a virtual repository for data stored in system 100 that is integrated across source applications 110 , different storage device types, etc.
  • e-discovery utilizes other techniques described herein, such as data classification and/or content indexing.
  • An information management policy 148 can include a data structure or other information source that specifies a set of parameters (e.g., criteria and rules) associated with secondary copy and/or other information management operations.
  • a storage policy generally comprises a data structure or other information source that defines (or includes information sufficient to determine) a set of preferences or other criteria for performing information management operations.
  • Storage policies can include one or more of the following: (1) what data will be associated with the storage policy, e.g., subclient; (2) a destination to which the data will be stored; (3) datapath information specifying how the data will be communicated to the destination; (4) the type of secondary copy operation to be performed; and (5) retention information specifying how long the data will be retained at the destination (see, e.g., FIG. 1 E ).
  • Data associated with a storage policy can be logically organized into subclients, which may represent primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 .
  • a subclient may represent static or dynamic associations of portions of a data volume.
  • Subclients may represent mutually exclusive portions. Thus, in certain embodiments, a portion of data may be given a label and the association is stored as a static entity in an index, database or other storage location.
  • Subclients may also be used as an effective administrative scheme of organizing data according to data type, department within the enterprise, storage preferences, or the like. Depending on the configuration, subclients can correspond to files, folders, virtual machines, databases, etc. In one exemplary scenario, an administrator may find it preferable to separate e-mail data from financial data using two different subclients.
  • a storage policy can define where data is stored by specifying a target or destination storage device (or group of storage devices). For instance, where the secondary storage device 108 includes a group of disk libraries, the storage policy may specify a particular disk library for storing the subclients associated with the policy. As another example, where the secondary storage devices 108 include one or more tape libraries, the storage policy may specify a particular tape library for storing the subclients associated with the storage policy, and may also specify a drive pool and a tape pool defining a group of tape drives and a group of tapes, respectively, for use in storing the subclient data. While information in the storage policy can be statically assigned in some cases, some or all of the information in the storage policy can also be dynamically determined based on criteria set forth in the storage policy.
  • a particular destination storage device(s) or other parameter of the storage policy may be determined based on characteristics associated with the data involved in a particular secondary copy operation, device availability (e.g., availability of a secondary storage device 108 or a media agent 144 ), network status and conditions (e.g., identified bottlenecks), user credentials, and the like.
  • Datapath information can also be included in the storage policy.
  • the storage policy may specify network pathways and components to utilize when moving the data to the destination storage device(s).
  • the storage policy specifies one or more media agents 144 for conveying data associated with the storage policy between the source and destination.
  • a storage policy can also specify the type(s) of associated operations, such as backup, archive, snapshot, auxiliary copy, or the like.
  • retention parameters can specify how long the resulting secondary copies 116 will be kept (e.g., a number of days, months, years, etc.), perhaps depending on organizational needs and/or compliance criteria.
  • system 100 automatically applies a default configuration to client computing device 102 .
  • the installation script may register the client computing device 102 with storage manager 140 , which in turn applies the default configuration to the new client computing device 102 . In this manner, data protection operations can begin substantially immediately.
  • the default configuration can include a default storage policy, for example, and can specify any appropriate information sufficient to begin data protection operations. This can include a type of data protection operation, scheduling information, a target secondary storage device 108 , data path information (e.g., a particular media agent 144 ), and the like.
  • Scheduling policy 148 Another type of information management policy 148 is a “scheduling policy,” which specifies when and how often to perform operations. Scheduling parameters may specify with what frequency (e.g., hourly, weekly, daily, event-based, etc.) or under what triggering conditions secondary copy or other information management operations are to take place. Scheduling policies in some cases are associated with particular components, such as a subclient, client computing device 102 , and the like.
  • an audit policy (or “security policy”), which comprises preferences, rules and/or criteria that protect sensitive data in system 100 .
  • an audit policy may define “sensitive objects” which are files or data objects that contain particular keywords (e.g., “confidential,” or “privileged”) and/or are associated with particular keywords (e.g., in metadata) or particular flags (e.g., in metadata identifying a document or email as personal, confidential, etc.).
  • An audit policy may further specify rules for handling sensitive objects.
  • an audit policy may require that a reviewer approve the transfer of any sensitive objects to a cloud storage site, and that if approval is denied for a particular sensitive object, the sensitive object should be transferred to a local primary storage device 104 instead.
  • the audit policy may further specify how a secondary storage computing device 106 or other system component should notify a reviewer that a sensitive object is slated for transfer.
  • provisioning policy can include preferences, priorities, rules, and/or criteria that specify how client computing devices 102 (or groups thereof) may utilize system resources, such as available storage on cloud storage and/or network bandwidth.
  • a provisioning policy specifies, for example, data quotas for particular client computing devices 102 (e.g., a number of gigabytes that can be stored monthly, quarterly or annually).
  • Storage manager 140 or other components may enforce the provisioning policy. For instance, media agents 144 may enforce the policy when transferring data to secondary storage devices 108 . If a client computing device 102 exceeds a quota, a budget for the client computing device 102 (or associated department) may be adjusted accordingly or an alert may trigger.
  • information management policies 148 are described as separate policies, one or more of these can be generally combined into a single information management policy 148 .
  • a storage policy may also include or otherwise be associated with one or more scheduling, audit, or provisioning policies or operational parameters thereof.
  • storage policies are typically associated with moving and storing data, other policies may be associated with other types of information management operations. The following is a non-exhaustive list of items that information management policies 148 may specify:
  • Information management policies 148 can additionally specify or depend on historical or current criteria that may be used to determine which rules to apply to a particular data object, system component, or information management operation, such as:
  • FIG. 1 E includes a data flow diagram depicting performance of secondary copy operations by an embodiment of information management system 100 , according to an exemplary storage policy 148 A.
  • System 100 includes a storage manager 140 , a client computing device 102 having a file system data agent 142 A and an email data agent 142 B operating thereon, a primary storage device 104 , two media agents 144 A, 144 B, and two secondary storage devices 108 : a disk library 108 A and a tape library 108 B.
  • primary storage device 104 includes primary data 112 A, which is associated with a logical grouping of data associated with a file system (“file system subclient”), and primary data 112 B, which is a logical grouping of data associated with email (“email subclient”).
  • file system subclient file system subclient
  • email subclient primary data 112 B
  • the second media agent 144 B and tape library 1088 are “off-site,” and may be remotely located from the other components in system 100 (e.g., in a different city, office building, etc.).
  • off-site may refer to a magnetic tape located in remote storage, which must be manually retrieved and loaded into a tape drive to be read.
  • information stored on the tape library 108 B may provide protection in the event of a disaster or other failure at the main site(s) where data is stored.
  • the file system subclient 112 A in certain embodiments generally comprises information generated by the file system and/or operating system of client computing device 102 , and can include, for example, file system data (e.g., regular files, file tables, mount points, etc.), operating system data (e.g., registries, event logs, etc.), and the like.
  • the e-mail subclient 112 B can include data generated by an e-mail application operating on client computing device 102 , e.g., mailbox information, folder information, emails, attachments, associated database information, and the like.
  • the subclients can be logical containers, and the data included in the corresponding primary data 112 A and 112 B may or may not be stored contiguously.
  • the exemplary storage policy 148 A includes backup copy preferences or rule set 160 , disaster recovery copy preferences or rule set 162 , and compliance copy preferences or rule set 164 .
  • Backup copy rule set 160 specifies that it is associated with file system subclient 166 and email subclient 168 . Each of subclients 166 and 168 are associated with the particular client computing device 102 .
  • Backup copy rule set 160 further specifies that the backup operation will be written to disk library 108 A and designates a particular media agent 144 A to convey the data to disk library 108 A.
  • backup copy rule set 160 specifies that backup copies created according to rule set 160 are scheduled to be generated hourly and are to be retained for 30 days. In some other embodiments, scheduling information is not included in storage policy 148 A and is instead specified by a separate scheduling policy.
  • Disaster recovery copy rule set 162 is associated with the same two subclients 166 and 168 . However, disaster recovery copy rule set 162 is associated with tape library 108 B, unlike backup copy rule set 160 . Moreover, disaster recovery copy rule set 162 specifies that a different media agent, namely 144 B, will convey data to tape library 108 B. Disaster recovery copies created according to rule set 162 will be retained for 60 days and will be generated daily. Disaster recovery copies generated according to disaster recovery copy rule set 162 can provide protection in the event of a disaster or other catastrophic data loss that would affect the backup copy 116 A maintained on disk library 108 A.
  • Compliance copy rule set 164 is only associated with the email subclient 168 , and not the file system subclient 166 . Compliance copies generated according to compliance copy rule set 164 will therefore not include primary data 112 A from the file system subclient 166 . For instance, the organization may be under an obligation to store and maintain copies of email data for a particular period of time (e.g., 10 years) to comply with state or federal regulations, while similar regulations do not apply to file system data. Compliance copy rule set 164 is associated with the same tape library 108 B and media agent 144 B as disaster recovery copy rule set 162 , although a different storage device or media agent could be used in other embodiments. Finally, compliance copy rule set 164 specifies that the copies it governs will be generated quarterly and retained for 10 years.
  • a logical grouping of secondary copy operations governed by a rule set and being initiated at a point in time may be referred to as a “secondary copy job” (and sometimes may be called a “backup job,” even though it is not necessarily limited to creating only backup copies). Secondary copy jobs may be initiated on demand as well. Steps 1 - 9 below illustrate three secondary copy jobs based on storage policy 148 A.
  • storage manager 140 initiates a backup job according to the backup copy rule set 160 , which logically comprises all the secondary copy operations necessary to effectuate rules 160 in storage policy 148 A every hour, including steps 1 - 4 occurring hourly.
  • a scheduling service running on storage manager 140 accesses backup copy rule set 160 or a separate scheduling policy associated with client computing device 102 and initiates a backup job on an hourly basis.
  • storage manager 140 sends instructions to client computing device 102 (i.e., to both data agent 142 A and data agent 142 B) to begin the backup job.
  • file system data agent 142 A and email data agent 142 B on client computing device 102 respond to instructions from storage manager 140 by accessing and processing the respective subclient primary data 112 A and 112 B involved in the backup copy operation, which can be found in primary storage device 104 .
  • the data agent(s) 142 A, 142 B may format the data into a backup format or otherwise process the data suitable for a backup copy.
  • client computing device 102 communicates the processed file system data (e.g., using file system data agent 142 A) and the processed email data (e.g., using email data agent 142 B) to the first media agent 144 A according to backup copy rule set 160 , as directed by storage manager 140 .
  • Storage manager 140 may further keep a record in management database 146 of the association between media agent 144 A and one or more of: client computing device 102 , file system subclient 112 A, file system data agent 142 A, email subclient 1128 , email data agent 142 B, and/or backup copy 116 A.
  • the target media agent 144 A receives the data-agent-processed data from client computing device 102 , and at step 4 generates and conveys backup copy 116 A to disk library 108 A to be stored as backup copy 116 A, again at the direction of storage manager 140 and according to backup copy rule set 160 .
  • Media agent 144 A can also update its index 153 to include data and/or metadata related to backup copy 116 A, such as information indicating where the backup copy 116 A resides on disk library 108 A, where the email copy resides, where the file system copy resides, data and metadata for cache retrieval, etc.
  • Storage manager 140 may similarly update its index 150 to include information relating to the secondary copy operation, such as information relating to the type of operation, a physical location associated with one or more copies created by the operation, the time the operation was performed, status information relating to the operation, the components involved in the operation, and the like. In some cases, storage manager 140 may update its index 150 to include some or all of the information stored in index 153 of media agent 144 A. At this point, the backup job may be considered complete. After the 30-day retention period expires, storage manager 140 instructs media agent 144 A to delete backup copy 116 A from disk library 108 A and indexes 150 and/or 153 are updated accordingly.
  • storage manager 140 initiates another backup job for a disaster recovery copy according to the disaster recovery rule set 162 .
  • this includes steps 5 - 7 occurring daily for creating disaster recovery copy 1168 .
  • disaster recovery copy 1168 is based on backup copy 116 A and not on primary data 112 A and 1128 .
  • the specified media agent 1448 retrieves the most recent backup copy 116 A from disk library 108 A.
  • disaster recovery copy 1168 is a direct, mirror copy of backup copy 116 A, and remains in the backup format.
  • disaster recovery copy 1168 may be further compressed or encrypted, or may be generated in some other manner, such as by using primary data 112 A and 1128 from primary storage device 104 as sources.
  • the disaster recovery copy operation is initiated once a day and disaster recovery copies 1168 are deleted after 60 days; indexes 153 and/or 150 are updated accordingly when/after each information management operation is executed and/or completed.
  • the present backup job may be considered completed.
  • storage manager 140 initiates another backup job according to compliance rule set 164 , which performs steps 8 - 9 quarterly to create compliance copy 116 C. For instance, storage manager 140 instructs media agent 144 B to create compliance copy 116 C on tape library 1088 , as specified in the compliance copy rule set 164 .
  • compliance copy 116 C is generated using disaster recovery copy 1168 as the source. This is efficient, because disaster recovery copy resides on the same secondary storage device and thus no network resources are required to move the data.
  • compliance copy 116 C is instead generated using primary data 1128 corresponding to the email subclient or using backup copy 116 A from disk library 108 A as source data.
  • compliance copies 116 C are created quarterly, and are deleted after ten years, and indexes 153 and/or 150 are kept up-to-date accordingly.
  • storage manager 140 may permit a user to specify aspects of storage policy 148 A.
  • the storage policy can be modified to include information governance policies to define how data should be managed in order to comply with a certain regulation or business objective.
  • the various policies may be stored, for example, in management database 146 .
  • An information governance policy may align with one or more compliance tasks that are imposed by regulations or business requirements. Examples of information governance policies might include a Sarbanes-Oxley policy, a HIPAA policy, an electronic discovery (e-discovery) policy, and so on.
  • Information governance policies allow administrators to obtain different perspectives on an organization's online and offline data, without the need for a dedicated data silo created solely for each different viewpoint.
  • the data storage systems herein build an index that reflects the contents of a distributed data set that spans numerous clients and storage devices, including both primary data and secondary copies, and online and offline copies.
  • An organization may apply multiple information governance policies in a top-down manner over that unified data set and indexing schema in order to view and manipulate the data set through different lenses, each of which is adapted to a particular compliance or business goal.
  • An information governance policy may comprise a classification policy, which defines a taxonomy of classification terms or tags relevant to a compliance task and/or business objective.
  • a classification policy may also associate a defined tag with a classification rule.
  • a classification rule defines a particular combination of criteria, such as users who have created, accessed or modified a document or data object; file or application types; content or metadata keywords; clients or storage locations; dates of data creation and/or access; review status or other status within a workflow (e.g., reviewed or un-reviewed); modification times or types of modifications; and/or any other data attributes in any combination, without limitation.
  • a classification rule may also be defined using other classification tags in the taxonomy.
  • an e-discovery classification policy might define a classification tag “privileged” that is associated with documents or data objects that (1) were created or modified by legal department staff, or (2) were sent to or received from outside counsel via email, or (3) contain one of the following keywords: “privileged” or “attorney” or “counsel,” or other like terms. Accordingly, all these documents or data objects will be classified as “privileged.”
  • An entity tag may be, for example, any content that matches a defined data mask format.
  • entity tags might include, e.g., social security numbers (e.g., any numerical content matching the formatting mask XXX-XX-XXX), credit card numbers (e.g., content having a 13-16 digit string of numbers), SKU numbers, product numbers, etc.
  • a user may define a classification policy by indicating criteria, parameters or descriptors of the policy via a graphical user interface, such as a form or page with fields to be filled in, pull-down menus or entries allowing one or more of several options to be selected, buttons, sliders, hypertext links or other known user interface tools for receiving user input, etc.
  • a user may define certain entity tags, such as a particular product number or project ID.
  • the classification policy can be implemented using cloud-based techniques.
  • the storage devices may be cloud storage devices, and the storage manager 140 may execute cloud service provider API over a network to classify data stored on cloud storage devices.
  • a restore operation can be initiated involving one or more of secondary copies 116 A, 1168 , and 116 C.
  • a restore operation logically takes a selected secondary copy 116 , reverses the effects of the secondary copy operation that created it, and stores the restored data to primary storage where a client computing device 102 may properly access it as primary data.
  • a media agent 144 and an appropriate data agent 142 e.g., executing on the client computing device 102 ) perform the tasks needed to complete a restore operation.
  • data that was encrypted, compressed, and/or deduplicated in the creation of secondary copy 116 will be correspondingly rehydrated (reversing deduplication), uncompressed, and unencrypted into a format appropriate to primary data.
  • Metadata stored within or associated with the secondary copy 116 may be used during the restore operation.
  • restored data should be indistinguishable from other primary data 112 .
  • the restored data has fully regained the native format that may make it immediately usable by application 110 .
  • a user may manually initiate a restore of backup copy 116 A, e.g., by interacting with user interface 158 of storage manager 140 or with a web-based console with access to system 100 .
  • Storage manager 140 may accesses data in its index 150 and/or management database 146 (and/or the respective storage policy 148 A) associated with the selected backup copy 116 A to identify the appropriate media agent 144 A and/or secondary storage device 108 A where the secondary copy resides.
  • the user may be presented with a representation (e.g., stub, thumbnail, listing, etc.) and metadata about the selected secondary copy, in order to determine whether this is the appropriate copy to be restored, e.g., date that the original primary data was created.
  • Storage manager 140 will then instruct media agent 144 A and an appropriate data agent 142 on the target client computing device 102 to restore secondary copy 116 A to primary storage device 104 .
  • a media agent may be selected for use in the restore operation based on a load balancing algorithm, an availability based algorithm, or other criteria.
  • the selected media agent e.g., 144 A, retrieves secondary copy 116 A from disk library 108 A. For instance, media agent 144 A may access its index 153 to identify a location of backup copy 116 A on disk library 108 A, or may access location information residing on disk library 108 A itself.
  • a backup copy 116 A that was recently created or accessed may be cached to speed up the restore operation.
  • media agent 144 A accesses a cached version of backup copy 116 A residing in index 153 , without having to access disk library 108 A for some or all of the data.
  • the media agent 144 A communicates the data to the requesting client computing device 102 .
  • file system data agent 142 A and email data agent 142 B may unpack (e.g., restore from a backup format to the native application format) the data in backup copy 116 A and restore the unpackaged data to primary storage device 104 .
  • secondary copies 116 may be restored to the same volume or folder in primary storage device 104 from which the secondary copy was derived; to another storage location or client computing device 102 ; to shared storage, etc.
  • the data may be restored so that it may be used by an application 110 of a different version/vintage from the application that created the original primary data 112 .
  • secondary copies 116 can vary depending on the embodiment.
  • secondary copies 116 are formatted as a series of logical data units or “chunks” (e.g., 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, or 8 GB chunks). This can facilitate efficient communication and writing to secondary storage devices 108 , e.g., according to resource availability. For example, a single secondary copy 116 may be written on a chunk-by-chunk basis to one or more secondary storage devices 108 .
  • users can select different chunk sizes, e.g., to improve throughput to tape storage devices.
  • each chunk can include a header and a payload.
  • the payload can include files (or other data units) or subsets thereof included in the chunk, whereas the chunk header generally includes metadata relating to the chunk, some or all of which may be derived from the payload.
  • media agent 144 , storage manager 140 , or other component may divide files into chunks and generate headers for each chunk by processing the files.
  • Headers can include a variety of information such as file and/or volume identifier(s), offset(s), and/or other information associated with the payload data items, a chunk sequence number, etc.
  • chunk headers can also be stored to index 153 of the associated media agent(s) 144 and/or to index 150 associated with storage manager 140 . This can be useful for providing faster processing of secondary copies 116 during browsing, restores, or other operations.
  • the secondary storage device 108 returns an indication of receipt, e.g., to media agent 144 and/or storage manager 140 , which may update their respective indexes 153 , 150 accordingly.
  • chunks may be processed (e.g., by media agent 144 ) according to the information in the chunk header to reassemble the files.
  • Data can also be communicated within system 100 in data channels that connect client computing devices 102 to secondary storage devices 108 .
  • These data channels can be referred to as “data streams,” and multiple data streams can be employed to parallelize an information management operation, improving data transfer rate, among other advantages.
  • Example data formatting techniques including techniques involving data streaming, chunking, and the use of other data structures in creating secondary copies are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,315,923, 8,156,086, and 8,578,120.
  • FIGS. 1 F and 1 G are diagrams of example data streams 170 and 171 , respectively, which may be employed for performing information management operations.
  • data agent 142 forms data stream 170 from source data associated with a client computing device 102 (e.g., primary data 112 ).
  • Data stream 170 is composed of multiple pairs of stream header 172 and stream data (or stream payload) 174 .
  • Data streams 170 and 171 shown in the illustrated example are for a single-instanced storage operation, and a stream payload 174 therefore may include both single-instance (SI) data and/or non-SI data.
  • a stream header 172 includes metadata about the stream payload 174 .
  • This metadata may include, for example, a length of the stream payload 174 , an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is encrypted, an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is compressed, an archive file identifier (ID), an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is single instanceable, and an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is a start of a block of data.
  • ID archive file identifier
  • data stream 171 has the stream header 172 and stream payload 174 aligned into multiple data blocks.
  • the data blocks are of size 64 KB.
  • the first two stream header 172 and stream payload 174 pairs comprise a first data block of size 64 KB.
  • the first stream header 172 indicates that the length of the succeeding stream payload 174 is 63 KB and that it is the start of a data block.
  • the next stream header 172 indicates that the succeeding stream payload 174 has a length of 1 KB and that it is not the start of a new data block.
  • Immediately following stream payload 174 is a pair comprising an identifier header 176 and identifier data 178 .
  • the identifier header 176 includes an indication that the succeeding identifier data 178 includes the identifier for the immediately previous data block.
  • the identifier data 178 includes the identifier that the data agent 142 generated for the data block.
  • the data stream 171 also includes other stream header 172 and stream payload 174 pairs, which may be for SI data and/or non-SI data.
  • FIG. 1 H is a diagram illustrating data structures 180 that may be used to store blocks of SI data and non-SI data on a storage device (e.g., secondary storage device 108 ).
  • data structures 180 do not form part of a native file system of the storage device.
  • Data structures 180 include one or more volume folders 182 , one or more chunk folders 184 / 185 within the volume folder 182 , and multiple files within chunk folder 184 .
  • Each chunk folder 184 / 185 includes a metadata file 186 / 187 , a metadata index file 188 / 189 , one or more container files 190 / 191 / 193 , and a container index file 192 / 194 .
  • Metadata file 186 / 187 stores non-SI data blocks as well as links to SI data blocks stored in container files.
  • Metadata index file 188 / 189 stores an index to the data in the metadata file 186 / 187 .
  • Container files 190 / 191 / 193 store SI data blocks.
  • Container index file 192 / 194 stores an index to container files 190 / 191 / 193 .
  • container index file 192 / 194 stores an indication of whether a corresponding block in a container file 190 / 191 / 193 is referred to by a link in a metadata file 186 / 187 .
  • data block B 2 in the container file 190 is referred to by a link in metadata file 187 in chunk folder 185 .
  • the corresponding index entry in container index file 192 indicates that data block B 2 in container file 190 is referred to.
  • data block B 1 in container file 191 is referred to by a link in metadata file 187 , and so the corresponding index entry in container index file 192 indicates that this data block is referred to.
  • data structures 180 illustrated in FIG. 1 H may have been created as a result of separate secondary copy operations involving two client computing devices 102 .
  • a first secondary copy operation on a first client computing device 102 could result in the creation of the first chunk folder 184
  • a second secondary copy operation on a second client computing device 102 could result in the creation of the second chunk folder 185 .
  • Container files 190 / 191 in the first chunk folder 184 would contain the blocks of SI data of the first client computing device 102 .
  • the second secondary copy operation on the data of the second client computing device 102 would result in media agent 144 storing primarily links to the data blocks of the first client computing device 102 that are already stored in the container files 190 / 191 . Accordingly, while a first secondary copy operation may result in storing nearly all of the data subject to the operation, subsequent secondary storage operations involving similar data may result in substantial data storage space savings, because links to already stored data blocks can be stored instead of additional instances of data blocks.
  • a sparse file is a type of file that may include empty space (e.g., a sparse file may have real data within it, such as at the beginning of the file and/or at the end of the file, but may also have empty space in it that is not storing actual data, such as a contiguous range of bytes all having a value of zero).
  • container files 190 / 191 / 193 be sparse files allows media agent 144 to free up space in container files 190 / 191 / 193 when blocks of data in container files 190 / 191 / 193 no longer need to be stored on the storage devices.
  • media agent 144 creates a new container file 190 / 191 / 193 when a container file 190 / 191 / 193 either includes 100 blocks of data or when the size of the container file 190 exceeds 50 MB.
  • media agent 144 creates a new container file 190 / 191 / 193 when a container file 190 / 191 / 193 satisfies other criteria (e.g., it contains from approx.
  • a file on which a secondary copy operation is performed may comprise a large number of data blocks.
  • a 100 MB file may comprise 400 data blocks of size 256 KB. If such a file is to be stored, its data blocks may span more than one container file, or even more than one chunk folder.
  • a database file of 20 GB may comprise over 40,000 data blocks of size 512 KB. If such a database file is to be stored, its data blocks will likely span multiple container files, multiple chunk folders, and potentially multiple volume folders. Restoring such files may require accessing multiple container files, chunk folders, and/or volume folders to obtain the requisite data blocks.
  • FIG. 2 A illustrates a system 200 configured to address these and other issues by using backup or other secondary copy data to synchronize a source subsystem 201 (e.g., a production site) with a destination subsystem 203 (e.g., a failover site).
  • a source subsystem 201 e.g., a production site
  • a destination subsystem 203 e.g., a failover site
  • live synchronization and/or “live synchronization replication.”
  • the source client computing devices 202 a include one or more virtual machines (or “VMs”) executing on one or more corresponding VM host computers 205 a , though the source need not be virtualized.
  • the destination site 203 may be at a location that is remote from the production site 201 , or may be located in the same data center, without limitation.
  • One or more of the production site 201 and destination site 203 may reside at data centers at known geographic locations, or alternatively may operate “in the cloud.”
  • FIG. 2 A illustrates an embodiment of a data flow which may be orchestrated at the direction of one or more storage managers (not shown).
  • the source data agent(s) 242 a and source media agent(s) 244 a work together to write backup or other secondary copies of the primary data generated by the source client computing devices 202 a into the source secondary storage device(s) 208 a .
  • the backup/secondary copies are retrieved by the source media agent(s) 244 a from secondary storage.
  • source media agent(s) 244 a communicate the backup/secondary copies across a network to the destination media agent(s) 244 b in destination subsystem 203 .
  • the data can be copied from source to destination in an incremental fashion, such that only changed blocks are transmitted, and in some cases multiple incremental backups are consolidated at the source so that only the most current changed blocks are transmitted to and applied at the destination.
  • An example of live synchronization of virtual machines using the “incremental forever” approach is found in U.S. Patent Application No. 62/265,339 entitled “Live Synchronization and Management of Virtual Machines across Computing and Virtualization Platforms and Using Live Synchronization to Support Disaster Recovery.”
  • a deduplicated copy can be employed to further reduce network traffic from source to destination.
  • the system can utilize the deduplicated copy techniques described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,239,687, entitled “Systems and Methods for Retaining and Using Data Block Signatures in Data Protection Operations.”
  • destination media agent(s) 244 b write the received backup/secondary copy data to the destination secondary storage device(s) 208 b .
  • the synchronization is completed when the destination media agent(s) and destination data agent(s) 242 b restore the backup/secondary copy data to the destination client computing device(s) 202 b .
  • the destination client computing device(s) 202 b may be kept “warm” awaiting activation in case failure is detected at the source.
  • This synchronization/replication process can incorporate the techniques described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/721,971, entitled “Replication Using Deduplicated Secondary Copy Data.”
  • the synchronized copies can be viewed as mirror or replication copies.
  • the production site 201 is not burdened with the synchronization operations. Because the destination site 203 can be maintained in a synchronized “warm” state, the downtime for switching over from the production site 201 to the destination site 203 is substantially less than with a typical restore from secondary storage.
  • the production site 201 may flexibly and efficiently fail over, with minimal downtime and with relatively up-to-date data, to a destination site 203 , such as a cloud-based failover site.
  • the destination site 203 can later be reverse synchronized back to the production site 201 , such as after repairs have been implemented or after the failure has passed.
  • FIG. 2 B illustrates an information management system 200 having an architecture that provides such advantages, and incorporates use of a standard file system protocol between primary and secondary storage subsystems 217 , 218 .
  • NFS network file system
  • CIFS Common Internet File System
  • data agent 242 can co-reside with media agent 244 on the same server (e.g., a secondary storage computing device such as component 106 ), or in some other location in secondary storage subsystem 218 .
  • server e.g., a secondary storage computing device such as component 106
  • secondary storage subsystem 218 allocates an NFS network path to the client computing device 202 or to one or more target applications 210 running on client computing device 202 .
  • the client computing device 202 mounts the designated NFS path and writes data to that NFS path.
  • the NFS path may be obtained from NFS path data 215 stored locally at the client computing device 202 , and which may be a copy of or otherwise derived from NFS path data 219 stored in the secondary storage subsystem 218 .
  • Storage manager 240 can include a pseudo-client manager 217 , which coordinates the process by, among other things, communicating information relating to client computing device 202 and application 210 (e.g., application type, client computing device identifier, etc.) to data agent 242 , obtaining appropriate NFS path data from the data agent 242 (e.g., NFS path information), and delivering such data to client computing device 202 .
  • information relating to client computing device 202 and application 210 e.g., application type, client computing device identifier, etc.
  • NFS path data e.g., NFS path information
  • client computing device 202 reads from the designated NFS network path, and the read request is translated by data agent 242 .
  • the data agent 242 then works with media agent 244 to retrieve, re-process (e.g., re-hydrate, decompress, decrypt), and forward the requested data to client computing device 202 using NFS.
  • re-process e.g., re-hydrate, decompress, decrypt
  • the illustrative architecture effectively decouples the client computing devices 202 from the installed components of system 200 , improving both scalability and plug-ability of system 200 .
  • the secondary storage subsystem 218 in such environments can be treated simply as a read/write NFS target for primary storage subsystem 217 , without the need for information management software to be installed on client computing devices 202 .
  • an enterprise implementing a cloud production computing environment can add VM client computing devices 202 without installing and configuring specialized information management software on these VMs. Rather, backups and restores are achieved transparently, where the new VMs simply write to and read from the designated NFS path.
  • FIG. 2 C shows a block diagram of an example of a highly scalable, managed data pool architecture useful in accommodating such data growth.
  • the illustrated system 200 which may be referred to as a “web-scale” architecture according to certain embodiments, can be readily incorporated into both open compute/storage and common-cloud architectures.
  • the illustrated system 200 includes a grid 245 of media agents 244 logically organized into a control tier 231 and a secondary or storage tier 233 .
  • Media agents assigned to the storage tier 233 can be configured to manage a secondary storage pool 208 as a deduplication store, and be configured to receive client write and read requests from the primary storage subsystem 217 , and direct those requests to the secondary tier 233 for servicing.
  • media agents CMA 1 -CMA 3 in the control tier 231 maintain and consult one or more deduplication databases 247 , which can include deduplication information (e.g., data block hashes, data block links, file containers for deduplicated files, etc.) sufficient to read deduplicated files from secondary storage pool 208 and write deduplicated files to secondary storage pool 208 .
  • deduplication information e.g., data block hashes, data block links, file containers for deduplicated files, etc.
  • system 200 can incorporate any of the deduplication systems and methods shown and described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,020,900, entitled “Distributed Deduplicated Storage System,” and U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2014/0201170, entitled “High Availability Distributed Deduplicated Storage System.”
  • Media agents SMA 1 -SMA 6 assigned to the secondary tier 233 receive write and read requests from media agents CMA 1 -CMA 3 in control tier 231 , and access secondary storage pool 208 to service those requests.
  • Media agents CMA 1 -CMA 3 in control tier 231 can also communicate with secondary storage pool 208 , and may execute read and write requests themselves (e.g., in response to requests from other control media agents CMA 1 -CMA 3 ) in addition to issuing requests to media agents in secondary tier 233 .
  • deduplication database(s) 247 can in some cases reside in storage devices in secondary storage pool 208 .
  • each of the media agents 244 (e.g., CMA 1 -CMA 3 , SMA 1 -SMA 6 , etc.) in grid 245 can be allocated a corresponding dedicated partition 251 A- 2511 , respectively, in secondary storage pool 208 .
  • Each partition 251 can include a first portion 253 containing data associated with (e.g., stored by) media agent 244 corresponding to the respective partition 251 .
  • System 200 can also implement a desired level of replication, thereby providing redundancy in the event of a failure of a media agent 244 in grid 245 .
  • each partition 251 can further include a second portion 255 storing one or more replication copies of the data associated with one or more other media agents 244 in the grid.
  • System 200 can also be configured to allow for seamless addition of media agents 244 to grid 245 via automatic configuration.
  • a storage manager (not shown) or other appropriate component may determine that it is appropriate to add an additional node to control tier 231 , and perform some or all of the following: (i) assess the capabilities of a newly added or otherwise available computing device as satisfying a minimum criteria to be configured as or hosting a media agent in control tier 231 ; (ii) confirm that a sufficient amount of the appropriate type of storage exists to support an additional node in control tier 231 (e.g., enough disk drive capacity exists in storage pool 208 to support an additional deduplication database 247 ); (iii) install appropriate media agent software on the computing device and configure the computing device according to a pre-determined template; (iv) establish a partition 251 in the storage pool 208 dedicated to the newly established media agent 244 ; and (v) build any appropriate data structures (e.g., an instance of deduplication database 247 ).
  • FIGS. 2 A, 2 B, and 2 C may be implemented in any combination and permutation to satisfy data storage management and information management needs at one or more locations and/or data centers.
  • An information management system may include multiple client computing devices, storage managers, secondary storage computing devices, secondary storage devices, auxiliary storage computing devices, auxiliary storage devices, and other such devices. As the number of client computing devices increases within the information management system, it becomes increasingly important that the storage manager managing these client computing devices have a minimal amount of downtime.
  • a failover node in communicatively coupled to the storage manager may activate, and the failover node may select another storage manager to assume the duties and responsibilities of the failed storage manager. This process may be automated to reduce the recovery time objective (RTO) of the information management system.
  • RTO recovery time objective
  • having multiple storage managers which may be offline, synchronized to the active (or online) storage manager, ensures that the storage manager selected by the failover node has a recent (or most recent) copy of the information previously managed by the, now failed, storage manager.
  • FIG. 3 A illustrates an information management system 302 configured to perform automatic failover of an active storage manager 308 A, in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • the information management system 302 may include multiple networks 304 A- 304 C, where each network 304 A- 304 C represents a subnet 306 A- 306 C or cluster 306 A- 306 C of various computing devices.
  • the information management system 302 includes three networks 304 A- 304 C, where each network 304 A- 304 C represents a cluster 306 A- 306 C of computing devices, and each cluster 306 A- 306 C includes at least one storage manager 308 A- 308 C.
  • the storage managers 308 A- 308 C are implemented similarly to the storage manger 140 illustrated in FIG. 1 C . Accordingly, the storage manager 308 A- 308 C may include one or more components illustrated in FIG. 1 C , such as a management database that stores one or more information policies and/or an management index, a management agent, a jobs agent, or any other components discussed with reference to the storage manager 140 . As discussed below with reference to FIG. 7 , the storage managers 308 A- 308 C may also include additional components that facilitate the automatic failover of a storage manager.
  • a storage manager selected from the storage managers 308 A- 308 C may be designated as the active storage manager.
  • the storage manager 308 A may be designated as the active storage manager.
  • the storage manager 308 A may be initially designated as the active storage manager by an administrator or operator of the information management system 302 .
  • the active storage manager 308 may be responsible for implementing one or more information management policies and for managing the primary data and/or secondary copies of the primary data within the information management system 302 .
  • the active storage manager 308 A may also communicate with one or more of the other devices in the subnets 306 B- 306 C, such as the storage manager 308 B, the storage manager 308 C, the failover nodes 310 B- 310 C, and the other computing devices.
  • the active storage manager 308 A backups and/or synchronizes one or more of its databases (e.g., the management database) to one or more of the other, offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may backup and/or synchronize one or more of its databases based on an information management policy, according to a predetermined schedule stored by the active storage manager 308 A, and/or based on one or more predetermined conditions being satisfied.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may backup and/or synchronize its database with the other offline, storage managers 308 B- 308 C once an hour, once a day, every other day, or according to any other schedule.
  • the active storage manager 308 A is responsible for implementing one or more information management policies that instruct the active storage manager 308 A when to back up and/or synchronize its one or more databases.
  • one or more of the offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C back up and/or synchronize their management databases (not shown) with the management database of the active storage manager 308 A.
  • an offline storage manager 308 B- 308 C may be in communication with the active storage manager 308 A, but may not be directing the management of data for one or more client computing devices and/or secondary storage devices.
  • An offline storage manager 308 B- 308 C may retrieve data from one or more databases of the active storage manager 308 A, and synchronize that data with its own database.
  • the information management system 302 may also include one or more failover nodes 310 A- 310 C, where each failover node 310 A- 310 C is associated with a corresponding storage manager 308 A- 308 C. Furthermore, the one or more offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C may also be categorized as failover nodes as the offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C are activated in response to the active storage manager 308 A entering a failed state.
  • a failover node 310 A- 310 C is implemented similarly to a storage manager and/or a client computing device (e.g., having one or more processors, one or more computer-readable mediums, and so forth), but may also include additional components, applications, and/or data for facilitating the automatic failover of the active storage manager 308 A. Additional details with regard to the components, applications, and/or data of a failover node 308 A is further discussed with reference to FIG. 7 .
  • a failover node 310 A- 310 C is tasked with determining whether to perform a failover of the active storage manager (e.g., active storage manager 308 A).
  • Each storage manager 308 A- 308 C may be associated with a corresponding failover node 310 A- 310 C for redundancy to ensure that at least one failover node 310 A- 310 C can perform the failover of the active storage manager.
  • a failover node may first determine whether the active storage manager 308 A is reachable (e.g., whether the active storage manager responds to one or more communications from the failover node). Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager 308 A is not reachable, the failover node may then use or execute one or more failover rules to determine whether the active storage manager 308 A is reachable and/or unavailable.
  • the failover node 310 A may rely on the availability status of other devices in the information management system 302 .
  • the availability status of other devices in the information management system 302 may be used as a signal to the failover node 310 A as to whether the storage manager 308 A is unreachable by other devices or is simply unreachable by the failover node 310 A.
  • selected devices of the information management 302 are designated as monitoring nodes, where each monitoring node is configured to communicate with each other monitoring node.
  • FIG. 3 B illustrates the information management system 302 of FIG. 3 A , where one or more devices have been designated as monitoring nodes, in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • an operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302 selects devices from among the devices of the information management system 302 to be monitoring nodes.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may maintain a database table (or other data structure) that identifies which of the devices have been designated as a monitoring node.
  • the monitoring nodes may include any of the storage managers 308 A- 308 C, any of the failover nodes 310 A- 310 C, and one or more of the client computing devices selected from the subnets or clusters 306 A- 306 C.
  • the client computing devices that have been selected as monitoring nodes are illustrated with shading to distinguish from those client computing devices that have not been selected as monitoring nodes.
  • the first subnet or cluster 306 A includes five monitoring nodes (e.g., three client computing devices, the active storage manager 308 A, and the failover node 3010 A)
  • the second subnet or cluster 306 B includes four monitoring nodes (e.g., two client computing devices, the offline storage manager 308 B, and the failover node 310 B)
  • the third subnet or cluster 306 C includes four monitoring nodes (e.g., two client computing devices, the offline storage manager 308 C, and the failover node 310 C).
  • the active storage manager 308 A may communicate a configuration file to the designated device that configures the designated device as a monitoring node.
  • the configuration file may include one or more computer-executable instructions (e.g., one or more computer applications, scripts, etc.) that, when executed by the designated device, causes the designated device to instantiate a monitoring application or process that is configured to communicate with all other devices that been designated as monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 .
  • the configuration file may configure the designated device to listen (e.g., via a process thread) for incoming messages from other monitoring nodes, and to respond to the messages from the other monitoring nodes.
  • a device configured as a monitoring node instantiates a listening process or thread that listens for incoming messages from other monitoring nodes; when the listening process or thread receives an incoming message from a monitoring node, the listening process or thread may communicate an acknowledgement message (e.g., an “ACK” message) to the monitoring node from which the incoming message originating. Where a response is received (e.g., an ACK message), the listening process or thread may update a data structure that indicates that the monitoring node was available. As discussed below with reference to FIGS. 5 - 7 , a monitoring node may also send out other messages to other monitoring nodes about the status of other monitoring nodes.
  • an acknowledgement message e.g., an “ACK” message
  • FIG. 4 is an illustration of communication pathways of a selected group of monitoring nodes illustrated in FIG. 3 B , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • three client computing devices 402 - 406 have been designated as monitoring nodes, and the active storage manager 308 A and its associated failover node 310 A are also monitoring nodes.
  • Each device designated as a monitoring node is configured to communicate messages to each other monitoring node.
  • each monitoring node instantiates a session handler, where the session handler is an application and/or a process configured to send a status inquiry message to every other monitoring node.
  • the session handler may wait for an acknowledgment message from a monitoring node to which the status inquiry message has been sent, where the session handler may wait for a predetermined time period for the acknowledgement message. Where the session handler receives the acknowledgement message, the session handler may update a data structure that indicates that the monitoring node to which the status inquiry message was sent is reachable and/or available. Where the session handler does not receive the acknowledgement message within the predetermined time period, the session handler may update a data structure indicating that the monitoring node to whom the status inquiry message was sent is not reachable and/or not available.
  • each monitoring node 402 - 406 may also communicate with every monitoring node, storage managers, and failover nodes of other subnets and/or clusters.
  • each monitoring node 402 - 406 may communicate with other monitoring nodes in the subnets and/or clusters 306 B- 306 C.
  • the monitoring nodes in the subnets and/or clusters 306 A- 306 C may communicate with other storage managers and/or failover nodes, including the storage managers 308 B- 308 C and the failover nodes 310 B- 310 C.
  • each of the storage managers 308 A- 308 C and/or the failover nodes 310 A- 310 C may communicate with other storage managers 308 A- 308 C and/or failover nodes 310 A- 310 C.
  • a monitoring node may be a client computing device, a storage manager, a failover node, and/or any other device within the information management system 302 , and every monitoring node may be configured to communicate with all other monitoring nodes, including monitoring nodes separated by subnets and/or clusters.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a client computing device 502 of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • the client computing device 502 includes one or more processor(s) 504 , one or more communication interface(s) 506 , one or more computer-readable medium(s) 508 .
  • the one or more computer-readable medium(s) 508 may include one or more application(s) 510 and data 512 .
  • the client computing device 502 may be designated as a monitoring node, such as monitoring node 402 illustrated in FIG. 4 .
  • the one or more processor(s) 504 may be any type of commercially available processor, such as processors available from the Intel Corporation, Advanced Micro Devices, Qualcomm, Texas Instruments, or other such processors. Further still, the one or more processor(s) 504 may include one or more special-purpose processors, such as a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The one or more processor(s) 504 may also include programmable logic or circuitry that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. Thus, once configured by such software, the one or more processor(s) 504 become specific machines (or specific components of a machine) uniquely tailored to perform the configured functions and are no longer general-purpose processors.
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • the one or more communication interface(s) 506 are configured to facilitate communications between the client computing device 502 and other devices within the information management system 302 , such as other monitoring nodes, the storage managers 308 A- 308 C, and/or the failover nodes 310 A- 310 C.
  • the one or more communication interface(s) 506 may include wired communication components, wireless communication components, cellular communication components, Near Field Communication (NFC) components, Bluetooth® components (e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy), Wi-Fi® components, and other communication components to provide communication via other modalities.
  • NFC Near Field Communication
  • Bluetooth® components e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy
  • Wi-Fi® components e.g., Wi-Fi® components
  • the client computing device 502 further includes one or more computer-readable medium(s) 508 that store one or more application(s) 510 and data 512 for monitoring and/or reporting the status of other monitoring nodes.
  • the computer-readable medium(s) 508 may include one or more devices configured to store instructions and data temporarily or permanently and may include, but is not be limited to, random-access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), buffer memory, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media, cache memory, other types of storage (e.g., Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and/or any suitable combination thereof.
  • computer-readable medium should be taken to include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, or associated caches and servers) able to store the application(s) 510 and the data 512 . Accordingly, the computer-readable medium(s) 508 may be implemented as a single storage apparatus or device, or, alternatively and/or additionally, as a “cloud-based” storage systems or storage networks that include multiple storage apparatus or devices.
  • the application(s) 510 are written in a computer-programming and/or scripting language. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, C, C++, C#, Java, JavaScript, Perl, Python, or any other computer programming and/or scripting language now known or later developed.
  • the client computing device 502 may include a variety of software such as an operating system, a web browser, a word processing application, an e-mail client, and so forth. A discussion of this software has been omitted for brevity. To explain the benefits provided by the disclosed systems and methods for performing an automatic failover of a storage manager, FIG. 5 illustrates that the client computing device 502 may include application(s) 510 , which may include a session handler 514 , a data agent 516 , and a periodic thread 518 .
  • application(s) 510 may include a session handler 514 , a data agent 516 , and a periodic thread 518 .
  • the data agent 516 may be implemented similarly to the data agent 142 discussed with reference to FIG. 1 D . More particularly, the data agent 516 be responsible for backing up primary data 522 which, as explained previously, may be an initial or first stored body of data generated by a source (e.g., the client computing device 502 ).
  • the primary data 522 may be created substantially directly from data generated by a corresponding source application and may include files, directories, file system volumes, data blocks, extents, or any other hierarchies or organizations of data objects.
  • the data agent 516 may back up the primary data 522 to one or more secondary storage devices (not shown) of the information management system 302 .
  • the session handler 514 is configured to instantiate one or more periodic threads 518 , and to manage the monitoring node statuses obtained from communicating the status inquiry message to one or more of the other monitoring nodes.
  • the session handler 514 may instantiate a predetermined number of periodic threads 518 , where each periodic thread 518 is configured to communicate with one or more of the other monitoring nodes.
  • the session handler 514 may be tasked with maintaining and/or updating a data structure that includes one or more of the node statuses 520 based on whether a monitoring node responds to the status inquiry message communicated by the session handler 514 .
  • the session handler 514 communicates a status inquiry message to one or more of the designated monitoring nodes.
  • a monitoring node may be configured to reply and/or send an acknowledgment message in response to the status inquiry message.
  • the session handler 514 may update a data structure that associates the designated monitoring nodes with their statuses 520 .
  • a node status may be a binary value, where the node status is selected from values corresponding to “available” or “not available.”
  • a numerical value of “1” may indicate that a monitoring node replied and/or sent an acknowledgment message in response to the status inquiry message (e.g., the monitoring node is reachable and/or available)
  • a numerical value of “0” may indicate that a monitoring node did not reply and/or send an acknowledgement message (e.g., the monitoring node is not reachable and/or not available).
  • the session handler 514 may record a monitoring node status as not being reachable and/or not available where the session handler 514 does not receive a reply and/or acknowledgment message within a predetermined time period after sending the status inquiry message to a corresponding monitoring node.
  • the monitoring nodes to which the session handler 514 may send the status inquiry message may include, but are not limited to, the monitoring nodes designated by an operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302 , the one or more storage managers 308 A- 308 C (including any online and/or offline storage managers), the one or more failover nodes 310 A- 310 C, and any other nodes in the information management system 302 .
  • a monitoring node may be configured to send one or more session messages to other monitoring nodes.
  • the client computing device 502 instantiates a periodic thread 518 configured to send a session message to each device designated as a monitoring node, where the session message includes the node statuses 520 obtained by the session handler 514 .
  • the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every ten minutes, once an hour, etc.) and/or in response to updating the status of one or more of the monitoring nodes (e.g., an acknowledgment message has been received and/or a monitoring node has been determined as being nonresponsive).
  • the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message to each monitoring node regardless of whether the monitoring node is actually available (e.g., the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message to a monitoring node that is offline). As explained previously, the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session messages to one or more of the client computing devices that been designated as monitoring nodes (e.g., the monitoring nodes shaded in FIG. 360 , the one or more storage managers 308 A- 308 C, and/or the one or more failover nodes 310 A- 310 C. The session handler 514 may also communicate the status inquiry message to other monitoring nodes not specifically illustrated in FIG. 3 A and/or FIG. 3 B , but illustrated in any of the other figures, including one or more secondary storage computing devices, auxiliary storage computing devices, or any other computing device.
  • the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session messages to each monitoring node regardless of whether the monitoring node is actually available (e.g., the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message to a monitoring node that is offline). As explained previously,
  • the client computing device 502 may be loaded with configuration data 524 .
  • the configuration data 524 may have instructions that configure the client computing device 502 to operate as a monitoring node and may include, among other things, instructions for obtaining and/or downloading the session handler 514 , instructions for implementing the session handler 514 , instructions for implementing the periodic thread 518 , instructions for acting when an acknowledgement message is received, instructions for acting when an acknowledgement message is not received, timing data for the session handler 514 and/or the periodic thread 518 , and other such configuration information that instruct the client computing device 502 to act as a monitoring node.
  • the configuration data 524 may also include a data structure (e.g., a list, array, matrix, etc.), that identifies the other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 and how the client computing device 502 may communicate with the other monitoring nodes (e.g., an Internet Protocol (IP) address, port number, login credentials, authorization credentials, etc.).
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • active storage manager 308 A communicates the configuration data 524 to the client computing device 502 .
  • the active storage manager 308 A may also communicate the configuration data 524 to one or more of the other devices in the information management system 302 including, but not limited to, another storage manager (e.g., offline storage managers 3086 - 308 C), one or more of the failover nodes 310 A- 310 C, one or more secondary storage computing devices, one or more auxiliary storage computing devices, or any other device in the information management system 302 .
  • the active storage manager 308 A may communicate the configuration data 524 to the client computing device 502 in response to the client computing device 502 being designated as a monitoring node.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may also communicate the configuration data 524 to a device in the information management system 302 based on an instruction received by an operator or administrator interacting with the active storage manager 308 A.
  • the configuration data may initially include a default or base set of instructions (e.g., timing intervals, destination nodes, actions to take in response to acknowledgement instructions, etc.), where the default or base set of instructions are generic to the devices of the information management system 302 .
  • the storage manager may include a generic set of configuration data that is then modified to accommodate a specific device (e.g., a client computing device, a storage manager, a failover node, etc.).
  • the configuration data 524 may be specific to the client computing device 502 and provide instructions and/or configuration information for the client computing device 502 to communicate with and/or interact with other monitoring nodes.
  • the data 512 may also include a data structure for storing and/or associating one or more node statuses 520 with corresponding monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 .
  • the node statuses 520 may be communicated by the client computing device 502 to one or more of the other monitoring nodes via the periodic thread 518 .
  • the node statuses 520 identify whether a particular monitoring node is available or unavailable.
  • the node statuses 520 identify whether a particular node is available or unavailable for another monitoring node.
  • the node statuses 520 may be implemented using an N ⁇ N array, where N is the number of monitoring nodes (including client computing devices, storage managers, secondary storage computing devices, etc.), and the intersections in the N ⁇ N array indicate whether a first monitoring node was available and/or reachable by a second monitoring node.
  • the monitoring nodes may reach receive a session message to ensure that each monitoring node includes an up-to-date copy of the node statuses 520 within the information management system 302 in the event that one or more monitoring nodes become unavailable and/or unreachable.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates the active storage manager 308 A of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • the storage manager 308 A includes one or more processor(s) 604 , and one or more communication interface(s) 606 , and one or more computer-readable medium(s) 608 .
  • the one or more computer-readable medium(s) 608 may include one or more application(s) 610 and data 612 .
  • the storage manager 308 A may be designated as a monitoring node. However, in some instances, the storage manager 308 A may automatically be designated as a monitoring node when the storage manager 308 A is communicatively coupled within the information management system 302 .
  • the active storage manager 308 A may be implemented similarly to the storage manager 140 illustrated in FIG. 1 C . Accordingly, the active storage manager 308 A may include one or more of the components of the storage manager 140 and implement similar functionalities. The active storage manager 308 A may also include a management database (not shown) similar to the management database 146 illustrated in FIG. 1 C . Furthermore, the active storage manager 308 A may include the components, applications, and data illustrated in FIG. 6 in furtherance of the automatic failover mechanism discussed herein.
  • the one or more processor(s) 604 may be any type of commercially available processor, such as processors available from the Intel Corporation, Advanced Micro Devices, Qualcomm, Texas Instruments, or other such processors. Further still, the one or more processor(s) 604 may include one or more special-purpose processors, such as a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The one or more processor(s) 604 may also include programmable logic or circuitry that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. Thus, once configured by such software, the one or more processor(s) 604 become specific machines (or specific components of a machine) uniquely tailored to perform the configured functions and are no longer general-purpose processors.
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • the one or more communication interface(s) 606 are configured to facilitate communications between the storage manager 308 A and other devices within the information management system 302 , such as other monitoring nodes, the other storage managers 308 B- 308 C, and/or the failover nodes 310 A- 310 C.
  • the one or more communication interface(s) 606 may include wired communication components, wireless communication components, cellular communication components, Near Field Communication (NFC) components, Bluetooth® components (e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy), Wi-Fi® components, and other communication components to provide communication via other modalities.
  • NFC Near Field Communication
  • Bluetooth® components e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy
  • Wi-Fi® components e.g., Wi-Fi® components
  • the storage manager 308 A further includes one or more computer-readable medium(s) 608 that store one or more application(s) 610 and data 612 for configuring new devices in the information management system 302 as monitoring nodes, for monitoring and/or reporting the status of other monitoring nodes, and/or for synchronizing its management database with the other storage managers 308 B- 308 C.
  • the computer-readable medium(s) 608 may include one or more devices configured to store instructions and data temporarily or permanently and may include, but is not be limited to, random-access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), buffer memory, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media, cache memory, other types of storage (e.g., Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and/or any suitable combination thereof.
  • computer-readable medium should be taken to include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, or associated caches and servers) able to store the application(s) 610 and the data 612 . Accordingly, the computer-readable medium(s) 608 may be implemented as a single storage apparatus or device, or, alternatively and/or additionally, as a “cloud-based” storage systems or storage networks that include multiple storage apparatus or devices.
  • the application(s) 610 are written in a computer-programming and/or scripting language. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, C, C++, C#, Java, JavaScript, Perl, Python, or any other computer programming and/or scripting language now known or later developed.
  • the application(s) 610 include a session handler 614 , a database synchronization application 616 , one or more periodic threads 618 , and a configuration application 620 .
  • the storage manager 308 A may include other applications and/or components as discussed with reference to FIG. 1 C , but these applications and/or components have been omitted for brevity.
  • the session handler 614 may be implemented similarly to the session handler 514 discussed with reference to the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 . Accordingly, the session handler 614 may be configured to send one or more status inquiry messages to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 , including those monitoring nodes that may be located at other subnets and/or clusters. Where a reply and/or an acknowledgment is received from a designated monitoring node, the session handler 614 may update a data structure that associates the designated monitoring nodes with their statuses 622 .
  • the monitoring nodes to which the session handler 614 may send the status inquiry message may include, but are not limited to, the monitoring nodes designated by an operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302 , the offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C, the one or more failover nodes 310 A- 310 C, and any other nodes in the information management system 302 .
  • the session handler 614 may instantiate one or more periodic threads 618 , and manage the monitoring node statuses 622 obtained from communicating status inquiry messages to one or more of the other monitoring nodes.
  • the one or more periodic threads 618 may be configured to communicate the monitoring node status 622 to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 via one or more session messages to the other monitoring nodes.
  • the database synchronization application 616 is configured to synchronize one or more databases of the active storage manager 308 A with the other offline storage managers (e.g., storage managers 308 B- 308 C). In one embodiment, the database synchronization application 616 determines differences between the one or more databases managed by the offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C and the one or more databases managed by the active storage manager 308 A. In this regard, the offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C may mirror the active storage manager 308 A, where the offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C include a similar or identical configuration as the active storage manager 308 A.
  • the database synchronization application 616 may determine whether the offline databases include the same, or up-to-date, information as the active database (e.g., the management database 146 ). Where there are differences, the database synchronization application 616 updates and/or modifies the offline databases with the up-to-date information found in the active database. Thus, the offline databases represent identical, or nearly identical, copies of the active database.
  • the database synchronization application 616 may synchronize the active database with the offline database at periodic intervals, based on one or more information management policies stored in a management database, and/or based on one or more predetermined conditions being satisfied. For example, the database synchronization application 616 may synchronize the one or more databases of the active storage manager 308 A on a daily basis (e.g., at the expiration of a 24-hour time period), when a new client computing device is added to the information management system 302 (e.g., a predetermined condition being satisfied), or when instructed to do so by an information management policy (e.g., the current day is a particular day established by the information management policy).
  • an information management policy e.g., the current day is a particular day established by the information management policy.
  • the active storage manager 308 A By synchronizing its one or more databases with the other offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C, the active storage manager 308 A ensures that one of the offline storage managers can be brought online in the event of a failure, and that the offline storage manager includes the most recent information managed by the active storage manager 308 A.
  • the application(s) 610 also include one or more periodic threads 618 , which may be instantiated by the session handler 614 .
  • the one or more periodic threads 618 may be similar to the one or more periodic threads 518 instantiated by the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 .
  • the one or more periodic threads 618 may communicate one or more session messages to one or more of the designated monitoring nodes, where the one or more session messages including the node statuses 622 .
  • the active storage manager 308 A may also include a configuration application 620 that sends device-specific configuration data 626 for causing the destination device to act as a monitoring node (in addition to performing its other functionalities).
  • the device-specific configuration data 626 may be received by a monitoring node (e.g., the client computing device 502 ) as the configuration data 524 .
  • the device-specific configuration data 626 may be implemented as an executable script, where the destination device executes the executable script upon receiving the executable script.
  • the device-specific configuration data 626 may be based on default configuration data 624 , where the default configuration data 624 is modifiable depending on the destination device to which the device-specific configuration data 626 is being sent.
  • an operator, user, or administrator of the information management system 302 may interact with the active storage manager 308 A via a graphical user interface (e.g., a locally displayed graphical user interface, a web application displaying a web interface provided by the active storage manager 308 A, etc.), and may select, via the graphical user interface, one or more devices in the information management system 302 to be monitoring nodes. Based on this selection, the active storage manager 308 A may first generate device-specific configuration data 626 from the default configuration data 624 for each of the monitoring nodes. For example, the active storage manager 308 A may first generate a list of the devices in the information management system 302 that are monitoring nodes, and this list may be incorporated into the device-specific configuration data 626 .
  • a graphical user interface e.g., a locally displayed graphical user interface, a web application displaying a web interface provided by the active storage manager 308 A, etc.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may first generate device-specific configuration data 626 from the default configuration data 6
  • the default configuration data 624 may specify that a session handler is to send a status inquiry message every ten minutes. However, where the device being configured is a client computing device, the default configuration data 624 may be modified so that the session handler is to send a status inquiry message every hour. As another example, where the device being configured is a failover node, the default configuration data 624 may be modified so that the session handler is to send a status inquiry message every fifteen minutes.
  • the default configuration data 624 may also be modified, including the list of monitoring nodes to whom the status inquiry message is sent, the frequency of the status inquiry message, the values indicating whether a monitoring node is reachable and/or available, and any other attributes and/or characteristics used to configure a device as a monitoring node. In this manner, the default configuration data 624 can be used to support a wide variety of device types, and different types of devices can be added into the information management system 302 as monitoring nodes.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a failover node 310 A of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates that the failover node 310 A is associated with the active storage manager 308 A, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the components, applications, and data illustrated in FIG. 7 may also apply to other failover nodes, such as the failover nodes 310 B- 310 C.
  • the failover node 310 A includes one or more processor(s) 704 , one or more communication interface(s) 706 , and one or more computer-readable medium(s) 708 .
  • the one or more computer-readable medium(s) 708 may include one or more application(s) 710 and data 712 .
  • the failover node 310 A may be designated as a monitoring node. However, in some instances, the failover node 310 A may automatically be designated as a monitoring node when the failover node 310 A is communicatively coupled within the information management system 302 .
  • the one or more processor(s) 704 may be any type of commercially available processor, such as processors available from the Intel Corporation, Advanced Micro Devices, Qualcomm, Texas Instruments, or other such processors. Further still, the one or more processor(s) 704 may include one or more special-purpose processors, such as a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The one or more processor(s) 704 may also include programmable logic or circuitry that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. Thus, once configured by such software, the one or more processor(s) 704 become specific machines (or specific components of a machine) uniquely tailored to perform the configured functions and are no longer general-purpose processors.
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • the one or more communication interface(s) 706 are configured to facilitate communications between the failover node 310 A and other devices within the information management system 302 , such as other monitoring nodes, the other storage managers 308 A- 308 C, and/or the failover nodes 310 B- 310 C.
  • the one or more communication interface(s) 706 may include wired communication components, wireless communication components, cellular communication components, Near Field Communication (NFC) components, Bluetooth® components (e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy), Wi-Fi® components, and other communication components to provide communication via other modalities.
  • NFC Near Field Communication
  • Bluetooth® components e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy
  • Wi-Fi® components e.g., Wi-Fi® components
  • the failover node 310 A further includes one or more computer-readable medium(s) 708 that store one or more application(s) 710 and data 712 for determining whether to perform a failover of the active storage manager 308 A.
  • the computer-readable medium(s) 708 may include one or more devices configured to store instructions and data temporarily or permanently and may include, but is not be limited to, random-access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), buffer memory, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media, cache memory, other types of storage (e.g., Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and/or any suitable combination thereof.
  • computer-readable medium should be taken to include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, or associated caches and servers) able to store the application(s) 710 and the data 712 .
  • the computer-readable medium(s) 708 may be implemented as a single storage apparatus or device, or, alternatively and/or additionally, as a “cloud-based” storage systems or storage networks that include multiple storage apparatus or devices.
  • the application(s) 710 are written in a computer-programming and/or scripting language. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, C, C++, C#, Java, JavaScript, Perl, Python, or any other computer programming and/or scripting language now known or later developed.
  • the application(s) 710 include a session handler 714 , failover application 716 , and one or more periodic thread(s) 718 .
  • the failover node 310 A may include other applications or components found in a computing device, such as an operating system, display devices, human/machine interfaces (e.g., keyboard, mouse, etc.), and other such applications and/or components, and a discussion of these elements has been omitted for brevity and readability.
  • the session handler 714 may be implemented similarly to the session handler 514 discussed with reference to the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 . Accordingly, the session handler 714 may be configured to send one or more status inquiry messages to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 , including those monitoring nodes that may be located at other subnets and/or clusters. In addition, the session handler 714 may instantiate one or more periodic threads 718 and manage the monitoring node statuses 720 obtained from communicating status inquiry messages to one or more of the other monitoring nodes.
  • the failover application 716 is configured to initiate a failover of the active storage manager 308 A to one or more of the offline storage managers 310 B- 310 C. To perform the failover of the active storage manager 308 A, the failover application 716 may initially determine whether the storage manager 308 A has entered a failover state. If the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308 A is in a failover state, then the failover application 716 may then determine which of the offline storage managers 310 B- 310 C to bring online (e.g., enter an active state) and replace the current storage manager 308 A.
  • the failover application 716 may periodically analyze and/or monitor the node statuses 720 .
  • the node statuses 720 may be obtained by the session handler 714 , and the one or more periodic threads 718 may communicate one or more session messages to one or more of the designated monitoring nodes that include the node statuses 720 .
  • the one or more periodic threads 718 may be similar to the one or more periodic threads 518 instantiated by the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 .
  • the node statuses 720 may include up-to-date information as to the status of the active storage manager 308 A (e.g., based on whether the session handler 714 received an acknowledgement message from the active storage manager 710 A).
  • the failover application 716 may be configured to monitor and/or the analyze the node statuses 720 every ten minutes, every hour, every 24 hours, or at any other time period. An operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302 may also modify the time interval at which the failover application 716 checks the node statuses 720 , such as by increasing or decreasing the time interval.
  • the failover application 716 may then apply one or more failover rule(s) 724 to the other node statuses 720 to determine whether the active storage manager 308 A is, in fact, unavailable and/or unreachable.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may not be responsive to the status inquiry messages of the failover node 310 A.
  • the active storage manager 308 A may be delayed in responding to the failover node 310 A. Accordingly, the statuses of the node statuses 720 may indicate whether other monitoring nodes are able to reach the active storage manager 308 A.
  • the failover rules 724 may specify and/or define when the active storage manager 308 A is unavailable and/or unreachable by other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 .
  • one failover rule 724 may specify that the failover application 716 should first determine whether the network and/or subnet on which the active storage manager 308 A is located is reachable by other monitoring nodes outside of the network and/or subnet. To perform this determination, the failover application 716 may analyze the responses of monitoring nodes within the same cluster and/or subnet as the active storage manager 308 A relative to the status inquiry messages of monitoring nodes outside of the cluster and/or subnet of the active monitoring node 308 A.
  • the failover application 716 may analyze the responses of monitoring nodes within the first subnet 306 A to status inquiry messages of monitoring nodes within the second subnet 306 B and/or within the third subnet 306 C. If a threshold number of the node statuses indicate that the monitoring nodes within the first subnet 3006 A were unavailable and/or unreachable (e.g., more than 50% of the monitoring nodes), the first rule may specify that failover application 716 should determine that the subnet and/or cluster in which the active storage manager 308 A is located is unreachable and/or unavailable.
  • one or more of the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that a subnet and/or cluster is network accessible when at least one monitoring node within the subnet and/or cluster responds to a status inquiry message. Accordingly, in this example, the failover application 716 may determine that the first subnet 306 A is network accessible when at least one monitoring node of the first subnet 306 A responds to a status inquiry message sent by one of the monitoring nodes within the second subnet 306 B and/or within the third subnet 306 C.
  • the failover rule(s) 724 may specify and/or define that the failover application 716 is to first attempt to contact the active storage manager 308 A a predetermined number of times. Each time the failover application 716 sends a status inquiry message to the active storage manager 308 A, the failover application 716 increases a counter (e.g., an attempt counter) that records the number of times the failover application 716 has tried to contact the active storage manager 308 A. When the failover application 716 receives a response from the active storage manager 308 A (e.g., receives an acknowledgement message), the attempt counter is reset (e.g., returned to a zero value).
  • a counter e.g., an attempt counter
  • the failover application 716 may determine that the active storage manager 308 A is unreachable and/or non-responsive. The failover application 716 may attempt to contact the active storage manager 308 A any number of times, such as two, three, four, five, or any other number of times.
  • the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that the periodic thread(s) 718 should attempt to contact the active storage manager 308 A and then store any responses (e.g., an acknowledgment message) as part of the node statuses 720 , and the failover application 716 may be configured to check the node statuses 720 to determine whether a response was received from the active storage manager 308 A in reply to the status inquiry message sent by the one or more periodic thread(s) 718 .
  • the failover rule(s) 724 may further specify that the failover application 716 is to check the node statuses 720 after waiting for a predetermined period of time, and to perform this check a predetermined number of times.
  • the failover application 716 may be configured to check the node statuses 720 every 10 minutes to determine whether the active storage manager 308 A is reachable and/or unavailable, and to perform this check three times. After the third time of determining that the node statuses 720 indicate that the active storage manager 308 A is unreachable and/or unavailable, the failover application 716 may then proceed to enter a failover state and/or execute one or more of the other failover rule(s) 724 .
  • Determining that the active storage manager 308 A is unavailable and/or unreachable by the failover node 310 A may be a first step in entering a failover state as there may be any number of reasons why the active storage manager 308 A is not responsive to the failover node 310 A. Unnecessarily entering a failover state may lead to loss of data, excessive downtimes, loss of communications, or any other undesirable effects, so ensuring that the active storage manager 308 A is, in fact, unavailable and/or unreachable may be a preferable course of action in implementing the failover rule(s) 724 .
  • the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that the failover node 310 A is to determine whether the active storage manager 308 A is network accessible by other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 . Accordingly, one or more of the failover rule(s) 724 may specify whether the active storage manager 308 A is network accessible and/or network inaccessible. For example, if a threshold number of monitoring nodes (including other storage managers and/or failover nodes) are unable to access and/or reach the active storage manager 308 A, the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that the active storage manager 308 A is inaccessible and/or unreachable.
  • the failover application 716 may perform this determination by referencing one or more of the node statuses 720 and determine whether the node statuses 720 indicate whether monitoring nodes outside of the subnet and/or cluster of the active storage manager 308 A (e.g., monitoring nodes outside of the subnet and/or cluster 306 A) have received an acknowledgment message from the active storage manager 308 A in response to their own status inquiry messages.
  • that monitoring node may communicate a data structure that includes node status information about other nodes to which the given monitoring node sent a status inquiry message.
  • each monitoring node Since each monitoring node is communicating this data structure to each other monitoring node, each monitoring node includes a set of node statuses 720 for monitoring nodes that have been communicating with each other. Therefore, by analyzing responses in the node statuses 720 between monitoring nodes that are outside the subnet 306 A and monitoring nodes that are inside the subnet 306 A, the failover application 716 determines whether the active storage manager 308 A is network accessible.
  • the one or more failover rule(s) 724 may further specify that the failover application 716 is to obtain consensus from the other failover nodes in the information management system 302 that the active storage manager 308 A is not network accessible. Accordingly, the failover application 716 may send a message or instruction to the other failover nodes 310 B- 310 C that the other failover nodes 310 B- 310 C are to determine whether the active storage manager 308 A is network accessible. The other failover nodes 310 B- 310 C may then perform one or more of the operations previously discussed in determining whether the active storage manager 308 A is network accessible.
  • the other failover nodes 310 B- 310 C may communicate their results to the failover node 310 A. Where a consensus, majority, or other predetermined amount of failover nodes, confirm that the active storage manager is not network accessible, the failover application 716 may then determine that the active storage manager 308 A is not network accessible. Where a consensus, majority, or other predetermined amount of failover nodes, confirm that the active storage manager is network accessible, the failover application 716 may then determine that the active storage manager 308 A is network accessible, and may halt the failover of the active storage manager.
  • failover rule(s) 726 may specify that the failover application 716 is to enter a failover state.
  • the failover application 716 may determine which of the offline storage managers (e.g., offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C) are to replace the active storage manager 308 A and to become the new, active storage manager. In performing this determination, the failover application 716 may reference and/or analyze one or more database sync statuses 722 .
  • the database sync statuses 722 include the status of database synchronizations between the active storage manager 308 A and other storage managers (e.g., offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C). Each time the active storage manager 308 A completes a synchronization with another storage manager, the active storage manager 308 A may send a message to the failover node 310 A that updates the database sync status 722 with updated synchronization information.
  • other storage managers e.g., offline storage managers 308 B- 308 C.
  • the synchronization information may include, but is not limited to, the source storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308 A), the destination storage manager (e.g., an offline storage manager 308 B- 308 C), the database involved in the synchronization, the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization completed, the amount of elapsed time in performing the synchronization, the date on which the synchronization started and/or ended, and other such database synchronization information and/or various combinations thereof. Additionally, and/or alternatively, a target storage manager may send a message to the failover node 310 A that informs the failover node 310 A of the database synchronization and updates the database sync statuses 722 .
  • the source storage manager e.g., the active storage manager 308 A
  • the destination storage manager e.g., an offline storage manager 308 B- 308 C
  • the database involved in the synchronization the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization
  • each storage manager may send a database synchronization message to their corresponding failover node (e.g., the offline storage manager 308 B sends a database synchronization message to its failover node 310 B and the offline storage manager 308 C sends a database synchronization message to its failover node 310 C).
  • the failover node 310 A associated with the non-responsive, active storage manager 308 A determines which offline storage manager was most recently updated. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the failover node 310 A selects a storage manager with the most recent database sync status 722 to be the new active storage manager. The failover node 310 A may select the storage manager with the most recent database sync status 722 to be the new active storage manager because it is likely that this storage manager has a most up-to-date copy of the databases managed by the previous, non-responsive storage manager 308 A.
  • the failover application 310 A may select the storage manager that is listed first in the database sync statuses 722 .
  • the failover application 716 may randomly select a storage manager to be the new, active storage manager.
  • the active storage manager 308 B may send a message to managed devices (e.g., devices in the various subnets 306 A- 306 C) that the devices are to receive and/or follow instructions from the active storage manager 308 B.
  • managed devices e.g., devices in the various subnets 306 A- 306 C
  • the storage manager 308 B then performs the operations previously performed by the now-offline storage manager 308 A, and the failover node 3108 associated with the active storage manager 308 B begins performing the operations previously performed by the failover node 310 A. In this way, storage manager 308 B becomes the new, active storage manager for the information management system 302 where the failover node 310 A determines that the storage manager 308 A has entered a failover state.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a messaging diagram 802 for updating monitoring node statuses of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3 A , in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • the messaging diagram 802 is discussed with reference to the active storage manager 308 A, but the messaging diagram 802 may be implemented by other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 , such as the monitoring nodes 402 - 406 highlighted in FIG. 4 .
  • the session handler 614 receives various messages from the other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 . These messages include, but are not limited to, status inquiry messages, database synchronization messages, acknowledgment messages, session messages, and any other message previously described.
  • the session handler 614 may update one or more node statuses (e.g., the node statuses 622 illustrated in FIG. 6 ), and may propagate the node statuses to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 via one or more periodic threads 618 .
  • the one or more periodic threads 618 may send the session messages to other monitoring nodes, where the one or more periodic threads may be configured to repeatedly send the session messages at predetermined time intervals.
  • FIG. 8 further illustrates that a failover process may be initiated by one or more of the failover nodes 310 A- 310 C of the information management system 302 .
  • the failover process may first include determining whether the active storage manager is available and/or reachable. Where the active storage manager is not available and/or reachable, the failover process may further include determining whether the active storage manager is network accessible. Where the active storage manager is not network accessible, a designated failover node (e.g., the failover node associated with the active storage manager) may then determine that the active storage manager is in a failover state, and the designated failover node may then perform a failover of the active storage manager.
  • a designated failover node e.g., the failover node associated with the active storage manager
  • performing the failover may include determining which of the offline storage managers has been most recently synchronized with the previous active storage manager, and then assigning the determined offline storage manager as the new, active storage manager. Additional details regarding the failover process are discussed with reference to FIGS. 9 A- 9 B and FIGS. 10 A- 10 B .
  • FIGS. 9 A- 9 B illustrate a method 902 , in accordance with an example embodiment, for updating node statuses within the information management system 302 of FIG. 3 A and determining whether to enter a failover state of an active storage manager 308 A.
  • the method 902 may be implemented by one or more of the devices illustrated in FIGS. 3 A- 3 B , and is discussed by way of reference thereto.
  • each of the monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 may perform the method 902 (labeled as Operation 904 ).
  • the various branches off of Operation 904 may each be performed simultaneously and/or in parallel.
  • a first operation may include generating a session message by one or more of the periodic threads, where the session message may include one or more node statuses (Operation 906 ).
  • the session message may include zero or NULL values for some of the node statuses, as not every monitoring node will have a corresponding node status when the session messages are first communicated.
  • the node statuses may include non-zero or non-NULL values for the node statuses.
  • the session message is then communicated to one or more of the monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 (Operation 908 ).
  • the session handler may then monitor for one or more acknowledgement messages to the session message (Operation 910 ).
  • the session handler may monitor for the one or more acknowledgment messages for a predetermined period of time (e.g., a timeout value).
  • An acknowledgment from a monitoring node to the session message may indicate that the monitoring node to which the session message was sent is reachable and/or accessible. Accordingly, where an acknowledgement message is received (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 910 ), the session handler may update the node status corresponding to the monitoring node that communicated the acknowledgment as being reachable and/or accessible (Operation 914 ).
  • the session handler may update the node statuses to indicate that the monitoring node that did not send the acknowledgment message is not available and/or not accessible (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 912 ).
  • the method 902 then returns to Operation 904 where the session handler iteratively performs Operations 906 - 914 .
  • the monitoring node may periodically communicate status inquiry messages to inquire as to the status of other monitoring nodes, where an acknowledgement to the status inquiry message is used to update the corresponding node status.
  • the monitoring node may also perform Operations 916 - 930 .
  • the monitoring node determines whether it is a failover node (Operation 916 ). Where the monitoring node is not a failover node (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 916 ), the method 902 returns back to Operation 904 .
  • the method 902 may proceed to Operation 918 , where the given monitoring node determines whether the active storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308 A) is accessible and/or reachable (e.g., determining whether the active storage manager 308 A responds to status inquiry messages).
  • the monitoring node may be configured to skip Operation 916 where the monitoring node is a failover node and, thus, does not need to perform the determination of whether it is a failover node.
  • Operations 916 - 930 may not be performed where the monitoring node is a device or component other than a failover node (e.g., a client computing device, a secondary storage computing device, and so forth).
  • the failover node may perform Operation 918 periodically at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 10 minutes, every 30 minutes, every hour, etc.), and the predetermined time intervals may be configured by an administrator and/or operator of the information management system 302 .
  • predetermined time intervals e.g., every 10 minutes, every 30 minutes, every hour, etc.
  • determining whether the active storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308 A), is accessible and/or reachable may include sending a status inquiry message to the active storage manager via the session handler 714 . Should the failover node not receive an acknowledgement message from the active storage manager (e.g., on and/or after a predetermined time period elapses), the failover node may determine that the active storage manager is not reachable and/or accessible. In another embodiment, determining whether the active storage manager is accessible and/or reachable may include referencing the node statuses 720 and determining whether the node status corresponding to the active storage manager 308 A indicates that the active storage manager 308 A is accessible and/or reachable.
  • the method 902 may proceed to the “END” label, but one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that Operations 916 - 918 may be repeated by the failover node at predetermined time intervals. Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is not reachable and/or accessible (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 918 ), the method 902 may proceed to Operation 920 on FIG. 9 B .
  • the failover node determines whether a predetermined retry threshold has been reached in attempting to contact the active storage manager (Operation 920 ).
  • the failover node may be configured to attempt to contact the active storage manager three times where, after the third attempt, the failover node proceeds to Operation 922 .
  • a retry threshold may be established for the failover node because, in some instances, the active storage manager may be delayed in responding or may be performing processes that detract from its ability to effectively respond to status inquiry messages.
  • the failover part of the method 902 effectively ends, but the failover node may be configured to return to Operation 916 and/or Operation 918 on FIG. 9 A .
  • the method 902 proceeds to Operation 922 .
  • the failover node determines whether the active storage manager is network accessible. As explained previously, the failover node may determined whether the active storage manager is network accessible by analyzing the node statuses and applying one or more failover rule(s) using the node statuses. The application of the one or more failover rule(s) may result in the failover node determining whether the active storage manager is or is not available. Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is not network accessible (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 922 ), the failover part of the method 902 effectively ends, but the failover node may be configured to return to Operation 916 and/or Operation 918 on FIG. 9 A . Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is network accessible (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 922 ), the method 902 proceeds to Operation 924 .
  • the failover node determines that the active storage manager is network accessible (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 9
  • the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers should be used for failover (Operation 924 ).
  • the active storage manager may be synchronizing one or more of its databases with the offline storage managers, and then updating a database sync status (e.g., the database sync status 722 ) managed by the failover node.
  • the database sync status may include various synchronization information such as the source storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308 A), the destination storage manager (e.g., an offline storage manager 308 B- 308 C), the database involved in the synchronization, the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization completed, the amount of elapsed time in performing the synchronization, the date on which the synchronization started and/or ended, and other such database synchronization information and/or various combinations thereof.
  • the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers was most recently synchronized with the active storage manager.
  • the failover node may then determine whether the selected offline storage manager should be used for the failover of the active storage manager (Operation 926 ). In one embodiment, the failover node may perform this determination by communicating a status inquiry message to the offline storage manager to confirm that the offline storage manager is network accessible. Additionally, and/or alternatively, the failover node may reference the node statuses (e.g., the node statuses 720 ) to determine the last known node status of the selected offline storage manager. Should the node status indicate that the offline storage manager is not reachable and/or not accessible, then the failover node may determine that the selected storage manager should not be used for failover (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 926 ).
  • the failover node may determine that the selected storage manager should not be used for failover (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 926 ).
  • the method 902 may return to Operation 924 , where the failover node then selects a different, offline storage manager for failover.
  • the failover node may instruct the offline storage manager to activate (Operation 928 ).
  • the selected, offline storage manager activates and becomes the new, active storage manager.
  • the new, active storage manager may inform the other nodes in the information management system 302 that the other nodes should accept directions and/or instructions from the new, active storage manager (Operation 930 ).
  • the new, active storage manager then assumes the duties and responsibilities of the previous, active storage manager.
  • the method 902 implements a failover process that occurs automatically, ensures minimal downtime of a storage manager, and reduces the potential for data loss within the information management system 302 .
  • FIGS. 10 A- 10 B illustrate a method 1002 , in accordance with an example embodiment, for activating a failover node of the information management system 302 illustrated in FIG. 3 A .
  • the method 1002 may be implemented by one or more of the devices illustrated in FIGS. 3 A- 7 and is discussed by way of reference thereto.
  • one or more of the operations discussed with reference to FIGS. 10 A- 10 B may also be implemented additionally and/or alternatively to one or more of the operations of the method 902 discussed with reference to FIGS. 9 A- 9 B .
  • a failover node may instantiate a failover application (e.g., failover application 716 ) for performing a failover of an active storage manager within the information management system 302 (Operation 1004 ).
  • a failover application e.g., failover application 716
  • the failover application 716 may be configured to determine whether the active storage manager has entered a failover state and, if so, to perform a failover of the active storage manager.
  • the failover node may receive one or more session messages from other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 (Operation 1006 ).
  • the one or more session messages may include node status information for one or more of the nodes within the information management system 302 .
  • the session handler 714 may update one or more node statuses 720 based on the node status information contained within the session message (Operation 1008 ).
  • the node status information may indicate whether the active storage manager is responsive to the failover node and/or to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 .
  • the failover application 716 may then apply one or more of the failover rule(s) 724 to the node statuses 720 (Operation 1010 ).
  • the failover application 716 determines whether there is a failover condition based on result of applying the one or more failover rule(s) 724 (Operation 1012 ). In determining whether a failover condition exists, the failover application 716 may determine whether the active storage manager (e.g., active storage manager 308 A) is reachable and/or accessible and, if not, whether the active storage manager is network reachable and/or accessible. Furthermore, the failover application 716 may request that other failover nodes in the information management system 302 determine whether the actives storage manager is network accessible and/or reachable.
  • the active storage manager e.g., active storage manager 308 A
  • the failover application 716 may request that other failover nodes in the information management system 302 determine whether the actives storage manager is network accessible and/or reachable.
  • the failover application 716 determines whether the active storage manager 308 A has entered a failover state. Where the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308 A has not entered a failover state (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 1012 ), the method 1002 may return to Operation 1006 ). Alternatively, where the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308 A has entered a failover state (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 1012 ), the method 1002 then proceeds to Operation 1014 .
  • the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308 A has entered a failover state.
  • the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers should be used for failover (Operation 1014 ).
  • the active storage manager may be synchronizing one or more of its databases with the offline storage managers, and then updating a database sync status (e.g., the database sync status 722 ) managed by the failover node.
  • the database sync status may include various synchronization information such as the source storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308 A), the destination storage manager (e.g., an offline storage manager 308 B- 308 C), the database involved in the synchronization, the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization completed, the amount of elapsed time in performing the synchronization, the date on which the synchronization started and/or ended, and other such database synchronization information and/or various combinations thereof.
  • the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers was most recently synchronized with the active storage manager. The failover node then selects the offline storage manager that has been most recently synchronized with the active storage manager to be the new, active storage manager (Operation 1016 ).
  • the selected, offline storage manager activates and becomes the new, active storage manager.
  • the new, active storage manager may inform the other nodes in the information management system 302 that the other nodes should accept directions and/or instructions from the new, active storage manager (Operation 1020 ).
  • the new, active storage manager then assumes the duties and responsibilities of the previous, active storage manager.
  • the method 1002 implements a failover process that occurs automatically, ensures minimal downtime of a storage manager, and reduces the potential for data loss within the information management system 302 .
  • the foregoing description provides an information management system that implements an automatic failover of a storage manager and leverages distributed computing techniques to determine whether the storage manager has actually failed and, if so, which potential offline storage manager should assume the duties of the failed storage manager.
  • a designated failover node can determine whether an active storage manager has entered a failover state and is non-responsive to any monitoring node, or whether the active storage manager is simply non-responsive to a particular monitoring node or failover node.
  • the systems, methods, techniques, and operations disclosed herein provide a technological advancement in the field of data backup and recovery operations. These techniques ensure that potential downtime of a computing system is minimized and that a potential failed state of an active storage manager is an actual failed state, and not merely a false positive.
  • this disclosure provides a method for determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the method comprising assigning selected nodes of a plurality of nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes to obtain a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node.
  • the method also includes receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, and generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages.
  • the method further includes transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes and determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message.
  • the method additionally includes activating a failover node selected from the plurality of failover nodes to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred, and instructing, by the activated second storage manager, that the plurality of monitoring nodes is to communicate with the activated second storage manager instead of the first storage manager, wherein the activated second storage manager performs the functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
  • the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to process the received plurality of status messages, and update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
  • the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
  • the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
  • each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and the method further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is the most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to the other corresponding databases.
  • the method further comprises verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
  • the method includes sending a configuration file to each selected node of the plurality of nodes that have been selected to be monitoring nodes, and automatically configuring each of the selected nodes to be a monitoring node based on the sent configuration file.
  • This disclosure also describes a system that determines whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the system comprising one or more non-transitory, computer-readable mediums having computer-executable instructions stored thereon, and one or more processors that, having executed the computer-executable instructions, configure the system to perform a plurality of operations.
  • the plurality of operations includes assigning selected nodes of a plurality of nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes to obtain a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node.
  • the plurality of operations also includes receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
  • the plurality of operations further includes generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages.
  • the plurality of operations additionally includes transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes, and determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message.
  • the plurality of operations also includes activating a failover node selected from the plurality of failover nodes to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred, and instructing, by the activated second storage manager, that the plurality of monitoring nodes is to communicate with the activated second storage manager instead of the first storage manager, wherein the activated second storage manager performs the functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
  • the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to process the received plurality of status messages, and update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
  • the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
  • the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
  • each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and the plurality of operations further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is the most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to the other corresponding databases.
  • the plurality of operations further comprises verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
  • the plurality of operations further comprises sending a configuration file to each selected node of the plurality of nodes that have been selected to be monitoring nodes, and automatically configuring each of the selected nodes to be a monitoring node based on the sent configuration file.
  • This disclosure further describes a non-transitory, computer-readable medium having computer-executable instructions stored thereon that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to perform a plurality of operations determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the plurality of operations comprising assigning selected nodes of a plurality of nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes to obtain a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node.
  • the plurality of operations further includes receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, and generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages.
  • the plurality of operations also includes transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes, and determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message.
  • the plurality of operations additionally includes activating a failover node selected from the plurality of failover nodes to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred, and instructing, by the activated second storage manager, that the plurality of monitoring nodes is to communicate with the activated second storage manager instead of the first storage manager, wherein the activated second storage manager performs the functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
  • the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to process the received plurality of status messages, and update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
  • the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
  • the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
  • each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and the plurality of operations further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is the most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to the other corresponding databases.
  • the plurality of operations further comprises verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
  • This disclosure also provides for a method for determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the method comprising receiving, by a first failover node, a session message comprising status information for a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein each monitoring node is configured to transmit status information to each other monitoring node, wherein the first failover node is a backup node for a storage manager that manages information storage policies for the information management system.
  • the method may also include determining, by the first failover node, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the received session message.
  • the method may further include verifying, by the first failover node, that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that a second failover node confirm that the failover condition has occurred based on the received session message and activating the first failover node based on verification that the failover condition has occurred.
  • the method may also include instructing, by the first failover node, each monitoring node of the plurality of monitoring nodes to communicate with the first failover node instead of the storage manager, wherein the first failover node performs the functionalities of the storage manager in the information management system.
  • This disclosure also provides for a system that determines whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the system comprising one or more non-transitory, computer-readable mediums having computer-executable instructions stored thereon, and one or more processors that, having executed the computer-executable instructions, configure the system to perform a plurality of operations that include receiving, by a first failover node, a session message comprising status information for a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein each monitoring node is configured to transmit status information to each other monitoring node, wherein the first failover node is a backup node for a storage manager that manages information storage policies for the information management system.
  • the plurality of operations may also include determining, by the first failover node, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the received session message.
  • the plurality of operations may further include verifying, by the first failover node, that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that a second failover node confirm that the failover condition has occurred based on the received session message and activating the first failover node based on verification that the failover condition has occurred.
  • the plurality of operations may also include instructing, by the first failover node, each monitoring node of the plurality of monitoring nodes to communicate with the first failover node instead of the storage manager, wherein the first failover node performs the functionalities of the storage manager in the information management system.
  • Conditional language such as, among others, “can,” “could,” “might,” or “may,” unless specifically stated otherwise, or otherwise understood within the context as used, is generally intended to convey that certain embodiments include, while other embodiments do not include, certain features, elements and/or steps. Thus, such conditional language is not generally intended to imply that features, elements and/or steps are in any way required for one or more embodiments or that one or more embodiments necessarily include logic for deciding, with or without user input or prompting, whether these features, elements and/or steps are included or are to be performed in any particular embodiment.
  • the words “comprise,” “comprising,” and the like are to be construed in an inclusive sense, as opposed to an exclusive or exhaustive sense, i.e., in the sense of “including, but not limited to.”
  • the terms “connected,” “coupled,” or any variant thereof means any connection or coupling, either direct or indirect, between two or more elements; the coupling or connection between the elements can be physical, logical, or a combination thereof.
  • the words “herein,” “above,” “below,” and words of similar import when used in this application, refer to this application as a whole and not to any particular portions of this application.
  • words using the singular or plural number may also include the plural or singular number respectively.
  • the word “or” in reference to a list of two or more items covers all of the following interpretations of the word: any one of the items in the list, all of the items in the list, and any combination of the items in the list.
  • the term “and/or” in reference to a list of two or more items covers all of the following interpretations of the word: any one of the items in the list, all of the items in the list, and any combination of the items in the list.
  • certain operations, acts, events, or functions of any of the algorithms described herein can be performed in a different sequence, can be added, merged, or left out altogether (e.g., not all are necessary for the practice of the algorithms).
  • operations, acts, functions, or events can be performed concurrently, e.g., through multi-threaded processing, interrupt processing, or multiple processors or processor cores or on other parallel architectures, rather than sequentially.
  • Systems and modules described herein may comprise software, firmware, hardware, or any combination(s) of software, firmware, or hardware suitable for the purposes described.
  • Software and other modules may reside and execute on servers, workstations, personal computers, computerized tablets, PDAs, and other computing devices suitable for the purposes described herein.
  • Software and other modules may be accessible via local computer memory, via a network, via a browser, or via other means suitable for the purposes described herein.
  • Data structures described herein may comprise computer files, variables, programming arrays, programming structures, or any electronic information storage schemes or methods, or any combinations thereof, suitable for the purposes described herein.
  • User interface elements described herein may comprise elements from graphical user interfaces, interactive voice response, command line interfaces, and other suitable interfaces.
  • processing of the various components of the illustrated systems can be distributed across multiple machines, networks, and other computing resources. Two or more components of a system can be combined into fewer components.
  • Various components of the illustrated systems can be implemented in one or more virtual machines, rather than in dedicated computer hardware systems and/or computing devices.
  • the data repositories shown can represent physical and/or logical data storage, including, e.g., storage area networks or other distributed storage systems.
  • the connections between the components shown represent possible paths of data flow, rather than actual connections between hardware. While some examples of possible connections are shown, any of the subset of the components shown can communicate with any other subset of components in various implementations.
  • Embodiments are also described above with reference to flow chart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems) and computer program products.
  • Each block of the flow chart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of blocks in the flow chart illustrations and/or block diagrams may be implemented by computer program instructions.
  • Such instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, specially-equipped computer (e.g., comprising a high-performance database server, a graphics subsystem, etc.) or other programmable data processing apparatus to produce a machine, such that the instructions, which execute via the processor(s) of the computer or other programmable data processing apparatus, create means for implementing the acts specified in the flow chart and/or block diagram block or blocks.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including instruction means which implement the acts specified in the flow chart and/or block diagram block or blocks.
  • the computer program instructions may also be loaded to a computing device or other programmable data processing apparatus to cause operations to be performed on the computing device or other programmable apparatus to produce a computer implemented process such that the instructions which execute on the computing device or other programmable apparatus provide steps for implementing the acts specified in the flow chart and/or block diagram block or blocks.

Abstract

An information management system implements a method for determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in the system. Nodes in the system may be assigned as monitoring nodes configured to communicate with a storage manager. Furthermore, each monitoring node may be configured to transmit a status inquiry message to each other monitoring node, and each monitoring node may receive a status inquiry message from each other monitoring node. Each monitoring node may also generate a session message comprising status information, and a plurality of failover nodes may receive the generated session messages. A failover node may then determine whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message. Where the failover node determines that a failover condition has occurred, the failover node may activate an offline storage manager to replace the active storage manager.

Description

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE TO ANY PRIORITY APPLICATIONS
Any and all applications, if any, for which a foreign or domestic priority claim is identified in the Application Data Sheet of the present application are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties under 37 CFR 1.57.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
A portion of the disclosure of this patent document contains material which is subject to copyright protection. The copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document and/or the patent disclosure as it appears in the United States Patent and Trademark Office patent file and/or records, but otherwise reserves all copyrights whatsoever.
BACKGROUND
Businesses recognize the commercial value of their data and seek reliable, cost-effective ways to protect the information stored on their computer networks while minimizing impact on productivity. A company might back up critical computing systems such as databases, file servers, web servers, virtual machines, and so on as part of a daily, weekly, or monthly maintenance schedule. The company may similarly protect computing systems used by its employees, such as those used by an accounting department, marketing department, engineering department, and so forth. Given the rapidly expanding volume of data under management, companies also continue to seek innovative techniques for managing data growth, for example by migrating data to lower-cost storage over time, reducing redundant data, pruning lower priority data, etc. Enterprises also increasingly view their stored data as a valuable asset and look for solutions that leverage their data. For instance, data analysis capabilities, information management, improved data presentation and access features, and the like, are in increasing demand.
In preserving primary data, the company may employ a storage manager that manages information stored as primary data by one or more client computing devices. Each of the client computing devices may back up the primary data to one or more secondary computer devices. The company may use one or more networks, where each network includes one or more client computing devices, and the client computing devices, storage manager, and secondary storage computing devices communicate using the one or more networks.
Because the storage manager is responsible for managing the primary data of the client computing devices, the storage manager may be backed up by a failover node, where the failover node takes on the jobs and responsibilities of the storage manager when the storage manager experiences a failure. The storage manager may experience a failure for a number reasons, such as a hardware failure, a power outage, corrupted data, or any other number of reasons. However, there may be instances where the storage manager appears to have failed, but has not actually done so. In these instances, reverting to the failover node may be premature, and instantiating the failover node may introduce delays in the operational status of the client computing devices and/or the secondary storage computing devices that rely on the storage manager.
SUMMARY
To address these and other deficiencies, this disclosure describes an information management system that uses distributed computing techniques to determine whether a storage manager has experienced an actual failure and, if so, whether another storage manager should be brought online to replace the failed storage manager. In one embodiment, the information management system includes one or more networks of various devices and components, such as one or more client computing devices, storage managers, and failover nodes. Each storage manager may be associated with a failover node, where the failover node is configured to determine whether the associated storage manager has failed and, if so, to designate another storage manager as the operational storage manager.
As there may be multiple storage managers in communication with the various client computing devices, a storage manager selected from the multiple storage managers may be designated as the “active” storage manager. In this regard, the active storage manager is the storage manager that is online, communicating with the various devices across the one or more networks, such as the one or more client computing devices, secondary storage computing devices, failover nodes, and offline storage managers (e.g., a storage manager that is not currently active but is able to receive and/or send communications across one or more networks), and is managing the primary data and/or secondary data of the information management system.
To ensure redundancy and operational continuation, the active storage manager may be backed up to, and/or synchronized with, other storage managers. In this regard, the active storage manager may backup and/or synchronize to other offline storage managers and/or failover nodes in communication with the active storage manager. The backup of the active storage manager may occur on a repeated, periodic basis, such as every hour, every day, every other day, etc. The active storage manager may backup or synchronize its data to a second, designated storage manager, to one or more of the offline storage managers, to one or more of the failover nodes, or to all of the storage managers (failover or non-failover) in communication with the active storage manager.
In the event of a storage manager failure, a determination is made as to which storage manager should become the active storage manager. In one embodiment, a failover node in communication with the previously, active storage manager performs this determination. The failover node may perform this determination by checking which of the other storage managers has a most recent backup or synchronization of a previously, active storage manager relative to the other storage managers that were being used for backup and/or synchronization. The failover node may select a previously offline storage manager to be the new, active storage manager where the previously offline storage manager has a most recent backup of the previous active storage manager. Once online, the new, active storage manager (e.g., the second active storage manager) may then communicate with the one or more client computing devices, the one or more secondary storage devices, and so forth, and inform each of these devices that the second active storage manager is the active storage manager, and that these devices should accept instructions from the second active storage manager.
In determining whether the active storage manager has failed, various devices within the information management system may be designated and/or assigned as a monitoring node. In one embodiment, a monitoring node may be a device, such as a client computing device, storage manager, secondary storage computing device, that is configured to communicate a status message to another monitoring node. In this regard, each monitoring node may be configured to communicate with each other monitoring node. The monitoring nodes may be configured to communicate a status message to each other monitoring node to determine whether the other monitoring node is reachable. The transmitting monitoring node may be considered a source monitoring node, while the monitoring nodes to whom the status messages are sent may be considered destination monitoring nodes. The source monitoring node may wait a predetermined time period after each status message is sent to receive an acknowledgment message from a corresponding destination monitoring node. The source monitoring node aggregates the responses from the destination monitoring nodes into a session message that the source monitoring node may then send to the failover node. The session message may also include an identifier or flag to indicate whether an acknowledgment message was not received for a particular monitoring node (e.g., the particular monitoring node was unresponsive).
The failover node then collects the session messages from each of the monitoring nodes. The failover node may maintain a data structure that lists and/or updates the status of each of the monitoring nodes based on the collected session messages. For example, the data structure may be a two-dimensional table, and the intersections within the table store a value that indicates whether a source monitoring node received an acknowledgment from a destination monitoring node. The failover node may then communicate this data structure as one or more session messages to each of the monitoring nodes, such that each monitoring node is provided with a copy of the data structure.
The failover node may reference the node status data structure in determining whether the active failover node has actually failed. For example, the failover node may periodically send a status message to the active storage manager to ensure that the active storage manager is online. In this example, the failover node may fail to receive an acknowledgement message from the active storage manager within a predetermined time period. This failure may signal to the failover node that the active storage manager has failed. To confirm whether the active storage manager has failed, the failover node may reference the node status data structure to determine whether other monitoring nodes have received acknowledgement messages from the active storage manager. The failover node may be further configured with one or more failover rules that define or specify the circumstances under which the failover node may confirm that the active storage manager has failed. The failover node may execute the rules using the node status values from the node status data structure to determine and/or confirm whether the storage manager has actually failed. Where the storage manager has actually failed, the failover node may enter a failover state, where the failover node then determines which of the storage managers then becomes the active storage manager. The failover node may select the new, active storage manager from the other storage managers based on one or more factors including, but not limited to, geographical proximity to the failed storage manager, synchronization or backup time, a numerical or priority identifier, or any other factor and/or combination thereof.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary information management system.
FIG. 1B is a detailed view of a primary storage device, a secondary storage device, and some examples of primary data and secondary copy data.
FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary information management system including a storage manager, one or more data agents, and one or more media agents.
FIG. 1D is a block diagram illustrating a scalable information management system.
FIG. 1E illustrates certain secondary copy operations according to an exemplary storage policy.
FIG. 1F-1H are block diagrams illustrating suitable data structures that may be employed by the information management system.
FIG. 2A illustrates a system and technique for synchronizing primary data to a destination such as a failover site using secondary copy data.
FIG. 2B illustrates an information management system architecture incorporating use of a network file system (NFS) protocol for communicating between the primary and secondary storage subsystems.
FIG. 2C is a block diagram of an example of a highly scalable managed data pool architecture.
FIG. 3A illustrates an information management system configured to perform automatic failover of a storage manager, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIG. 3B illustrates the information management system of FIG. 3A, where one or more devices have been designated as monitoring nodes, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIG. 4 illustrates communication pathways of a selected group of monitoring nodes illustrated in FIG. 3B, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIG. 5 illustrates a client computing device of the information management system of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIG. 6 illustrates a storage manager of the information management system of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIG. 7 illustrates a failover node of the information management system of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIG. 8 illustrates a messaging diagram for updating monitoring node statuses of the information management system of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment.
FIGS. 9A-9B illustrate a method, in accordance with an example embodiment, for updating node statuses within the information management system of FIG. 3A and determining whether to enter a failover state of an active storage manager.
FIGS. 10A-10B illustrate a method, in accordance with an example embodiment, for activating a failover node of the information management system illustrated in FIG. 3A.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Detailed descriptions and examples of systems and methods according to one or more illustrative embodiments may be found in the section titled “Automatic Failover of a Storage Manager,” as well as in the section titled Example Embodiments, and also in FIGS. 3A-10B herein. Furthermore, components and functionality for the disclosed recovery manager may be configured and/or incorporated into information management systems such as those described herein in FIGS. 1A-1H and 2A-2C.
Various embodiments described herein are intimately tied to, enabled by, and would not exist except for, computer technology. For example, the transference of backup jobs from the storage manager to the recovery manager described herein, in reference to various embodiments, cannot reasonably be performed by humans alone, without the computer technology upon which they are implemented.
Information Management System Overview
With the increasing importance of protecting and leveraging data, organizations simply cannot risk losing critical data. Moreover, runaway data growth and other modern realities make protecting and managing data increasingly difficult. There is therefore a need for efficient, powerful, and user-friendly solutions for protecting and managing data and for smart and efficient management of data storage. Depending on the size of the organization, there may be many data production sources which are under the purview of tens, hundreds, or even thousands of individuals. In the past, individuals were sometimes responsible for managing and protecting their own data, and a patchwork of hardware and software point solutions may have been used in any given organization. These solutions were often provided by different vendors and had limited or no interoperability. Certain embodiments described herein address these and other shortcomings of prior approaches by implementing scalable, unified, organization-wide information management, including data storage management.
FIG. 1A shows one such information management system 100 (or “system 100”), which generally includes combinations of hardware and software configured to protect and manage data and metadata that are generated and used by computing devices in system 100. System 100 may be referred to in some embodiments as a “storage management system” or a “data storage management system.” System 100 performs information management operations, some of which may be referred to as “storage operations” or “data storage operations,” to protect and manage the data residing in and/or managed by system 100. The organization that employs system 100 may be a corporation or other business entity, non-profit organization, educational institution, household, governmental agency, or the like.
Generally, the systems and associated components described herein may be compatible with and/or provide some or all of the functionality of the systems and corresponding components described in one or more of the following U.S. patents/publications and patent applications assigned to Commvault Systems, Inc., each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety herein:
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,035,880, entitled “Modular Backup and Retrieval System Used in Conjunction With a Storage Area Network”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,107,298, entitled “System And Method For Archiving Objects In An Information Store”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,246,207, entitled “System and Method for Dynamically Performing Storage Operations in a Computer Network”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,315,923, entitled “System And Method For Combining Data Streams In Pipelined Storage Operations In A Storage Network”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453, entitled “Hierarchical Systems and Methods for Providing a Unified View of Storage Information”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,395,282, entitled “Hierarchical Backup and Retrieval System”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,529,782, entitled “System and Methods for Performing a Snapshot and for Restoring Data”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,617,262, entitled “System and Methods for Monitoring Application Data in a Data Replication System”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,734,669, entitled “Managing Copies Of Data”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 7,747,579, entitled “Metabase for Facilitating Data Classification”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,156,086, entitled “Systems And Methods For Stored Data Verification”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,170,995, entitled “Method and System for Offline Indexing of Content and Classifying Stored Data”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,230,195, entitled “System And Method For Performing Auxiliary Storage Operations”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,285,681, entitled “Data Object Store and Server for a Cloud Storage Environment, Including Data Deduplication and Data Management Across Multiple Cloud Storage Sites”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,307,177, entitled “Systems And Methods For Management Of Virtualization Data”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,364,652, entitled “Content-Aligned, Block-Based Deduplication”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,578,120, entitled “Block-Level Single Instancing”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 8,954,446, entitled “Client-Side Repository in a Networked Deduplicated Storage System”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 9,020,900, entitled “Distributed Deduplicated Storage System”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 9,098,495, entitled “Application-Aware and Remote Single Instance Data Management”;
    • U.S. Pat. No. 9,239,687, entitled “Systems and Methods for Retaining and Using Data Block Signatures in Data Protection Operations”;
    • U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2006/0224846, entitled “System and Method to Support Single Instance Storage Operations” (now abandoned);
    • U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2014/0201170, entitled “High Availability Distributed Deduplicated Storage System”, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,633,033;
    • U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2016/0041880 A1, entitled “Efficient Application Recovery in an Information Management System Based on a Pseudo-Storage-Device Driver”, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,852,026;
    • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/721,971, entitled “Replication Using Deduplicated Secondary Copy Data” (applicant matter no. 100.422.US1.145; published as U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2016/0350391;
    • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/805,615, entitled “Browse and Restore for Block-Level Backups” (applicant matter no. 100.434.US1.120; now U.S. Pat. No. 9,766,825.
    • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/265,339 entitled “Live Synchronization and Management of Virtual Machines across Computing and Virtualization Platforms and Using Live Synchronization to Support Disaster Recovery”, to which U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/365,756 claims priority (now U.S. Pat. No. 10,228,962);
    • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/273,286 entitled “Redundant and Robust Distributed Deduplication Data Storage System”, to which U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/299,254 (now U.S. Pat. No. 10,310,953), Ser. No. 15/299,281 (published as U.S. Pat Pub. 2017-0192868), Ser. No. 15/299,291 (now U.S. Pat. No. 10,138,729), Ser. No. 15/299,298 (now U.S. Pat. No. 10,592,357), Ser. No. 15/299,299 (published as U.S. Pat. Pub. US 2017-0193003), and Ser. No. 15/299,280 (now U.S. Pat. No. 10,061,663) all claim priority;
    • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/294,920, entitled “Data Protection Operations Based on Network Path Information”, to which U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/283,033 claims priority (published as U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2017/0235647 (now abandoned));
    • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/297,057, entitled “Data Restoration Operations Based on Network Path Information”, to which U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/286,403 claims priority (published as U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2017/0242871); and
    • U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/387,384, entitled “Application-Level Live Synchronization Across Computing Platforms Including Synchronizing Co-Resident Applications To Disparate Standby Destinations And Selectively Synchronizing Some Applications And Not Others”, to which U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/369,676 claims priority (now U.S. Pat. No. 10,387,266).
System 100 includes computing devices and computing technologies. For instance, system 100 can include one or more client computing devices 102 and secondary storage computing devices 106, as well as storage manager 140 or a host computing device for it. Computing devices can include, without limitation, one or more: workstations, personal computers, desktop computers, or other types of generally fixed computing systems such as mainframe computers, servers, and minicomputers. Other computing devices can include mobile or portable computing devices, such as one or more laptops, tablet computers, personal data assistants, mobile phones (such as smartphones), and other mobile or portable computing devices such as embedded computers, set top boxes, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable computers, etc. Servers can include mail servers, file servers, database servers, virtual machine servers, and web servers. Any given computing device comprises one or more processors (e.g., CPU and/or single-core or multi-core processors), as well as corresponding non-transitory computer memory (e.g., random-access memory (RAM)) for storing computer programs which are to be executed by the one or more processors. Other computer memory for mass storage of data may be packaged/configured with the computing device (e.g., an internal hard disk) and/or may be external and accessible by the computing device (e.g., network-attached storage, a storage array, etc.). In some cases, a computing device includes cloud computing resources, which may be implemented as virtual machines. For instance, one or more virtual machines may be provided to the organization by a third-party cloud service vendor.
In some embodiments, computing devices can include one or more virtual machine(s) running on a physical host computing device (or “host machine”) operated by the organization. As one example, the organization may use one virtual machine as a database server and another virtual machine as a mail server, both virtual machines operating on the same host machine. A Virtual machine (“VM”) is a software implementation of a computer that does not physically exist and is instead instantiated in an operating system of a physical computer (or host machine) to enable applications to execute within the VM's environment, i.e., a VM emulates a physical computer. A VM includes an operating system and associated virtual resources, such as computer memory and processor(s). A hypervisor operates between the VM and the hardware of the physical host machine and is generally responsible for creating and running the VMs. Hypervisors are also known in the art as virtual machine monitors or a virtual machine managers or “VMMs”, and may be implemented in software, firmware, and/or specialized hardware installed on the host machine. Examples of hypervisors include ESX Server, by VMware, Inc. of Palo Alto, Calif.; Microsoft Virtual Server and Microsoft Windows Server Hyper-V, both by Microsoft Corporation of Redmond, Wash.; Sun xVM by Oracle America Inc. of Santa Clara, Calif.; and Xen by Citrix Systems, Santa Clara, Calif. The hypervisor provides resources to each virtual operating system such as a virtual processor, virtual memory, a virtual network device, and a virtual disk. Each virtual machine has one or more associated virtual disks. The hypervisor typically stores the data of virtual disks in files on the file system of the physical host machine, called virtual machine disk files (“VMDK” in VMware lingo) or virtual hard disk image files (in Microsoft lingo). For example, VMware's ESX Server provides the Virtual Machine File System (VMFS) for the storage of virtual machine disk files. A virtual machine reads data from and writes data to its virtual disk much the way that a physical machine reads data from and writes data to a physical disk. Examples of techniques for implementing information management in a cloud computing environment are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,285,681. Examples of techniques for implementing information management in a virtualized computing environment are described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,307,177.
Information management system 100 can also include electronic data storage devices, generally used for mass storage of data, including, e.g., primary storage devices 104 and secondary storage devices 108. Storage devices can generally be of any suitable type including, without limitation, disk drives, storage arrays (e.g., storage-area network (SAN) and/or network-attached storage (NAS) technology), semiconductor memory (e.g., solid state storage devices), network attached storage (NAS) devices, tape libraries, or other magnetic, non-tape storage devices, optical media storage devices, combinations of the same, etc. In some embodiments, storage devices form part of a distributed file system. In some cases, storage devices are provided in a cloud storage environment (e.g., a private cloud or one operated by a third-party vendor), whether for primary data or secondary copies or both.
Depending on context, the term “information management system” can refer to generally all of the illustrated hardware and software components in FIG. 1C, or the term may refer to only a subset of the illustrated components. For instance, in some cases, system 100 generally refers to a combination of specialized components used to protect, move, manage, manipulate, analyze, and/or process data and metadata generated by client computing devices 102. However, system 100 in some cases does not include the underlying components that generate and/or store primary data 112, such as the client computing devices 102 themselves, and the primary storage devices 104. Likewise secondary storage devices 108 (e.g., a third-party provided cloud storage environment) may not be part of system 100. As an example, “information management system” or “storage management system” may sometimes refer to one or more of the following components, which will be described in further detail below: storage manager, data agent, and media agent.
One or more client computing devices 102 may be part of system 100, each client computing device 102 having an operating system and at least one application 110 and one or more accompanying data agents executing thereon; and associated with one or more primary storage devices 104 storing primary data 112. Client computing device(s) 102 and primary storage devices 104 may generally be referred to in some cases as primary storage subsystem 117.
Client Computing Devices, Clients, and Subclients
Typically, a variety of sources in an organization produce data to be protected and managed. As just one illustrative example, in a corporate environment such data sources can be employee workstations and company servers such as a mail server, a web server, a database server, a transaction server, or the like. In system 100, data generation sources include one or more client computing devices 102. A computing device that has a data agent 142 installed and operating on it is generally referred to as a “client computing device” 102, and may include any type of computing device, without limitation. A client computing device 102 may be associated with one or more users and/or user accounts.
A “client” is a logical component of information management system 100, which may represent a logical grouping of one or more data agents installed on a client computing device 102. Storage manager 140 recognizes a client as a component of system 100, and in some embodiments, may automatically create a client component the first time a data agent 142 is installed on a client computing device 102. Because data generated by executable component(s) 110 is tracked by the associated data agent 142 so that it may be properly protected in system 100, a client may be said to generate data and to store the generated data to primary storage, such as primary storage device 104. However, the terms “client” and “client computing device” as used herein do not imply that a client computing device 102 is necessarily configured in the client/server sense relative to another computing device such as a mail server, or that a client computing device 102 cannot be a server in its own right. As just a few examples, a client computing device 102 can be and/or include mail servers, file servers, database servers, virtual machine servers, and/or web servers.
Each client computing device 102 may have application(s) 110 executing thereon which generate and manipulate the data that is to be protected from loss and managed in system 100. Applications 110 generally facilitate the operations of an organization, and can include, without limitation, mail server applications (e.g., Microsoft Exchange Server), file system applications, mail client applications (e.g., Microsoft Exchange Client), database applications or database management systems (e.g., SQL, Oracle, SAP, Lotus Notes Database), word processing applications (e.g., Microsoft Word), spreadsheet applications, financial applications, presentation applications, graphics and/or video applications, browser applications, mobile applications, entertainment applications, and so on. Each application 110 may be accompanied by an application-specific data agent 142, though not all data agents 142 are application-specific or associated with only application. A file manager application, e.g., Microsoft Windows Explorer, may be considered an application 110 and may be accompanied by its own data agent 142. Client computing devices 102 can have at least one operating system (e.g., Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X, iOS, IBM z/OS, Linux, other Unix-based operating systems, etc.) installed thereon, which may support or host one or more file systems and other applications 110. In some embodiments, a virtual machine that executes on a host client computing device 102 may be considered an application 110 and may be accompanied by a specific data agent 142 (e.g., virtual server data agent).
Client computing devices 102 and other components in system 100 can be connected to one another via one or more electronic communication pathways 114. For example, a first communication pathway 114 may communicatively couple client computing device 102 and secondary storage computing device 106; a second communication pathway 114 may communicatively couple storage manager 140 and client computing device 102; and a third communication pathway 114 may communicatively couple storage manager 140 and secondary storage computing device 106, etc. (see, e.g., FIG. 1A and FIG. 1C). A communication pathway 114 can include one or more networks or other connection types including one or more of the following, without limitation: the Internet, a wide area network (WAN), a local area network (LAN), a Storage Area Network (SAN), a Fibre Channel (FC) connection, a Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) connection, a virtual private network (VPN), a token ring or TCP/IP based network, an intranet network, a point-to-point link, a cellular network, a wireless data transmission system, a two-way cable system, an interactive kiosk network, a satellite network, a broadband network, a baseband network, a neural network, a mesh network, an ad hoc network, other appropriate computer or telecommunications networks, combinations of the same or the like. Communication pathways 114 in some cases may also include application programming interfaces (APIs) including, e.g., cloud service provider APIs, virtual machine management APIs, and hosted service provider APIs. The underlying infrastructure of communication pathways 114 may be wired and/or wireless, analog and/or digital, or any combination thereof; and the facilities used may be private, public, third-party provided, or any combination thereof, without limitation.
A “subclient” is a logical grouping of all or part of a client's primary data 112. In general, a subclient may be defined according to how the subclient data is to be protected as a unit in system 100. For example, a subclient may be associated with a certain storage policy. A given client may thus comprise several subclients, each subclient associated with a different storage policy. For example, some files may form a first subclient that requires compression and deduplication and is associated with a first storage policy. Other files of the client may form a second subclient that requires a different retention schedule as well as encryption, and may be associated with a different, second storage policy. As a result, though the primary data may be generated by the same application 110 and may belong to one given client, portions of the data may be assigned to different subclients for distinct treatment by system 100. More detail on subclients is given in regard to storage policies below.
Primary Data and Exemplary Primary Storage Devices
Primary data 112 is generally production data or “live” data generated by the operating system and/or applications 110 executing on client computing device 102. Primary data 112 is generally stored on primary storage device(s) 104 and is organized via a file system operating on the client computing device 102. Thus, client computing device(s) 102 and corresponding applications 110 may create, access, modify, write, delete, and otherwise use primary data 112. Primary data 112 is generally in the native format of the source application 110. Primary data 112 is an initial or first stored body of data generated by the source application 110. Primary data 112 in some cases is created substantially directly from data generated by the corresponding source application 110. It can be useful in performing certain tasks to organize primary data 112 into units of different granularities. In general, primary data 112 can include files, directories, file system volumes, data blocks, extents, or any other hierarchies or organizations of data objects. As used herein, a “data object” can refer to (i) any file that is currently addressable by a file system or that was previously addressable by the file system (e.g., an archive file), and/or to (ii) a subset of such a file (e.g., a data block, an extent, etc.). Primary data 112 may include structured data (e.g., database files), unstructured data (e.g., documents), and/or semi-structured data. See, e.g., FIG. 1B.
It can also be useful in performing certain functions of system 100 to access and modify metadata within primary data 112. Metadata generally includes information about data objects and/or characteristics associated with the data objects. For simplicity herein, it is to be understood that, unless expressly stated otherwise, any reference to primary data 112 generally also includes its associated metadata, but references to metadata generally do not include the primary data. Metadata can include, without limitation, one or more of the following: the data owner (e.g., the client or user that generates the data), the last modified time (e.g., the time of the most recent modification of the data object), a data object name (e.g., a file name), a data object size (e.g., a number of bytes of data), information about the content (e.g., an indication as to the existence of a particular search term), user-supplied tags, to/from information for email (e.g., an email sender, recipient, etc.), creation date, file type (e.g., format or application type), last accessed time, application type (e.g., type of application that generated the data object), location/network (e.g., a current, past or future location of the data object and network pathways to/from the data object), geographic location (e.g., GPS coordinates), frequency of change (e.g., a period in which the data object is modified), business unit (e.g., a group or department that generates, manages or is otherwise associated with the data object), aging information (e.g., a schedule, such as a time period, in which the data object is migrated to secondary or long term storage), boot sectors, partition layouts, file location within a file folder directory structure, user permissions, owners, groups, access control lists (ACLs), system metadata (e.g., registry information), combinations of the same or other similar information related to the data object. In addition to metadata generated by or related to file systems and operating systems, some applications 110 and/or other components of system 100 maintain indices of metadata for data objects, e.g., metadata associated with individual email messages. The use of metadata to perform classification and other functions is described in greater detail below.
Primary storage devices 104 storing primary data 112 may be relatively fast and/or expensive technology (e.g., flash storage, a disk drive, a hard-disk storage array, solid state memory, etc.), typically to support high-performance live production environments. Primary data 112 may be highly changeable and/or may be intended for relatively short term retention (e.g., hours, days, or weeks). According to some embodiments, client computing device 102 can access primary data 112 stored in primary storage device 104 by making conventional file system calls via the operating system. Each client computing device 102 is generally associated with and/or in communication with one or more primary storage devices 104 storing corresponding primary data 112. A client computing device 102 is said to be associated with or in communication with a particular primary storage device 104 if it is capable of one or more of: routing and/or storing data (e.g., primary data 112) to the primary storage device 104, coordinating the routing and/or storing of data to the primary storage device 104, retrieving data from the primary storage device 104, coordinating the retrieval of data from the primary storage device 104, and modifying and/or deleting data in the primary storage device 104. Thus, a client computing device 102 may be said to access data stored in an associated storage device 104.
Primary storage device 104 may be dedicated or shared. In some cases, each primary storage device 104 is dedicated to an associated client computing device 102, e.g., a local disk drive. In other cases, one or more primary storage devices 104 can be shared by multiple client computing devices 102, e.g., via a local network, in a cloud storage implementation, etc. As one example, primary storage device 104 can be a storage array shared by a group of client computing devices 102, such as EMC Clariion, EMC Symmetrix, EMC Celerra, Dell EqualLogic, IBM XIV, NetApp FAS, HP EVA, and HP 3PAR.
System 100 may also include hosted services (not shown), which may be hosted in some cases by an entity other than the organization that employs the other components of system 100. For instance, the hosted services may be provided by online service providers. Such service providers can provide social networking services, hosted email services, or hosted productivity applications or other hosted applications such as software-as-a-service (SaaS), platform-as-a-service (PaaS), application service providers (ASPs), cloud services, or other mechanisms for delivering functionality via a network. As it services users, each hosted service may generate additional data and metadata, which may be managed by system 100, e.g., as primary data 112. In some cases, the hosted services may be accessed using one of the applications 110. As an example, a hosted mail service may be accessed via browser running on a client computing device 102.
Secondary Copies and Exemplary Secondary Storage Devices
Primary data 112 stored on primary storage devices 104 may be compromised in some cases, such as when an employee deliberately or accidentally deletes or overwrites primary data 112. Or primary storage devices 104 can be damaged, lost, or otherwise corrupted. For recovery and/or regulatory compliance purposes, it is therefore useful to generate and maintain copies of primary data 112. Accordingly, system 100 includes one or more secondary storage computing devices 106 and one or more secondary storage devices 108 configured to create and store one or more secondary copies 116 of primary data 112 including its associated metadata. The secondary storage computing devices 106 and the secondary storage devices 108 may be referred to as secondary storage subsystem 118.
Secondary copies 116 can help in search and analysis efforts and meet other information management goals as well, such as: restoring data and/or metadata if an original version is lost (e.g., by deletion, corruption, or disaster); allowing point-in-time recovery; complying with regulatory data retention and electronic discovery (e-discovery) requirements; reducing utilized storage capacity in the production system and/or in secondary storage; facilitating organization and search of data; improving user access to data files across multiple computing devices and/or hosted services; and implementing data retention and pruning policies.
A secondary copy 116 can comprise a separate stored copy of data that is derived from one or more earlier-created stored copies (e.g., derived from primary data 112 or from another secondary copy 116). Secondary copies 116 can include point-in-time data, and may be intended for relatively long-term retention before some or all of the data is moved to other storage or discarded. In some cases, a secondary copy 116 may be in a different storage device than other previously stored copies; and/or may be remote from other previously stored copies. Secondary copies 116 can be stored in the same storage device as primary data 112. For example, a disk array capable of performing hardware snapshots stores primary data 112 and creates and stores hardware snapshots of the primary data 112 as secondary copies 116. Secondary copies 116 may be stored in relatively slow and/or lower cost storage (e.g., magnetic tape). A secondary copy 116 may be stored in a backup or archive format, or in some other format different from the native source application format or other format of primary data 112.
Secondary storage computing devices 106 may index secondary copies 116 (e.g., using a media agent 144), enabling users to browse and restore at a later time and further enabling the lifecycle management of the indexed data. After creation of a secondary copy 116 that represents certain primary data 112, a pointer or other location indicia (e.g., a stub) may be placed in primary data 112, or be otherwise associated with primary data 112, to indicate the current location of a particular secondary copy 116. Since an instance of a data object or metadata in primary data 112 may change over time as it is modified by application 110 (or hosted service or the operating system), system 100 may create and manage multiple secondary copies 116 of a particular data object or metadata, each copy representing the state of the data object in primary data 112 at a particular point in time. Moreover, since an instance of a data object in primary data 112 may eventually be deleted from primary storage device 104 and the file system, system 100 may continue to manage point-in-time representations of that data object, even though the instance in primary data 112 no longer exists. For virtual machines, the operating system and other applications 110 of client computing device(s) 102 may execute within or under the management of virtualization software (e.g., a VMM), and the primary storage device(s) 104 may comprise a virtual disk created on a physical storage device. System 100 may create secondary copies 116 of the files or other data objects in a virtual disk file and/or secondary copies 116 of the entire virtual disk file itself (e.g., of an entire .vmdk file).
Secondary copies 116 are distinguishable from corresponding primary data 112. First, secondary copies 116 can be stored in a different format from primary data 112 (e.g., backup, archive, or other non-native format). For this or other reasons, secondary copies 116 may not be directly usable by applications 110 or client computing device 102 (e.g., via standard system calls or otherwise) without modification, processing, or other intervention by system 100 which may be referred to as “restore” operations. Secondary copies 116 may have been processed by data agent 142 and/or media agent 144 in the course of being created (e.g., compression, deduplication, encryption, integrity markers, indexing, formatting, application-aware metadata, etc.), and thus secondary copy 116 may represent source primary data 112 without necessarily being exactly identical to the source.
Second, secondary copies 116 may be stored on a secondary storage device 108 that is inaccessible to application 110 running on client computing device 102 and/or hosted service. Some secondary copies 116 may be “offline copies,” in that they are not readily available (e.g., not mounted to tape or disk). Offline copies can include copies of data that system 100 can access without human intervention (e.g., tapes within an automated tape library, but not yet mounted in a drive), and copies that the system 100 can access only with some human intervention (e.g., tapes located at an offsite storage site).
Using Intermediate Devices for Creating Secondary Copies—Secondary Storage Computing Devices
Creating secondary copies can be challenging when hundreds or thousands of client computing devices 102 continually generate large volumes of primary data 112 to be protected. Also, there can be significant overhead involved in the creation of secondary copies 116. Moreover, specialized programmed intelligence and/or hardware capability is generally needed for accessing and interacting with secondary storage devices 108. Client computing devices 102 may interact directly with a secondary storage device 108 to create secondary copies 116, but in view of the factors described above, this approach can negatively impact the ability of client computing device 102 to serve/service application 110 and produce primary data 112. Further, any given client computing device 102 may not be optimized for interaction with certain secondary storage devices 108.
Thus, system 100 may include one or more software and/or hardware components which generally act as intermediaries between client computing devices 102 (that generate primary data 112) and secondary storage devices 108 (that store secondary copies 116). In addition to off-loading certain responsibilities from client computing devices 102, these intermediate components provide other benefits. For instance, as discussed further below with respect to FIG. 1D, distributing some of the work involved in creating secondary copies 116 can enhance scalability and improve system performance. For instance, using specialized secondary storage computing devices 106 and media agents 144 for interfacing with secondary storage devices 108 and/or for performing certain data processing operations can greatly improve the speed with which system 100 performs information management operations and can also improve the capacity of the system to handle large numbers of such operations, while reducing the computational load on the production environment of client computing devices 102. The intermediate components can include one or more secondary storage computing devices 106 as shown in FIG. 1A and/or one or more media agents 144. Media agents are discussed further below (e.g., with respect to FIGS. 1C-1E). These special-purpose components of system 100 comprise specialized programmed intelligence and/or hardware capability for writing to, reading from, instructing, communicating with, or otherwise interacting with secondary storage devices 108.
Secondary storage computing device(s) 106 can comprise any of the computing devices described above, without limitation. In some cases, secondary storage computing device(s) 106 also include specialized hardware componentry and/or software intelligence (e.g., specialized interfaces) for interacting with certain secondary storage device(s) 108 with which they may be specially associated.
To create a secondary copy 116 involving the copying of data from primary storage subsystem 117 to secondary storage subsystem 118, client computing device 102 may communicate the primary data 112 to be copied (or a processed version thereof generated by a data agent 142) to the designated secondary storage computing device 106, via a communication pathway 114. Secondary storage computing device 106 in turn may further process and convey the data or a processed version thereof to secondary storage device 108. One or more secondary copies 116 may be created from existing secondary copies 116, such as in the case of an auxiliary copy operation, described further below.
Exemplary Primary Data and an Exemplary Secondary Copy
FIG. 1B is a detailed view of some specific examples of primary data stored on primary storage device(s) 104 and secondary copy data stored on secondary storage device(s) 108, with other components of the system removed for the purposes of illustration. Stored on primary storage device(s) 104 are primary data 112 objects including word processing documents 119A-B, spreadsheets 120, presentation documents 122, video files 124, image files 126, email mailboxes 128 (and corresponding email messages 129A-C), HTML/XML or other types of markup language files 130, databases 132 and corresponding tables or other data structures 133A-133C. Some or all primary data 112 objects are associated with corresponding metadata (e.g., “Meta1-11”), which may include file system metadata and/or application-specific metadata. Stored on the secondary storage device(s) 108 are secondary copy 116 data objects 134A-C which may include copies of or may otherwise represent corresponding primary data 112.
Secondary copy data objects 134A-C can individually represent more than one primary data object. For example, secondary copy data object 134A represents three separate primary data objects 133C, 122, and 129C (represented as 133C′, 122′, and 129C′, respectively, and accompanied by corresponding metadata Meta11, Meta3, and Meta8, respectively). Moreover, as indicated by the prime mark (′), secondary storage computing devices 106 or other components in secondary storage subsystem 118 may process the data received from primary storage subsystem 117 and store a secondary copy including a transformed and/or supplemented representation of a primary data object and/or metadata that is different from the original format, e.g., in a compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, or other modified format. For instance, secondary storage computing devices 106 can generate new metadata or other information based on said processing, and store the newly generated information along with the secondary copies. Secondary copy data object 1346 represents primary data objects 120, 1336, and 119A as 120′, 1336′, and 119A′, respectively, accompanied by corresponding metadata Meta2, Meta10, and Meta1, respectively. Also, secondary copy data object 134C represents primary data objects 133A, 1196, and 129A as 133A′, 1196′, and 129A′, respectively, accompanied by corresponding metadata Meta9, Meta5, and Meta6, respectively.
Exemplary Information Management System Architecture
System 100 can incorporate a variety of different hardware and software components, which can in turn be organized with respect to one another in many different configurations, depending on the embodiment. There are critical design choices involved in specifying the functional responsibilities of the components and the role of each component in system 100. Such design choices can impact how system 100 performs and adapts to data growth and other changing circumstances. FIG. 1C shows a system 100 designed according to these considerations and includes: storage manager 140, one or more data agents 142 executing on client computing device(s) 102 and configured to process primary data 112, and one or more media agents 144 executing on one or more secondary storage computing devices 106 for performing tasks involving secondary storage devices 108.
Storage Manager
Storage manager 140 is a centralized storage and/or information manager that is configured to perform certain control functions and also to store certain critical information about system 100—hence storage manager 140 is said to manage system 100. As noted, the number of components in system 100 and the amount of data under management can be large. Managing the components and data is therefore a significant task, which can grow unpredictably as the number of components and data scale to meet the needs of the organization. For these and other reasons, according to certain embodiments, responsibility for controlling system 100, or at least a significant portion of that responsibility, is allocated to storage manager 140. Storage manager 140 can be adapted independently according to changing circumstances, without having to replace or re-design the remainder of the system. Moreover, a computing device for hosting and/or operating as storage manager 140 can be selected to best suit the functions and networking needs of storage manager 140. These and other advantages are described in further detail below and with respect to FIG. 1D.
Storage manager 140 may be a software module or other application hosted by a suitable computing device. In some embodiments, storage manager 140 is itself a computing device that performs the functions described herein. Storage manager 140 comprises or operates in conjunction with one or more associated data structures such as a dedicated database (e.g., management database 146), depending on the configuration. The storage manager 140 generally initiates, performs, coordinates, and/or controls storage and other information management operations performed by system 100, e.g., to protect and control primary data 112 and secondary copies 116. In general, storage manager 140 is said to manage system 100, which includes communicating with, instructing, and controlling in some circumstances components such as data agents 142 and media agents 144, etc.
As shown by the dashed arrowed lines 114 in FIG. 1C, storage manager 140 may communicate with, instruct, and/or control some or all elements of system 100, such as data agents 142 and media agents 144. In this manner, storage manager 140 manages the operation of various hardware and software components in system 100. In certain embodiments, control information originates from storage manager 140 and status as well as index reporting is transmitted to storage manager 140 by the managed components, whereas payload data and metadata are generally communicated between data agents 142 and media agents 144 (or otherwise between client computing device(s) 102 and secondary storage computing device(s) 106), e.g., at the direction of and under the management of storage manager 140. Control information can generally include parameters and instructions for carrying out information management operations, such as, without limitation, instructions to perform a task associated with an operation, timing information specifying when to initiate a task, data path information specifying what components to communicate with or access in carrying out an operation, and the like. In other embodiments, some information management operations are controlled or initiated by other components of system 100 (e.g., by media agents 144 or data agents 142), instead of or in combination with storage manager 140.
According to certain embodiments, storage manager 140 provides one or more of the following functions:
    • communicating with data agents 142 and media agents 144, including transmitting instructions, messages, and/or queries, as well as receiving status reports, index information, messages, and/or queries, and responding to same;
    • initiating execution of information management operations;
    • initiating restore and recovery operations;
    • managing secondary storage devices 108 and inventory/capacity of the same;
    • allocating secondary storage devices 108 for secondary copy operations;
    • reporting, searching, and/or classification of data in system 100;
    • monitoring completion of and status reporting related to information management operations and jobs;
    • tracking movement of data within system 100;
    • tracking age information relating to secondary copies 116, secondary storage devices 108, comparing the age information against retention guidelines, and initiating data pruning when appropriate;
    • tracking logical associations between components in system 100;
    • protecting metadata associated with system 100, e.g., in management database 146;
    • implementing job management, schedule management, event management, alert management, reporting, job history maintenance, user security management, disaster recovery management, and/or user interfacing for system administrators and/or end users of system 100;
    • sending, searching, and/or viewing of log files; and
    • implementing operations management functionality.
Storage manager 140 may maintain an associated database 146 (or “storage manager database 146” or “management database 146”) of management-related data and information management policies 148. Database 146 is stored in computer memory accessible by storage manager 140. Database 146 may include a management index 150 (or “index 150”) or other data structure(s) that may store: logical associations between components of the system; user preferences and/or profiles (e.g., preferences regarding encryption, compression, or deduplication of primary data or secondary copies; preferences regarding the scheduling, type, or other aspects of secondary copy or other operations; mappings of particular information management users or user accounts to certain computing devices or other components, etc.; management tasks; media containerization; other useful data; and/or any combination thereof. For example, storage manager 140 may use index 150 to track logical associations between media agents 144 and secondary storage devices 108 and/or movement of data to/from secondary storage devices 108. For instance, index 150 may store data associating a client computing device 102 with a particular media agent 144 and/or secondary storage device 108, as specified in an information management policy 148.
Administrators and others may configure and initiate certain information management operations on an individual basis. But while this may be acceptable for some recovery operations or other infrequent tasks, it is often not workable for implementing on-going organization-wide data protection and management. Thus, system 100 may utilize information management policies 148 for specifying and executing information management operations on an automated basis. Generally, an information management policy 148 can include a stored data structure or other information source that specifies parameters (e.g., criteria and rules) associated with storage management or other information management operations. Storage manager 140 can process an information management policy 148 and/or index 150 and, based on the results, identify an information management operation to perform, identify the appropriate components in system 100 to be involved in the operation (e.g., client computing devices 102 and corresponding data agents 142, secondary storage computing devices 106 and corresponding media agents 144, etc.), establish connections to those components and/or between those components, and/or instruct and control those components to carry out the operation. In this manner, system 100 can translate stored information into coordinated activity among the various computing devices in system 100.
Management database 146 may maintain information management policies 148 and associated data, although information management policies 148 can be stored in computer memory at any appropriate location outside management database 146. For instance, an information management policy 148 such as a storage policy may be stored as metadata in a media agent database 152 or in a secondary storage device 108 (e.g., as an archive copy) for use in restore or other information management operations, depending on the embodiment. Information management policies 148 are described further below. According to certain embodiments, management database 146 comprises a relational database (e.g., an SQL database) for tracking metadata, such as metadata associated with secondary copy operations (e.g., what client computing devices 102 and corresponding subclient data were protected and where the secondary copies are stored and which media agent 144 performed the storage operation(s)). This and other metadata may additionally be stored in other locations, such as at secondary storage computing device 106 or on the secondary storage device 108, allowing data recovery without the use of storage manager 140 in some cases. Thus, management database 146 may comprise data needed to kick off secondary copy operations (e.g., storage policies, schedule policies, etc.), status and reporting information about completed jobs (e.g., status and error reports on yesterday's backup jobs), and additional information sufficient to enable restore and disaster recovery operations (e.g., media agent associations, location indexing, content indexing, etc.).
Storage manager 140 may include a jobs agent 156, a user interface 158, and a management agent 154, all of which may be implemented as interconnected software modules or application programs. These are described further below.
Jobs agent 156 in some embodiments initiates, controls, and/or monitors the status of some or all information management operations previously performed, currently being performed, or scheduled to be performed by system 100. A job is a logical grouping of information management operations such as daily storage operations scheduled for a certain set of subclients (e.g., generating incremental block-level backup copies 116 at a certain time every day for database files in a certain geographical location). Thus, jobs agent 156 may access information management policies 148 (e.g., in management database 146) to determine when, where, and how to initiate/control jobs in system 100.
Storage Manager User Interfaces
User interface 158 may include information processing and display software, such as a graphical user interface (GUI), an application program interface (API), and/or other interactive interface(s) through which users and system processes can retrieve information about the status of information management operations or issue instructions to storage manager 140 and other components. Via user interface 158, users may issue instructions to the components in system 100 regarding performance of secondary copy and recovery operations. For example, a user may modify a schedule concerning the number of pending secondary copy operations. As another example, a user may employ the GUI to view the status of pending secondary copy jobs or to monitor the status of certain components in system 100 (e.g., the amount of capacity left in a storage device). Storage manager 140 may track information that permits it to select, designate, or otherwise identify content indices, deduplication databases, or similar databases or resources or data sets within its information management cell (or another cell) to be searched in response to certain queries. Such queries may be entered by the user by interacting with user interface 158.
Various embodiments of information management system 100 may be configured and/or designed to generate user interface data usable for rendering the various interactive user interfaces described. The user interface data may be used by system 100 and/or by another system, device, and/or software program (for example, a browser program), to render the interactive user interfaces. The interactive user interfaces may be displayed on, for example, electronic displays (including, for example, touch-enabled displays), consoles, etc., whether direct-connected to storage manager 140 or communicatively coupled remotely, e.g., via an internet connection. The present disclosure describes various embodiments of interactive and dynamic user interfaces, some of which may be generated by user interface agent 158, and which are the result of significant technological development. The user interfaces described herein may provide improved human-computer interactions, allowing for significant cognitive and ergonomic efficiencies and advantages over previous systems, including reduced mental workloads, improved decision-making, and the like. User interface 158 may operate in a single integrated view or console (not shown). The console may support a reporting capability for generating a variety of reports, which may be tailored to a particular aspect of information management.
User interfaces are not exclusive to storage manager 140 and in some embodiments a user may access information locally from a computing device component of system 100. For example, some information pertaining to installed data agents 142 and associated data streams may be available from client computing device 102. Likewise, some information pertaining to media agents 144 and associated data streams may be available from secondary storage computing device 106.
Storage Manager Management Agent
Management agent 154 can provide storage manager 140 with the ability to communicate with other components within system 100 and/or with other information management cells via network protocols and application programming interfaces (APIs) including, e.g., HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, REST, virtualization software APIs, cloud service provider APIs, and hosted service provider APIs, without limitation. Management agent 154 also allows multiple information management cells to communicate with one another. For example, system 100 in some cases may be one information management cell in a network of multiple cells adjacent to one another or otherwise logically related, e.g., in a WAN or LAN. With this arrangement, the cells may communicate with one another through respective management agents 154. Inter-cell communications and hierarchy is described in greater detail in e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
Information Management Cell
An “information management cell” (or “storage operation cell” or “cell”) may generally include a logical and/or physical grouping of a combination of hardware and software components associated with performing information management operations on electronic data, typically one storage manager 140 and at least one data agent 142 (executing on a client computing device 102) and at least one media agent 144 (executing on a secondary storage computing device 106). For instance, the components shown in FIG. 1C may together form an information management cell. Thus, in some configurations, a system 100 may be referred to as an information management cell or a storage operation cell. A given cell may be identified by the identity of its storage manager 140, which is generally responsible for managing the cell.
Multiple cells may be organized hierarchically, so that cells may inherit properties from hierarchically superior cells or be controlled by other cells in the hierarchy (automatically or otherwise). Alternatively, in some embodiments, cells may inherit or otherwise be associated with information management policies, preferences, information management operational parameters, or other properties or characteristics according to their relative position in a hierarchy of cells. Cells may also be organized hierarchically according to function, geography, architectural considerations, or other factors useful or desirable in performing information management operations. For example, a first cell may represent a geographic segment of an enterprise, such as a Chicago office, and a second cell may represent a different geographic segment, such as a New York City office. Other cells may represent departments within a particular office, e.g., human resources, finance, engineering, etc. Where delineated by function, a first cell may perform one or more first types of information management operations (e.g., one or more first types of secondary copies at a certain frequency), and a second cell may perform one or more second types of information management operations (e.g., one or more second types of secondary copies at a different frequency and under different retention rules). In general, the hierarchical information is maintained by one or more storage managers 140 that manage the respective cells (e.g., in corresponding management database(s) 146).
Data Agents
A variety of different applications 110 can operate on a given client computing device 102, including operating systems, file systems, database applications, e-mail applications, and virtual machines, just to name a few. And, as part of the process of creating and restoring secondary copies 116, the client computing device 102 may be tasked with processing and preparing the primary data 112 generated by these various applications 110. Moreover, the nature of the processing/preparation can differ across application types, e.g., due to inherent structural, state, and formatting differences among applications 110 and/or the operating system of client computing device 102. Each data agent 142 is therefore advantageously configured in some embodiments to assist in the performance of information management operations based on the type of data that is being protected at a client-specific and/or application-specific level.
Data agent 142 is a component of information system 100 and is generally directed by storage manager 140 to participate in creating or restoring secondary copies 116. Data agent 142 may be a software program (e.g., in the form of a set of executable binary files) that executes on the same client computing device 102 as the associated application 110 that data agent 142 is configured to protect. Data agent 142 is generally responsible for managing, initiating, or otherwise assisting in the performance of information management operations in reference to its associated application(s) 110 and corresponding primary data 112 which is generated/accessed by the particular application(s) 110. For instance, data agent 142 may take part in copying, archiving, migrating, and/or replicating of certain primary data 112 stored in the primary storage device(s) 104. Data agent 142 may receive control information from storage manager 140, such as commands to transfer copies of data objects and/or metadata to one or more media agents 144. Data agent 142 also may compress, deduplicate, and encrypt certain primary data 112, as well as capture application-related metadata before transmitting the processed data to media agent 144. Data agent 142 also may receive instructions from storage manager 140 to restore (or assist in restoring) a secondary copy 116 from secondary storage device 108 to primary storage 104, such that the restored data may be properly accessed by application 110 in a suitable format as though it were primary data 112.
Each data agent 142 may be specialized for a particular application 110. For instance, different individual data agents 142 may be designed to handle Microsoft Exchange data, Lotus Notes data, Microsoft Windows file system data, Microsoft Active Directory Objects data, SQL Server data, Share Point data, Oracle database data, SAP database data, virtual machines and/or associated data, and other types of data. A file system data agent, for example, may handle data files and/or other file system information. If a client computing device 102 has two or more types of data 112, a specialized data agent 142 may be used for each data type. For example, to backup, migrate, and/or restore all of the data on a Microsoft Exchange server, the client computing device 102 may use: (1) a Microsoft Exchange Mailbox data agent 142 to back up the Exchange mailboxes; (2) a Microsoft Exchange Database data agent 142 to back up the Exchange databases; (3) a Microsoft Exchange Public Folder data agent 142 to back up the Exchange Public Folders; and (4) a Microsoft Windows File System data agent 142 to back up the file system of client computing device 102. In this example, these specialized data agents 142 are treated as four separate data agents 142 even though they operate on the same client computing device 102. Other examples may include archive management data agents such as a migration archiver or a compliance archiver, Quick Recovery® agents, and continuous data replication agents. Application-specific data agents 142 can provide improved performance as compared to generic agents. For instance, because application-specific data agents 142 may only handle data for a single software application, the design, operation, and performance of the data agent 142 can be streamlined. The data agent 142 may therefore execute faster and consume less persistent storage and/or operating memory than data agents designed to generically accommodate multiple different software applications 110.
Each data agent 142 may be configured to access data and/or metadata stored in the primary storage device(s) 104 associated with data agent 142 and its host client computing device 102, and process the data appropriately. For example, during a secondary copy operation, data agent 142 may arrange or assemble the data and metadata into one or more files having a certain format (e.g., a particular backup or archive format) before transferring the file(s) to a media agent 144 or other component. The file(s) may include a list of files or other metadata. In some embodiments, a data agent 142 may be distributed between client computing device 102 and storage manager 140 (and any other intermediate components) or may be deployed from a remote location or its functions approximated by a remote process that performs some or all of the functions of data agent 142. In addition, a data agent 142 may perform some functions provided by media agent 144. Other embodiments may employ one or more generic data agents 142 that can handle and process data from two or more different applications 110, or that can handle and process multiple data types, instead of or in addition to using specialized data agents 142. For example, one generic data agent 142 may be used to back up, migrate and restore Microsoft Exchange Mailbox data and Microsoft Exchange Database data, while another generic data agent may handle Microsoft Exchange Public Folder data and Microsoft Windows File System data.
Media Agents
As noted, off-loading certain responsibilities from client computing devices 102 to intermediate components such as secondary storage computing device(s) 106 and corresponding media agent(s) 144 can provide a number of benefits including improved performance of client computing device 102, faster and more reliable information management operations, and enhanced scalability. In one example which will be discussed further below, media agent 144 can act as a local cache of recently-copied data and/or metadata stored to secondary storage device(s) 108, thus improving restore capabilities and performance for the cached data.
Media agent 144 is a component of system 100 and is generally directed by storage manager 140 in creating and restoring secondary copies 116. Whereas storage manager 140 generally manages system 100 as a whole, media agent 144 provides a portal to certain secondary storage devices 108, such as by having specialized features for communicating with and accessing certain associated secondary storage device 108. Media agent 144 may be a software program (e.g., in the form of a set of executable binary files) that executes on a secondary storage computing device 106. Media agent 144 generally manages, coordinates, and facilitates the transmission of data between a data agent 142 (executing on client computing device 102) and secondary storage device(s) 108 associated with media agent 144. For instance, other components in the system may interact with media agent 144 to gain access to data stored on associated secondary storage device(s) 108, (e.g., to browse, read, write, modify, delete, or restore data). Moreover, media agents 144 can generate and store information relating to characteristics of the stored data and/or metadata, or can generate and store other types of information that generally provides insight into the contents of the secondary storage devices 108—generally referred to as indexing of the stored secondary copies 116. Each media agent 144 may operate on a dedicated secondary storage computing device 106, while in other embodiments a plurality of media agents 144 may operate on the same secondary storage computing device 106.
A media agent 144 may be associated with a particular secondary storage device 108 if that media agent 144 is capable of one or more of: routing and/or storing data to the particular secondary storage device 108; coordinating the routing and/or storing of data to the particular secondary storage device 108; retrieving data from the particular secondary storage device 108; coordinating the retrieval of data from the particular secondary storage device 108; and modifying and/or deleting data retrieved from the particular secondary storage device 108. Media agent 144 in certain embodiments is physically separate from the associated secondary storage device 108. For instance, a media agent 144 may operate on a secondary storage computing device 106 in a distinct housing, package, and/or location from the associated secondary storage device 108. In one example, a media agent 144 operates on a first server computer and is in communication with a secondary storage device(s) 108 operating in a separate rack-mounted RAID-based system.
A media agent 144 associated with a particular secondary storage device 108 may instruct secondary storage device 108 to perform an information management task. For instance, a media agent 144 may instruct a tape library to use a robotic arm or other retrieval means to load or eject a certain storage media, and to subsequently archive, migrate, or retrieve data to or from that media, e.g., for the purpose of restoring data to a client computing device 102. As another example, a secondary storage device 108 may include an array of hard disk drives or solid state drives organized in a RAID configuration, and media agent 144 may forward a logical unit number (LUN) and other appropriate information to the array, which uses the received information to execute the desired secondary copy operation. Media agent 144 may communicate with a secondary storage device 108 via a suitable communications link, such as a SCSI or Fibre Channel link.
Each media agent 144 may maintain an associated media agent database 152. Media agent database 152 may be stored to a disk or other storage device (not shown) that is local to the secondary storage computing device 106 on which media agent 144 executes. In other cases, media agent database 152 is stored separately from the host secondary storage computing device 106. Media agent database 152 can include, among other things, a media agent index 153 (see, e.g., FIG. 1C). In some cases, media agent index 153 does not form a part of and is instead separate from media agent database 152.
Media agent index 153 (or “index 153”) may be a data structure associated with the particular media agent 144 that includes information about the stored data associated with the particular media agent and which may be generated in the course of performing a secondary copy operation or a restore. Index 153 provides a fast and efficient mechanism for locating/browsing secondary copies 116 or other data stored in secondary storage devices 108 without having to access secondary storage device 108 to retrieve the information from there. For instance, for each secondary copy 116, index 153 may include metadata such as a list of the data objects (e.g., files/subdirectories, database objects, mailbox objects, etc.), a logical path to the secondary copy 116 on the corresponding secondary storage device 108, location information (e.g., offsets) indicating where the data objects are stored in the secondary storage device 108, when the data objects were created or modified, etc. Thus, index 153 includes metadata associated with the secondary copies 116 that is readily available for use from media agent 144. In some embodiments, some or all of the information in index 153 may instead or additionally be stored along with secondary copies 116 in secondary storage device 108. In some embodiments, a secondary storage device 108 can include sufficient information to enable a “bare metal restore,” where the operating system and/or software applications of a failed client computing device 102 or another target may be automatically restored without manually reinstalling individual software packages (including operating systems).
Because index 153 may operate as a cache, it can also be referred to as an “index cache.” In such cases, information stored in index cache 153 typically comprises data that reflects certain particulars about relatively recent secondary copy operations. After some triggering event, such as after some time elapses or index cache 153 reaches a particular size, certain portions of index cache 153 may be copied or migrated to secondary storage device 108, e.g., on a least-recently-used basis. This information may be retrieved and uploaded back into index cache 153 or otherwise restored to media agent 144 to facilitate retrieval of data from the secondary storage device(s) 108. In some embodiments, the cached information may include format or containerization information related to archives or other files stored on storage device(s) 108.
In some alternative embodiments media agent 144 generally acts as a coordinator or facilitator of secondary copy operations between client computing devices 102 and secondary storage devices 108, but does not actually write the data to secondary storage device 108. For instance, storage manager 140 (or media agent 144) may instruct a client computing device 102 and secondary storage device 108 to communicate with one another directly. In such a case, client computing device 102 transmits data directly or via one or more intermediary components to secondary storage device 108 according to the received instructions, and vice versa. Media agent 144 may still receive, process, and/or maintain metadata related to the secondary copy operations, i.e., may continue to build and maintain index 153. In these embodiments, payload data can flow through media agent 144 for the purposes of populating index 153, but not for writing to secondary storage device 108. Media agent 144 and/or other components such as storage manager 140 may in some cases incorporate additional functionality, such as data classification, content indexing, deduplication, encryption, compression, and the like. Further details regarding these and other functions are described below.
Distributed, Scalable Architecture
As described, certain functions of system 100 can be distributed amongst various physical and/or logical components. For instance, one or more of storage manager 140, data agents 142, and media agents 144 may operate on computing devices that are physically separate from one another. This architecture can provide a number of benefits. For instance, hardware and software design choices for each distributed component can be targeted to suit its particular function. The secondary computing devices 106 on which media agents 144 operate can be tailored for interaction with associated secondary storage devices 108 and provide fast index cache operation, among other specific tasks. Similarly, client computing device(s) 102 can be selected to effectively service applications 110 in order to efficiently produce and store primary data 112.
Moreover, in some cases, one or more of the individual components of information management system 100 can be distributed to multiple separate computing devices. As one example, for large file systems where the amount of data stored in management database 146 is relatively large, database 146 may be migrated to or may otherwise reside on a specialized database server (e.g., an SQL server) separate from a server that implements the other functions of storage manager 140. This distributed configuration can provide added protection because database 146 can be protected with standard database utilities (e.g., SQL log shipping or database replication) independent from other functions of storage manager 140. Database 146 can be efficiently replicated to a remote site for use in the event of a disaster or other data loss at the primary site. Or database 146 can be replicated to another computing device within the same site, such as to a higher performance machine in the event that a storage manager host computing device can no longer service the needs of a growing system 100.
The distributed architecture also provides scalability and efficient component utilization. FIG. 1D shows an embodiment of information management system 100 including a plurality of client computing devices 102 and associated data agents 142 as well as a plurality of secondary storage computing devices 106 and associated media agents 144. Additional components can be added or subtracted based on the evolving needs of system 100. For instance, depending on where bottlenecks are identified, administrators can add additional client computing devices 102, secondary storage computing devices 106, and/or secondary storage devices 108. Moreover, where multiple fungible components are available, load balancing can be implemented to dynamically address identified bottlenecks. As an example, storage manager 140 may dynamically select which media agents 144 and/or secondary storage devices 108 to use for storage operations based on a processing load analysis of media agents 144 and/or secondary storage devices 108, respectively.
Where system 100 includes multiple media agents 144 (see, e.g., FIG. 1D), a first media agent 144 may provide failover functionality for a second failed media agent 144. In addition, media agents 144 can be dynamically selected to provide load balancing. Each client computing device 102 can communicate with, among other components, any of the media agents 144, e.g., as directed by storage manager 140. And each media agent 144 may communicate with, among other components, any of secondary storage devices 108, e.g., as directed by storage manager 140. Thus, operations can be routed to secondary storage devices 108 in a dynamic and highly flexible manner, to provide load balancing, failover, etc. Further examples of scalable systems capable of dynamic storage operations, load balancing, and failover are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,246,207.
While distributing functionality amongst multiple computing devices can have certain advantages, in other contexts it can be beneficial to consolidate functionality on the same computing device. In alternative configurations, certain components may reside and execute on the same computing device. As such, in other embodiments, one or more of the components shown in FIG. 1C may be implemented on the same computing device. In one configuration, a storage manager 140, one or more data agents 142, and/or one or more media agents 144 are all implemented on the same computing device. In other embodiments, one or more data agents 142 and one or more media agents 144 are implemented on the same computing device, while storage manager 140 is implemented on a separate computing device, etc. without limitation.
Exemplary Types of Information Management Operations, Including Storage Operations
In order to protect and leverage stored data, system 100 can be configured to perform a variety of information management operations, which may also be referred to in some cases as storage management operations or storage operations. These operations can generally include (i) data movement operations, (ii) processing and data manipulation operations, and (iii) analysis, reporting, and management operations.
Data Movement Operations, Including Secondary Copy Operations
Data movement operations are generally storage operations that involve the copying or migration of data between different locations in system 100. For example, data movement operations can include operations in which stored data is copied, migrated, or otherwise transferred from one or more first storage devices to one or more second storage devices, such as from primary storage device(s) 104 to secondary storage device(s) 108, from secondary storage device(s) 108 to different secondary storage device(s) 108, from secondary storage devices 108 to primary storage devices 104, or from primary storage device(s) 104 to different primary storage device(s) 104, or in some cases within the same primary storage device 104 such as within a storage array.
Data movement operations can include by way of example, backup operations, archive operations, information lifecycle management operations such as hierarchical storage management operations, replication operations (e.g., continuous data replication), snapshot operations, deduplication or single-instancing operations, auxiliary copy operations, disaster-recovery copy operations, and the like. As will be discussed, some of these operations do not necessarily create distinct copies. Nonetheless, some or all of these operations are generally referred to as “secondary copy operations” for simplicity, because they involve secondary copies. Data movement also comprises restoring secondary copies.
Backup Operations
A backup operation creates a copy of a version of primary data 112 at a particular point in time (e.g., one or more files or other data units). Each subsequent backup copy 116 (which is a form of secondary copy 116) may be maintained independently of the first. A backup generally involves maintaining a version of the copied primary data 112 as well as backup copies 116. Further, a backup copy in some embodiments is generally stored in a form that is different from the native format, e.g., a backup format. This contrasts to the version in primary data 112 which may instead be stored in a format native to the source application(s) 110. In various cases, backup copies can be stored in a format in which the data is compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, and/or otherwise modified from the original native application format. For example, a backup copy may be stored in a compressed backup format that facilitates efficient long-term storage. Backup copies 116 can have relatively long retention periods as compared to primary data 112, which is generally highly changeable. Backup copies 116 may be stored on media with slower retrieval times than primary storage device 104. Some backup copies may have shorter retention periods than some other types of secondary copies 116, such as archive copies (described below). Backups may be stored at an offsite location.
Backup operations can include full backups, differential backups, incremental backups, “synthetic full” backups, and/or creating a “reference copy.” A full backup (or “standard full backup”) in some embodiments is generally a complete image of the data to be protected. However, because full backup copies can consume a relatively large amount of storage, it can be useful to use a full backup copy as a baseline and only store changes relative to the full backup copy afterwards.
A differential backup operation (or cumulative incremental backup operation) tracks and stores changes that occurred since the last full backup. Differential backups can grow quickly in size, but can restore relatively efficiently because a restore can be completed in some cases using only the full backup copy and the latest differential copy.
An incremental backup operation generally tracks and stores changes since the most recent backup copy of any type, which can greatly reduce storage utilization. In some cases, however, restoring can be lengthy compared to full or differential backups because completing a restore operation may involve accessing a full backup in addition to multiple incremental backups.
Synthetic full backups generally consolidate data without directly backing up data from the client computing device. A synthetic full backup is created from the most recent full backup (i.e., standard or synthetic) and subsequent incremental and/or differential backups. The resulting synthetic full backup is identical to what would have been created had the last backup for the subclient been a standard full backup. Unlike standard full, incremental, and differential backups, however, a synthetic full backup does not actually transfer data from primary storage to the backup media, because it operates as a backup consolidator. A synthetic full backup extracts the index data of each participating subclient. Using this index data and the previously backed up user data images, it builds new full backup images (e.g., bitmaps), one for each subclient. The new backup images consolidate the index and user data stored in the related incremental, differential, and previous full backups into a synthetic backup file that fully represents the subclient (e.g., via pointers) but does not comprise all its constituent data.
Any of the above types of backup operations can be at the volume level, file level, or block level. Volume level backup operations generally involve copying of a data volume (e.g., a logical disk or partition) as a whole. In a file-level backup, information management system 100 generally tracks changes to individual files and includes copies of files in the backup copy. For block-level backups, files are broken into constituent blocks, and changes are tracked at the block level. Upon restore, system 100 reassembles the blocks into files in a transparent fashion. Far less data may actually be transferred and copied to secondary storage devices 108 during a file-level copy than a volume-level copy. Likewise, a block-level copy may transfer less data than a file-level copy, resulting in faster execution. However, restoring a relatively higher-granularity copy can result in longer restore times. For instance, when restoring a block-level copy, the process of locating and retrieving constituent blocks can sometimes take longer than restoring file-level backups.
A reference copy may comprise copy(ies) of selected objects from backed up data, typically to help organize data by keeping contextual information from multiple sources together, and/or help retain specific data for a longer period of time, such as for legal hold needs. A reference copy generally maintains data integrity, and when the data is restored, it may be viewed in the same format as the source data. In some embodiments, a reference copy is based on a specialized client, individual subclient and associated information management policies (e.g., storage policy, retention policy, etc.) that are administered within system 100.
Archive Operations
Because backup operations generally involve maintaining a version of the copied primary data 112 and also maintaining backup copies in secondary storage device(s) 108, they can consume significant storage capacity. To reduce storage consumption, an archive operation according to certain embodiments creates an archive copy 116 by both copying and removing source data. Or, seen another way, archive operations can involve moving some or all of the source data to the archive destination. Thus, data satisfying criteria for removal (e.g., data of a threshold age or size) may be removed from source storage. The source data may be primary data 112 or a secondary copy 116, depending on the situation. As with backup copies, archive copies can be stored in a format in which the data is compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, and/or otherwise modified from the format of the original application or source copy. In addition, archive copies may be retained for relatively long periods of time (e.g., years) and, in some cases are never deleted. In certain embodiments, archive copies may be made and kept for extended periods in order to meet compliance regulations.
Archiving can also serve the purpose of freeing up space in primary storage device(s) 104 and easing the demand on computational resources on client computing device 102. Similarly, when a secondary copy 116 is archived, the archive copy can therefore serve the purpose of freeing up space in the source secondary storage device(s) 108. Examples of data archiving operations are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,107,298.
Snapshot Operations
Snapshot operations can provide a relatively lightweight, efficient mechanism for protecting data. From an end-user viewpoint, a snapshot may be thought of as an “instant” image of primary data 112 at a given point in time, and may include state and/or status information relative to an application 110 that creates/manages primary data 112. In one embodiment, a snapshot may generally capture the directory structure of an object in primary data 112 such as a file or volume or other data set at a particular moment in time and may also preserve file attributes and contents. A snapshot in some cases is created relatively quickly, e.g., substantially instantly, using a minimum amount of file space, but may still function as a conventional file system backup.
A “hardware snapshot” (or “hardware-based snapshot”) operation occurs where a target storage device (e.g., a primary storage device 104 or a secondary storage device 108) performs the snapshot operation in a self-contained fashion, substantially independently, using hardware, firmware and/or software operating on the storage device itself. For instance, the storage device may perform snapshot operations generally without intervention or oversight from any of the other components of the system 100, e.g., a storage array may generate an “array-created” hardware snapshot and may also manage its storage, integrity, versioning, etc. In this manner, hardware snapshots can off-load other components of system 100 from snapshot processing. An array may receive a request from another component to take a snapshot and then proceed to execute the “hardware snapshot” operations autonomously, preferably reporting success to the requesting component.
A “software snapshot” (or “software-based snapshot”) operation, on the other hand, occurs where a component in system 100 (e.g., client computing device 102, etc.) implements a software layer that manages the snapshot operation via interaction with the target storage device. For instance, the component executing the snapshot management software layer may derive a set of pointers and/or data that represents the snapshot. The snapshot management software layer may then transmit the same to the target storage device, along with appropriate instructions for writing the snapshot. One example of a software snapshot product is Microsoft Volume Snapshot Service (VSS), which is part of the Microsoft Windows operating system.
Some types of snapshots do not actually create another physical copy of all the data as it existed at the particular point in time, but may simply create pointers that map files and directories to specific memory locations (e.g., to specific disk blocks) where the data resides as it existed at the particular point in time. For example, a snapshot copy may include a set of pointers derived from the file system or from an application. In some other cases, the snapshot may be created at the block-level, such that creation of the snapshot occurs without awareness of the file system. Each pointer points to a respective stored data block, so that collectively, the set of pointers reflect the storage location and state of the data object (e.g., file(s) or volume(s) or data set(s)) at the point in time when the snapshot copy was created.
An initial snapshot may use only a small amount of disk space needed to record a mapping or other data structure representing or otherwise tracking the blocks that correspond to the current state of the file system. Additional disk space is usually required only when files and directories change later on. Furthermore, when files change, typically only the pointers which map to blocks are copied, not the blocks themselves. For example for “copy-on-write” snapshots, when a block changes in primary storage, the block is copied to secondary storage or cached in primary storage before the block is overwritten in primary storage, and the pointer to that block is changed to reflect the new location of that block. The snapshot mapping of file system data may also be updated to reflect the changed block(s) at that particular point in time. In some other cases, a snapshot includes a full physical copy of all or substantially all of the data represented by the snapshot. Further examples of snapshot operations are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,529,782. A snapshot copy in many cases can be made quickly and without significantly impacting primary computing resources because large amounts of data need not be copied or moved. In some embodiments, a snapshot may exist as a virtual file system, parallel to the actual file system. Users in some cases gain read-only access to the record of files and directories of the snapshot. By electing to restore primary data 112 from a snapshot taken at a given point in time, users may also return the current file system to the state of the file system that existed when the snapshot was taken.
Replication Operations
Replication is another type of secondary copy operation. Some types of secondary copies 116 periodically capture images of primary data 112 at particular points in time (e.g., backups, archives, and snapshots). However, it can also be useful for recovery purposes to protect primary data 112 in a more continuous fashion, by replicating primary data 112 substantially as changes occur. In some cases a replication copy can be a mirror copy, for instance, where changes made to primary data 112 are mirrored or substantially immediately copied to another location (e.g., to secondary storage device(s) 108). By copying each write operation to the replication copy, two storage systems are kept synchronized or substantially synchronized so that they are virtually identical at approximately the same time. Where entire disk volumes are mirrored, however, mirroring can require significant amount of storage space and utilizes a large amount of processing resources.
According to some embodiments, secondary copy operations are performed on replicated data that represents a recoverable state, or “known good state” of a particular application running on the source system. For instance, in certain embodiments, known good replication copies may be viewed as copies of primary data 112. This feature allows the system to directly access, copy, restore, back up, or otherwise manipulate the replication copies as if they were the “live” primary data 112. This can reduce access time, storage utilization, and impact on source applications 110, among other benefits. Based on known good state information, system 100 can replicate sections of application data that represent a recoverable state rather than rote copying of blocks of data. Examples of replication operations (e.g., continuous data replication) are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,617,262.
Deduplication/Single-Instancing Operations
Deduplication or single-instance storage is useful to reduce the amount of non-primary data. For instance, some or all of the above-described secondary copy operations can involve deduplication in some fashion. New data is read, broken down into data portions of a selected granularity (e.g., sub-file level blocks, files, etc.), compared with corresponding portions that are already in secondary storage, and only new/changed portions are stored. Portions that already exist are represented as pointers to the already-stored data. Thus, a deduplicated secondary copy 116 may comprise actual data portions copied from primary data 112 and may further comprise pointers to already-stored data, which is generally more storage-efficient than a full copy.
In order to streamline the comparison process, system 100 may calculate and/or store signatures (e.g., hashes or cryptographically unique IDs) corresponding to the individual source data portions and compare the signatures to already-stored data signatures, instead of comparing entire data portions. In some cases, only a single instance of each data portion is stored, and deduplication operations may therefore be referred to interchangeably as “single-instancing” operations. Depending on the implementation, however, deduplication operations can store more than one instance of certain data portions, yet still significantly reduce stored-data redundancy. Depending on the embodiment, deduplication portions such as data blocks can be of fixed or variable length. Using variable length blocks can enhance deduplication by responding to changes in the data stream, but can involve more complex processing. In some cases, system 100 utilizes a technique for dynamically aligning deduplication blocks based on changing content in the data stream, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,364,652.
System 100 can deduplicate in a variety of manners at a variety of locations. For instance, in some embodiments, system 100 implements “target-side” deduplication by deduplicating data at the media agent 144 after being received from data agent 142. In some such cases, media agents 144 are generally configured to manage the deduplication process. For instance, one or more of the media agents 144 maintain a corresponding deduplication database that stores deduplication information (e.g., data block signatures). Examples of such a configuration are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 9,020,900. Instead of or in combination with “target-side” deduplication, “source-side” (or “client-side”) deduplication can also be performed, e.g., to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted by data agent 142 to media agent 144. Storage manager 140 may communicate with other components within system 100 via network protocols and cloud service provider APIs to facilitate cloud-based deduplication/single instancing, as exemplified in U.S. Pat. No. 8,954,446. Some other deduplication/single instancing techniques are described in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2006/0224846 and in U.S. Pat. No. 9,098,495.
Information Lifecycle Management and Hierarchical Storage Management
In some embodiments, files and other data over their lifetime move from more expensive quick-access storage to less expensive slower-access storage. Operations associated with moving data through various tiers of storage are sometimes referred to as information lifecycle management (ILM) operations.
One type of ILM operation is a hierarchical storage management (HSM) operation, which generally automatically moves data between classes of storage devices, such as from high-cost to low-cost storage devices. For instance, an HSM operation may involve movement of data from primary storage devices 104 to secondary storage devices 108, or between tiers of secondary storage devices 108. With each tier, the storage devices may be progressively cheaper, have relatively slower access/restore times, etc. For example, movement of data between tiers may occur as data becomes less important over time. In some embodiments, an HSM operation is similar to archiving in that creating an HSM copy may (though not always) involve deleting some of the source data, e.g., according to one or more criteria related to the source data. For example, an HSM copy may include primary data 112 or a secondary copy 116 that exceeds a given size threshold or a given age threshold. Often, and unlike some types of archive copies, HSM data that is removed or aged from the source is replaced by a logical reference pointer or stub. The reference pointer or stub can be stored in the primary storage device 104 or other source storage device, such as a secondary storage device 108 to replace the deleted source data and to point to or otherwise indicate the new location in (another) secondary storage device 108.
For example, files are generally moved between higher and lower cost storage depending on how often the files are accessed. When a user requests access to HSM data that has been removed or migrated, system 100 uses the stub to locate the data and can make recovery of the data appear transparent, even though the HSM data may be stored at a location different from other source data. In this manner, the data appears to the user (e.g., in file system browsing windows and the like) as if it still resides in the source location (e.g., in a primary storage device 104). The stub may include metadata associated with the corresponding data, so that a file system and/or application can provide some information about the data object and/or a limited-functionality version (e.g., a preview) of the data object.
An HSM copy may be stored in a format other than the native application format (e.g., compressed, encrypted, deduplicated, and/or otherwise modified). In some cases, copies which involve the removal of data from source storage and the maintenance of stub or other logical reference information on source storage may be referred to generally as “on-line archive copies.” On the other hand, copies which involve the removal of data from source storage without the maintenance of stub or other logical reference information on source storage may be referred to as “off-line archive copies.” Examples of HSM and ILM techniques are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
Auxiliary Copy Operations
An auxiliary copy is generally a copy of an existing secondary copy 116. For instance, an initial secondary copy 116 may be derived from primary data 112 or from data residing in secondary storage subsystem 118, whereas an auxiliary copy is generated from the initial secondary copy 116. Auxiliary copies provide additional standby copies of data and may reside on different secondary storage devices 108 than the initial secondary copies 116. Thus, auxiliary copies can be used for recovery purposes if initial secondary copies 116 become unavailable. Exemplary auxiliary copy techniques are described in further detail in U.S. Pat. No. 8,230,195.
Disaster-Recovery Copy Operations
System 100 may also make and retain disaster recovery copies, often as secondary, high-availability disk copies. System 100 may create secondary copies and store them at disaster recovery locations using auxiliary copy or replication operations, such as continuous data replication technologies. Depending on the particular data protection goals, disaster recovery locations can be remote from the client computing devices 102 and primary storage devices 104, remote from some or all of the secondary storage devices 108, or both.
Data Manipulation, Including Encryption and Compression
Data manipulation and processing may include encryption and compression as well as integrity marking and checking, formatting for transmission, formatting for storage, etc. Data may be manipulated “client-side” by data agent 142 as well as “target-side” by media agent 144 in the course of creating secondary copy 116, or conversely in the course of restoring data from secondary to primary.
Encryption Operations
System 100 in some cases is configured to process data (e.g., files or other data objects, primary data 112, secondary copies 116, etc.), according to an appropriate encryption algorithm (e.g., Blowfish, Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Triple Data Encryption Standard (3-DES), etc.) to limit access and provide data security. System 100 in some cases encrypts the data at the client level, such that client computing devices 102 (e.g., data agents 142) encrypt the data prior to transferring it to other components, e.g., before sending the data to media agents 144 during a secondary copy operation. In such cases, client computing device 102 may maintain or have access to an encryption key or passphrase for decrypting the data upon restore. Encryption can also occur when media agent 144 creates auxiliary copies or archive copies. Encryption may be applied in creating a secondary copy 116 of a previously unencrypted secondary copy 116, without limitation. In further embodiments, secondary storage devices 108 can implement built-in, high performance hardware-based encryption.
Compression Operations
Similar to encryption, system 100 may also or alternatively compress data in the course of generating a secondary copy 116. Compression encodes information such that fewer bits are needed to represent the information as compared to the original representation. Compression techniques are well known in the art. Compression operations may apply one or more data compression algorithms. Compression may be applied in creating a secondary copy 116 of a previously uncompressed secondary copy, e.g., when making archive copies or disaster recovery copies. The use of compression may result in metadata that specifies the nature of the compression, so that data may be uncompressed on restore if appropriate.
Data Analysis, Reporting, and Management Operations
Data analysis, reporting, and management operations can differ from data movement operations in that they do not necessarily involve copying, migration or other transfer of data between different locations in the system. For instance, data analysis operations may involve processing (e.g., offline processing) or modification of already stored primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116. However, in some embodiments data analysis operations are performed in conjunction with data movement operations. Some data analysis operations include content indexing operations and classification operations which can be useful in leveraging data under management to enhance search and other features.
Classification Operations/Content Indexing
In some embodiments, information management system 100 analyzes and indexes characteristics, content, and metadata associated with primary data 112 (“online content indexing”) and/or secondary copies 116 (“off-line content indexing”). Content indexing can identify files or other data objects based on content (e.g., user-defined keywords or phrases, other keywords/phrases that are not defined by a user, etc.), and/or metadata (e.g., email metadata such as “to,” “from,” “cc,” “bcc,” attachment name, received time, etc.). Content indexes may be searched and search results may be restored.
System 100 generally organizes and catalogues the results into a content index, which may be stored within media agent database 152, for example. The content index can also include the storage locations of or pointer references to indexed data in primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116. Results may also be stored elsewhere in system 100 (e.g., in primary storage device 104 or in secondary storage device 108). Such content index data provides storage manager 140 or other components with an efficient mechanism for locating primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 of data objects that match particular criteria, thus greatly increasing the search speed capability of system 100. For instance, search criteria can be specified by a user through user interface 158 of storage manager 140. Moreover, when system 100 analyzes data and/or metadata in secondary copies 116 to create an “off-line content index,” this operation has no significant impact on the performance of client computing devices 102 and thus does not take a toll on the production environment. Examples of content indexing techniques are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 8,170,995.
One or more components, such as a content index engine, can be configured to scan data and/or associated metadata for classification purposes to populate a database (or other data structure) of information, which can be referred to as a “data classification database” or a “metabase.” Depending on the embodiment, the data classification database(s) can be organized in a variety of different ways, including centralization, logical sub-divisions, and/or physical sub-divisions. For instance, one or more data classification databases may be associated with different subsystems or tiers within system 100. As an example, there may be a first metabase associated with primary storage subsystem 117 and a second metabase associated with secondary storage subsystem 118. In other cases, metabase(s) may be associated with individual components, e.g., client computing devices 102 and/or media agents 144. In some embodiments, a data classification database may reside as one or more data structures within management database 146, may be otherwise associated with storage manager 140, and/or may reside as a separate component. In some cases, metabase(s) may be included in separate database(s) and/or on separate storage device(s) from primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116, such that operations related to the metabase(s) do not significantly impact performance on other components of system 100. In other cases, metabase(s) may be stored along with primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116. Files or other data objects can be associated with identifiers (e.g., tag entries, etc.) to facilitate searches of stored data objects. Among a number of other benefits, the metabase can also allow efficient, automatic identification of files or other data objects to associate with secondary copy or other information management operations. For instance, a metabase can dramatically improve the speed with which system 100 can search through and identify data as compared to other approaches that involve scanning an entire file system. Examples of metabases and data classification operations are provided in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,734,669 and 7,747,579.
Management and Reporting Operations
Certain embodiments leverage the integrated ubiquitous nature of system 100 to provide useful system-wide management and reporting. Operations management can generally include monitoring and managing the health and performance of system 100 by, without limitation, performing error tracking, generating granular storage/performance metrics (e.g., job success/failure information, deduplication efficiency, etc.), generating storage modeling and costing information, and the like. As an example, storage manager 140 or another component in system 100 may analyze traffic patterns and suggest and/or automatically route data to minimize congestion. In some embodiments, the system can generate predictions relating to storage operations or storage operation information. Such predictions, which may be based on a trending analysis, may predict various network operations or resource usage, such as network traffic levels, storage media use, use of bandwidth of communication links, use of media agent components, etc. Further examples of traffic analysis, trend analysis, prediction generation, and the like are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
In some configurations having a hierarchy of storage operation cells, a master storage manager 140 may track the status of subordinate cells, such as the status of jobs, system components, system resources, and other items, by communicating with storage managers 140 (or other components) in the respective storage operation cells. Moreover, the master storage manager 140 may also track status by receiving periodic status updates from the storage managers 140 (or other components) in the respective cells regarding jobs, system components, system resources, and other items. In some embodiments, a master storage manager 140 may store status information and other information regarding its associated storage operation cells and other system information in its management database 146 and/or index 150 (or in another location). The master storage manager 140 or other component may also determine whether certain storage-related or other criteria are satisfied, and may perform an action or trigger event (e.g., data migration) in response to the criteria being satisfied, such as where a storage threshold is met for a particular volume, or where inadequate protection exists for certain data. For instance, data from one or more storage operation cells is used to dynamically and automatically mitigate recognized risks, and/or to advise users of risks or suggest actions to mitigate these risks. For example, an information management policy may specify certain requirements (e.g., that a storage device should maintain a certain amount of free space, that secondary copies should occur at a particular interval, that data should be aged and migrated to other storage after a particular period, that data on a secondary volume should always have a certain level of availability and be restorable within a given time period, that data on a secondary volume may be mirrored or otherwise migrated to a specified number of other volumes, etc.). If a risk condition or other criterion is triggered, the system may notify the user of these conditions and may suggest (or automatically implement) a mitigation action to address the risk. For example, the system may indicate that data from a primary copy 112 should be migrated to a secondary storage device 108 to free up space on primary storage device 104. Examples of the use of risk factors and other triggering criteria are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
In some embodiments, system 100 may also determine whether a metric or other indication satisfies particular storage criteria sufficient to perform an action. For example, a storage policy or other definition might indicate that a storage manager 140 should initiate a particular action if a storage metric or other indication drops below or otherwise fails to satisfy specified criteria such as a threshold of data protection. In some embodiments, risk factors may be quantified into certain measurable service or risk levels. For example, certain applications and associated data may be considered to be more important relative to other data and services. Financial compliance data, for example, may be of greater importance than marketing materials, etc. Network administrators may assign priority values or “weights” to certain data and/or applications corresponding to the relative importance. The level of compliance of secondary copy operations specified for these applications may also be assigned a certain value. Thus, the health, impact, and overall importance of a service may be determined, such as by measuring the compliance value and calculating the product of the priority value and the compliance value to determine the “service level” and comparing it to certain operational thresholds to determine whether it is acceptable. Further examples of the service level determination are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
System 100 may additionally calculate data costing and data availability associated with information management operation cells. For instance, data received from a cell may be used in conjunction with hardware-related information and other information about system elements to determine the cost of storage and/or the availability of particular data. Exemplary information generated could include how fast a particular department is using up available storage space, how long data would take to recover over a particular pathway from a particular secondary storage device, costs over time, etc. Moreover, in some embodiments, such information may be used to determine or predict the overall cost associated with the storage of certain information. The cost associated with hosting a certain application may be based, at least in part, on the type of media on which the data resides, for example. Storage devices may be assigned to a particular cost categories, for example. Further examples of costing techniques are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
Any of the above types of information (e.g., information related to trending, predictions, job, cell or component status, risk, service level, costing, etc.) can generally be provided to users via user interface 158 in a single integrated view or console (not shown). Report types may include: scheduling, event management, media management and data aging. Available reports may also include backup history, data aging history, auxiliary copy history, job history, library and drive, media in library, restore history, and storage policy, etc., without limitation. Such reports may be specified and created at a certain point in time as a system analysis, forecasting, or provisioning tool. Integrated reports may also be generated that illustrate storage and performance metrics, risks and storage costing information. Moreover, users may create their own reports based on specific needs. User interface 158 can include an option to graphically depict the various components in the system using appropriate icons. As one example, user interface 158 may provide a graphical depiction of primary storage devices 104, secondary storage devices 108, data agents 142 and/or media agents 144, and their relationship to one another in system 100.
In general, the operations management functionality of system 100 can facilitate planning and decision-making. For example, in some embodiments, a user may view the status of some or all jobs as well as the status of each component of information management system 100. Users may then plan and make decisions based on this data. For instance, a user may view high-level information regarding secondary copy operations for system 100, such as job status, component status, resource status (e.g., communication pathways, etc.), and other information. The user may also drill down or use other means to obtain more detailed information regarding a particular component, job, or the like. Further examples are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 7,343,453.
System 100 can also be configured to perform system-wide e-discovery operations in some embodiments. In general, e-discovery operations provide a unified collection and search capability for data in the system, such as data stored in secondary storage devices 108 (e.g., backups, archives, or other secondary copies 116). For example, system 100 may construct and maintain a virtual repository for data stored in system 100 that is integrated across source applications 110, different storage device types, etc. According to some embodiments, e-discovery utilizes other techniques described herein, such as data classification and/or content indexing.
Information Management Policies
An information management policy 148 can include a data structure or other information source that specifies a set of parameters (e.g., criteria and rules) associated with secondary copy and/or other information management operations.
One type of information management policy 148 is a “storage policy.” According to certain embodiments, a storage policy generally comprises a data structure or other information source that defines (or includes information sufficient to determine) a set of preferences or other criteria for performing information management operations. Storage policies can include one or more of the following: (1) what data will be associated with the storage policy, e.g., subclient; (2) a destination to which the data will be stored; (3) datapath information specifying how the data will be communicated to the destination; (4) the type of secondary copy operation to be performed; and (5) retention information specifying how long the data will be retained at the destination (see, e.g., FIG. 1E). Data associated with a storage policy can be logically organized into subclients, which may represent primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116. A subclient may represent static or dynamic associations of portions of a data volume. Subclients may represent mutually exclusive portions. Thus, in certain embodiments, a portion of data may be given a label and the association is stored as a static entity in an index, database or other storage location. Subclients may also be used as an effective administrative scheme of organizing data according to data type, department within the enterprise, storage preferences, or the like. Depending on the configuration, subclients can correspond to files, folders, virtual machines, databases, etc. In one exemplary scenario, an administrator may find it preferable to separate e-mail data from financial data using two different subclients.
A storage policy can define where data is stored by specifying a target or destination storage device (or group of storage devices). For instance, where the secondary storage device 108 includes a group of disk libraries, the storage policy may specify a particular disk library for storing the subclients associated with the policy. As another example, where the secondary storage devices 108 include one or more tape libraries, the storage policy may specify a particular tape library for storing the subclients associated with the storage policy, and may also specify a drive pool and a tape pool defining a group of tape drives and a group of tapes, respectively, for use in storing the subclient data. While information in the storage policy can be statically assigned in some cases, some or all of the information in the storage policy can also be dynamically determined based on criteria set forth in the storage policy. For instance, based on such criteria, a particular destination storage device(s) or other parameter of the storage policy may be determined based on characteristics associated with the data involved in a particular secondary copy operation, device availability (e.g., availability of a secondary storage device 108 or a media agent 144), network status and conditions (e.g., identified bottlenecks), user credentials, and the like.
Datapath information can also be included in the storage policy. For instance, the storage policy may specify network pathways and components to utilize when moving the data to the destination storage device(s). In some embodiments, the storage policy specifies one or more media agents 144 for conveying data associated with the storage policy between the source and destination. A storage policy can also specify the type(s) of associated operations, such as backup, archive, snapshot, auxiliary copy, or the like. Furthermore, retention parameters can specify how long the resulting secondary copies 116 will be kept (e.g., a number of days, months, years, etc.), perhaps depending on organizational needs and/or compliance criteria.
When adding a new client computing device 102, administrators can manually configure information management policies 148 and/or other settings, e.g., via user interface 158. However, this can be an involved process resulting in delays, and it may be desirable to begin data protection operations quickly, without awaiting human intervention. Thus, in some embodiments, system 100 automatically applies a default configuration to client computing device 102. As one example, when one or more data agent(s) 142 are installed on a client computing device 102, the installation script may register the client computing device 102 with storage manager 140, which in turn applies the default configuration to the new client computing device 102. In this manner, data protection operations can begin substantially immediately. The default configuration can include a default storage policy, for example, and can specify any appropriate information sufficient to begin data protection operations. This can include a type of data protection operation, scheduling information, a target secondary storage device 108, data path information (e.g., a particular media agent 144), and the like.
Another type of information management policy 148 is a “scheduling policy,” which specifies when and how often to perform operations. Scheduling parameters may specify with what frequency (e.g., hourly, weekly, daily, event-based, etc.) or under what triggering conditions secondary copy or other information management operations are to take place. Scheduling policies in some cases are associated with particular components, such as a subclient, client computing device 102, and the like.
Another type of information management policy 148 is an “audit policy” (or “security policy”), which comprises preferences, rules and/or criteria that protect sensitive data in system 100. For example, an audit policy may define “sensitive objects” which are files or data objects that contain particular keywords (e.g., “confidential,” or “privileged”) and/or are associated with particular keywords (e.g., in metadata) or particular flags (e.g., in metadata identifying a document or email as personal, confidential, etc.). An audit policy may further specify rules for handling sensitive objects. As an example, an audit policy may require that a reviewer approve the transfer of any sensitive objects to a cloud storage site, and that if approval is denied for a particular sensitive object, the sensitive object should be transferred to a local primary storage device 104 instead. To facilitate this approval, the audit policy may further specify how a secondary storage computing device 106 or other system component should notify a reviewer that a sensitive object is slated for transfer.
Another type of information management policy 148 is a “provisioning policy,” which can include preferences, priorities, rules, and/or criteria that specify how client computing devices 102 (or groups thereof) may utilize system resources, such as available storage on cloud storage and/or network bandwidth. A provisioning policy specifies, for example, data quotas for particular client computing devices 102 (e.g., a number of gigabytes that can be stored monthly, quarterly or annually). Storage manager 140 or other components may enforce the provisioning policy. For instance, media agents 144 may enforce the policy when transferring data to secondary storage devices 108. If a client computing device 102 exceeds a quota, a budget for the client computing device 102 (or associated department) may be adjusted accordingly or an alert may trigger.
While the above types of information management policies 148 are described as separate policies, one or more of these can be generally combined into a single information management policy 148. For instance, a storage policy may also include or otherwise be associated with one or more scheduling, audit, or provisioning policies or operational parameters thereof. Moreover, while storage policies are typically associated with moving and storing data, other policies may be associated with other types of information management operations. The following is a non-exhaustive list of items that information management policies 148 may specify:
    • schedules or other timing information, e.g., specifying when and/or how often to perform information management operations;
    • the type of secondary copy 116 and/or copy format (e.g., snapshot, backup, archive, HSM, etc.);
    • a location or a class or quality of storage for storing secondary copies 116 (e.g., one or more particular secondary storage devices 108);
    • preferences regarding whether and how to encrypt, compress, deduplicate, or otherwise modify or transform secondary copies 116;
    • which system components and/or network pathways (e.g., preferred media agents 144) should be used to perform secondary storage operations;
    • resource allocation among different computing devices or other system components used in performing information management operations (e.g., bandwidth allocation, available storage capacity, etc.);
    • whether and how to synchronize or otherwise distribute files or other data objects across multiple computing devices or hosted services; and
    • retention information specifying the length of time primary data 112 and/or secondary copies 116 should be retained, e.g., in a particular class or tier of storage devices, or within the system 100.
Information management policies 148 can additionally specify or depend on historical or current criteria that may be used to determine which rules to apply to a particular data object, system component, or information management operation, such as:
    • frequency with which primary data 112 or a secondary copy 116 of a data object or metadata has been or is predicted to be used, accessed, or modified;
    • time-related factors (e.g., aging information such as time since the creation or modification of a data object);
    • deduplication information (e.g., hashes, data blocks, deduplication block size, deduplication efficiency or other metrics);
    • an estimated or historic usage or cost associated with different components (e.g., with secondary storage devices 108);
    • the identity of users, applications 110, client computing devices 102 and/or other computing devices that created, accessed, modified, or otherwise utilized primary data 112 or secondary copies 116;
    • a relative sensitivity (e.g., confidentiality, importance) of a data object, e.g., as determined by its content and/or metadata;
    • the current or historical storage capacity of various storage devices;
    • the current or historical network capacity of network pathways connecting various components within the storage operation cell;
    • access control lists or other security information; and
    • the content of a particular data object (e.g., its textual content) or of metadata associated with the data object.
      Exemplary Storage Policy and Secondary Copy Operations
FIG. 1E includes a data flow diagram depicting performance of secondary copy operations by an embodiment of information management system 100, according to an exemplary storage policy 148A. System 100 includes a storage manager 140, a client computing device 102 having a file system data agent 142A and an email data agent 142B operating thereon, a primary storage device 104, two media agents 144A, 144B, and two secondary storage devices 108: a disk library 108A and a tape library 108B. As shown, primary storage device 104 includes primary data 112A, which is associated with a logical grouping of data associated with a file system (“file system subclient”), and primary data 112B, which is a logical grouping of data associated with email (“email subclient”). The techniques described with respect to FIG. 1E can be utilized in conjunction with data that is otherwise organized as well.
As indicated by the dashed box, the second media agent 144B and tape library 1088 are “off-site,” and may be remotely located from the other components in system 100 (e.g., in a different city, office building, etc.). Indeed, “off-site” may refer to a magnetic tape located in remote storage, which must be manually retrieved and loaded into a tape drive to be read. In this manner, information stored on the tape library 108B may provide protection in the event of a disaster or other failure at the main site(s) where data is stored.
The file system subclient 112A in certain embodiments generally comprises information generated by the file system and/or operating system of client computing device 102, and can include, for example, file system data (e.g., regular files, file tables, mount points, etc.), operating system data (e.g., registries, event logs, etc.), and the like. The e-mail subclient 112B can include data generated by an e-mail application operating on client computing device 102, e.g., mailbox information, folder information, emails, attachments, associated database information, and the like. As described above, the subclients can be logical containers, and the data included in the corresponding primary data 112A and 112B may or may not be stored contiguously.
The exemplary storage policy 148A includes backup copy preferences or rule set 160, disaster recovery copy preferences or rule set 162, and compliance copy preferences or rule set 164. Backup copy rule set 160 specifies that it is associated with file system subclient 166 and email subclient 168. Each of subclients 166 and 168 are associated with the particular client computing device 102. Backup copy rule set 160 further specifies that the backup operation will be written to disk library 108A and designates a particular media agent 144A to convey the data to disk library 108A. Finally, backup copy rule set 160 specifies that backup copies created according to rule set 160 are scheduled to be generated hourly and are to be retained for 30 days. In some other embodiments, scheduling information is not included in storage policy 148A and is instead specified by a separate scheduling policy.
Disaster recovery copy rule set 162 is associated with the same two subclients 166 and 168. However, disaster recovery copy rule set 162 is associated with tape library 108B, unlike backup copy rule set 160. Moreover, disaster recovery copy rule set 162 specifies that a different media agent, namely 144B, will convey data to tape library 108B. Disaster recovery copies created according to rule set 162 will be retained for 60 days and will be generated daily. Disaster recovery copies generated according to disaster recovery copy rule set 162 can provide protection in the event of a disaster or other catastrophic data loss that would affect the backup copy 116A maintained on disk library 108A.
Compliance copy rule set 164 is only associated with the email subclient 168, and not the file system subclient 166. Compliance copies generated according to compliance copy rule set 164 will therefore not include primary data 112A from the file system subclient 166. For instance, the organization may be under an obligation to store and maintain copies of email data for a particular period of time (e.g., 10 years) to comply with state or federal regulations, while similar regulations do not apply to file system data. Compliance copy rule set 164 is associated with the same tape library 108B and media agent 144B as disaster recovery copy rule set 162, although a different storage device or media agent could be used in other embodiments. Finally, compliance copy rule set 164 specifies that the copies it governs will be generated quarterly and retained for 10 years.
Secondary Copy Jobs
A logical grouping of secondary copy operations governed by a rule set and being initiated at a point in time may be referred to as a “secondary copy job” (and sometimes may be called a “backup job,” even though it is not necessarily limited to creating only backup copies). Secondary copy jobs may be initiated on demand as well. Steps 1-9 below illustrate three secondary copy jobs based on storage policy 148A.
Referring to FIG. 1E, at step 1, storage manager 140 initiates a backup job according to the backup copy rule set 160, which logically comprises all the secondary copy operations necessary to effectuate rules 160 in storage policy 148A every hour, including steps 1-4 occurring hourly. For instance, a scheduling service running on storage manager 140 accesses backup copy rule set 160 or a separate scheduling policy associated with client computing device 102 and initiates a backup job on an hourly basis. Thus, at the scheduled time, storage manager 140 sends instructions to client computing device 102 (i.e., to both data agent 142A and data agent 142B) to begin the backup job.
At step 2, file system data agent 142A and email data agent 142B on client computing device 102 respond to instructions from storage manager 140 by accessing and processing the respective subclient primary data 112A and 112B involved in the backup copy operation, which can be found in primary storage device 104. Because the secondary copy operation is a backup copy operation, the data agent(s) 142A, 142B may format the data into a backup format or otherwise process the data suitable for a backup copy.
At step 3, client computing device 102 communicates the processed file system data (e.g., using file system data agent 142A) and the processed email data (e.g., using email data agent 142B) to the first media agent 144A according to backup copy rule set 160, as directed by storage manager 140. Storage manager 140 may further keep a record in management database 146 of the association between media agent 144A and one or more of: client computing device 102, file system subclient 112A, file system data agent 142A, email subclient 1128, email data agent 142B, and/or backup copy 116A.
The target media agent 144A receives the data-agent-processed data from client computing device 102, and at step 4 generates and conveys backup copy 116A to disk library 108A to be stored as backup copy 116A, again at the direction of storage manager 140 and according to backup copy rule set 160. Media agent 144A can also update its index 153 to include data and/or metadata related to backup copy 116A, such as information indicating where the backup copy 116A resides on disk library 108A, where the email copy resides, where the file system copy resides, data and metadata for cache retrieval, etc. Storage manager 140 may similarly update its index 150 to include information relating to the secondary copy operation, such as information relating to the type of operation, a physical location associated with one or more copies created by the operation, the time the operation was performed, status information relating to the operation, the components involved in the operation, and the like. In some cases, storage manager 140 may update its index 150 to include some or all of the information stored in index 153 of media agent 144A. At this point, the backup job may be considered complete. After the 30-day retention period expires, storage manager 140 instructs media agent 144A to delete backup copy 116A from disk library 108A and indexes 150 and/or 153 are updated accordingly.
At step 5, storage manager 140 initiates another backup job for a disaster recovery copy according to the disaster recovery rule set 162. Illustratively this includes steps 5-7 occurring daily for creating disaster recovery copy 1168. Illustratively, and by way of illustrating the scalable aspects and off-loading principles embedded in system 100, disaster recovery copy 1168 is based on backup copy 116A and not on primary data 112A and 1128.
At step 6, illustratively based on instructions received from storage manager 140 at step 5, the specified media agent 1448 retrieves the most recent backup copy 116A from disk library 108A.
At step 7, again at the direction of storage manager 140 and as specified in disaster recovery copy rule set 162, media agent 144B uses the retrieved data to create a disaster recovery copy 1168 and store it to tape library 1088. In some cases, disaster recovery copy 1168 is a direct, mirror copy of backup copy 116A, and remains in the backup format. In other embodiments, disaster recovery copy 1168 may be further compressed or encrypted, or may be generated in some other manner, such as by using primary data 112A and 1128 from primary storage device 104 as sources. The disaster recovery copy operation is initiated once a day and disaster recovery copies 1168 are deleted after 60 days; indexes 153 and/or 150 are updated accordingly when/after each information management operation is executed and/or completed. The present backup job may be considered completed.
At step 8, storage manager 140 initiates another backup job according to compliance rule set 164, which performs steps 8-9 quarterly to create compliance copy 116C. For instance, storage manager 140 instructs media agent 144B to create compliance copy 116C on tape library 1088, as specified in the compliance copy rule set 164.
At step 9 in the example, compliance copy 116C is generated using disaster recovery copy 1168 as the source. This is efficient, because disaster recovery copy resides on the same secondary storage device and thus no network resources are required to move the data. In other embodiments, compliance copy 116C is instead generated using primary data 1128 corresponding to the email subclient or using backup copy 116A from disk library 108A as source data. As specified in the illustrated example, compliance copies 116C are created quarterly, and are deleted after ten years, and indexes 153 and/or 150 are kept up-to-date accordingly.
Exemplary Applications of Storage Policies—Information Governance Policies and Classification
Again referring to FIG. 1E, storage manager 140 may permit a user to specify aspects of storage policy 148A. For example, the storage policy can be modified to include information governance policies to define how data should be managed in order to comply with a certain regulation or business objective. The various policies may be stored, for example, in management database 146. An information governance policy may align with one or more compliance tasks that are imposed by regulations or business requirements. Examples of information governance policies might include a Sarbanes-Oxley policy, a HIPAA policy, an electronic discovery (e-discovery) policy, and so on.
Information governance policies allow administrators to obtain different perspectives on an organization's online and offline data, without the need for a dedicated data silo created solely for each different viewpoint. As described previously, the data storage systems herein build an index that reflects the contents of a distributed data set that spans numerous clients and storage devices, including both primary data and secondary copies, and online and offline copies. An organization may apply multiple information governance policies in a top-down manner over that unified data set and indexing schema in order to view and manipulate the data set through different lenses, each of which is adapted to a particular compliance or business goal. Thus, for example, by applying an e-discovery policy and a Sarbanes-Oxley policy, two different groups of users in an organization can conduct two very different analyses of the same underlying physical set of data/copies, which may be distributed throughout the information management system.
An information governance policy may comprise a classification policy, which defines a taxonomy of classification terms or tags relevant to a compliance task and/or business objective. A classification policy may also associate a defined tag with a classification rule. A classification rule defines a particular combination of criteria, such as users who have created, accessed or modified a document or data object; file or application types; content or metadata keywords; clients or storage locations; dates of data creation and/or access; review status or other status within a workflow (e.g., reviewed or un-reviewed); modification times or types of modifications; and/or any other data attributes in any combination, without limitation. A classification rule may also be defined using other classification tags in the taxonomy. The various criteria used to define a classification rule may be combined in any suitable fashion, for example, via Boolean operators, to define a complex classification rule. As an example, an e-discovery classification policy might define a classification tag “privileged” that is associated with documents or data objects that (1) were created or modified by legal department staff, or (2) were sent to or received from outside counsel via email, or (3) contain one of the following keywords: “privileged” or “attorney” or “counsel,” or other like terms. Accordingly, all these documents or data objects will be classified as “privileged.”
One specific type of classification tag, which may be added to an index at the time of indexing, is an “entity tag.” An entity tag may be, for example, any content that matches a defined data mask format. Examples of entity tags might include, e.g., social security numbers (e.g., any numerical content matching the formatting mask XXX-XX-XXXX), credit card numbers (e.g., content having a 13-16 digit string of numbers), SKU numbers, product numbers, etc. A user may define a classification policy by indicating criteria, parameters or descriptors of the policy via a graphical user interface, such as a form or page with fields to be filled in, pull-down menus or entries allowing one or more of several options to be selected, buttons, sliders, hypertext links or other known user interface tools for receiving user input, etc. For example, a user may define certain entity tags, such as a particular product number or project ID. In some implementations, the classification policy can be implemented using cloud-based techniques. For example, the storage devices may be cloud storage devices, and the storage manager 140 may execute cloud service provider API over a network to classify data stored on cloud storage devices.
Restore Operations from Secondary Copies
While not shown in FIG. 1E, at some later point in time, a restore operation can be initiated involving one or more of secondary copies 116A, 1168, and 116C. A restore operation logically takes a selected secondary copy 116, reverses the effects of the secondary copy operation that created it, and stores the restored data to primary storage where a client computing device 102 may properly access it as primary data. A media agent 144 and an appropriate data agent 142 (e.g., executing on the client computing device 102) perform the tasks needed to complete a restore operation. For example, data that was encrypted, compressed, and/or deduplicated in the creation of secondary copy 116 will be correspondingly rehydrated (reversing deduplication), uncompressed, and unencrypted into a format appropriate to primary data. Metadata stored within or associated with the secondary copy 116 may be used during the restore operation. In general, restored data should be indistinguishable from other primary data 112. Preferably, the restored data has fully regained the native format that may make it immediately usable by application 110.
As one example, a user may manually initiate a restore of backup copy 116A, e.g., by interacting with user interface 158 of storage manager 140 or with a web-based console with access to system 100. Storage manager 140 may accesses data in its index 150 and/or management database 146 (and/or the respective storage policy 148A) associated with the selected backup copy 116A to identify the appropriate media agent 144A and/or secondary storage device 108A where the secondary copy resides. The user may be presented with a representation (e.g., stub, thumbnail, listing, etc.) and metadata about the selected secondary copy, in order to determine whether this is the appropriate copy to be restored, e.g., date that the original primary data was created. Storage manager 140 will then instruct media agent 144A and an appropriate data agent 142 on the target client computing device 102 to restore secondary copy 116A to primary storage device 104. A media agent may be selected for use in the restore operation based on a load balancing algorithm, an availability based algorithm, or other criteria. The selected media agent, e.g., 144A, retrieves secondary copy 116A from disk library 108A. For instance, media agent 144A may access its index 153 to identify a location of backup copy 116A on disk library 108A, or may access location information residing on disk library 108A itself.
In some cases a backup copy 116A that was recently created or accessed, may be cached to speed up the restore operation. In such a case, media agent 144A accesses a cached version of backup copy 116A residing in index 153, without having to access disk library 108A for some or all of the data. Once it has retrieved backup copy 116A, the media agent 144A communicates the data to the requesting client computing device 102. Upon receipt, file system data agent 142A and email data agent 142B may unpack (e.g., restore from a backup format to the native application format) the data in backup copy 116A and restore the unpackaged data to primary storage device 104. In general, secondary copies 116 may be restored to the same volume or folder in primary storage device 104 from which the secondary copy was derived; to another storage location or client computing device 102; to shared storage, etc. In some cases, the data may be restored so that it may be used by an application 110 of a different version/vintage from the application that created the original primary data 112.
Exemplary Secondary Copy Formatting
The formatting and structure of secondary copies 116 can vary depending on the embodiment. In some cases, secondary copies 116 are formatted as a series of logical data units or “chunks” (e.g., 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, or 8 GB chunks). This can facilitate efficient communication and writing to secondary storage devices 108, e.g., according to resource availability. For example, a single secondary copy 116 may be written on a chunk-by-chunk basis to one or more secondary storage devices 108. In some cases, users can select different chunk sizes, e.g., to improve throughput to tape storage devices. Generally, each chunk can include a header and a payload. The payload can include files (or other data units) or subsets thereof included in the chunk, whereas the chunk header generally includes metadata relating to the chunk, some or all of which may be derived from the payload. For example, during a secondary copy operation, media agent 144, storage manager 140, or other component may divide files into chunks and generate headers for each chunk by processing the files. Headers can include a variety of information such as file and/or volume identifier(s), offset(s), and/or other information associated with the payload data items, a chunk sequence number, etc. Importantly, in addition to being stored with secondary copy 116 on secondary storage device 108, chunk headers can also be stored to index 153 of the associated media agent(s) 144 and/or to index 150 associated with storage manager 140. This can be useful for providing faster processing of secondary copies 116 during browsing, restores, or other operations. In some cases, once a chunk is successfully transferred to a secondary storage device 108, the secondary storage device 108 returns an indication of receipt, e.g., to media agent 144 and/or storage manager 140, which may update their respective indexes 153, 150 accordingly. During restore, chunks may be processed (e.g., by media agent 144) according to the information in the chunk header to reassemble the files.
Data can also be communicated within system 100 in data channels that connect client computing devices 102 to secondary storage devices 108. These data channels can be referred to as “data streams,” and multiple data streams can be employed to parallelize an information management operation, improving data transfer rate, among other advantages. Example data formatting techniques including techniques involving data streaming, chunking, and the use of other data structures in creating secondary copies are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,315,923, 8,156,086, and 8,578,120.
FIGS. 1F and 1G are diagrams of example data streams 170 and 171, respectively, which may be employed for performing information management operations. Referring to FIG. 1F, data agent 142 forms data stream 170 from source data associated with a client computing device 102 (e.g., primary data 112). Data stream 170 is composed of multiple pairs of stream header 172 and stream data (or stream payload) 174. Data streams 170 and 171 shown in the illustrated example are for a single-instanced storage operation, and a stream payload 174 therefore may include both single-instance (SI) data and/or non-SI data. A stream header 172 includes metadata about the stream payload 174. This metadata may include, for example, a length of the stream payload 174, an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is encrypted, an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is compressed, an archive file identifier (ID), an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is single instanceable, and an indication of whether the stream payload 174 is a start of a block of data.
Referring to FIG. 1G, data stream 171 has the stream header 172 and stream payload 174 aligned into multiple data blocks. In this example, the data blocks are of size 64 KB. The first two stream header 172 and stream payload 174 pairs comprise a first data block of size 64 KB. The first stream header 172 indicates that the length of the succeeding stream payload 174 is 63 KB and that it is the start of a data block. The next stream header 172 indicates that the succeeding stream payload 174 has a length of 1 KB and that it is not the start of a new data block. Immediately following stream payload 174 is a pair comprising an identifier header 176 and identifier data 178. The identifier header 176 includes an indication that the succeeding identifier data 178 includes the identifier for the immediately previous data block. The identifier data 178 includes the identifier that the data agent 142 generated for the data block. The data stream 171 also includes other stream header 172 and stream payload 174 pairs, which may be for SI data and/or non-SI data.
FIG. 1H is a diagram illustrating data structures 180 that may be used to store blocks of SI data and non-SI data on a storage device (e.g., secondary storage device 108). According to certain embodiments, data structures 180 do not form part of a native file system of the storage device. Data structures 180 include one or more volume folders 182, one or more chunk folders 184/185 within the volume folder 182, and multiple files within chunk folder 184. Each chunk folder 184/185 includes a metadata file 186/187, a metadata index file 188/189, one or more container files 190/191/193, and a container index file 192/194. Metadata file 186/187 stores non-SI data blocks as well as links to SI data blocks stored in container files. Metadata index file 188/189 stores an index to the data in the metadata file 186/187. Container files 190/191/193 store SI data blocks. Container index file 192/194 stores an index to container files 190/191/193. Among other things, container index file 192/194 stores an indication of whether a corresponding block in a container file 190/191/193 is referred to by a link in a metadata file 186/187. For example, data block B2 in the container file 190 is referred to by a link in metadata file 187 in chunk folder 185. Accordingly, the corresponding index entry in container index file 192 indicates that data block B2 in container file 190 is referred to. As another example, data block B1 in container file 191 is referred to by a link in metadata file 187, and so the corresponding index entry in container index file 192 indicates that this data block is referred to.
As an example, data structures 180 illustrated in FIG. 1H may have been created as a result of separate secondary copy operations involving two client computing devices 102. For example, a first secondary copy operation on a first client computing device 102 could result in the creation of the first chunk folder 184, and a second secondary copy operation on a second client computing device 102 could result in the creation of the second chunk folder 185. Container files 190/191 in the first chunk folder 184 would contain the blocks of SI data of the first client computing device 102. If the two client computing devices 102 have substantially similar data, the second secondary copy operation on the data of the second client computing device 102 would result in media agent 144 storing primarily links to the data blocks of the first client computing device 102 that are already stored in the container files 190/191. Accordingly, while a first secondary copy operation may result in storing nearly all of the data subject to the operation, subsequent secondary storage operations involving similar data may result in substantial data storage space savings, because links to already stored data blocks can be stored instead of additional instances of data blocks.
If the operating system of the secondary storage computing device 106 on which media agent 144 operates supports sparse files, then when media agent 144 creates container files 190/191/193, it can create them as sparse files. A sparse file is a type of file that may include empty space (e.g., a sparse file may have real data within it, such as at the beginning of the file and/or at the end of the file, but may also have empty space in it that is not storing actual data, such as a contiguous range of bytes all having a value of zero). Having container files 190/191/193 be sparse files allows media agent 144 to free up space in container files 190/191/193 when blocks of data in container files 190/191/193 no longer need to be stored on the storage devices. In some examples, media agent 144 creates a new container file 190/191/193 when a container file 190/191/193 either includes 100 blocks of data or when the size of the container file 190 exceeds 50 MB. In other examples, media agent 144 creates a new container file 190/191/193 when a container file 190/191/193 satisfies other criteria (e.g., it contains from approx. 100 to approx. 1000 blocks or when its size exceeds approximately 50 MB to 1 GB). In some cases, a file on which a secondary copy operation is performed may comprise a large number of data blocks. For example, a 100 MB file may comprise 400 data blocks of size 256 KB. If such a file is to be stored, its data blocks may span more than one container file, or even more than one chunk folder. As another example, a database file of 20 GB may comprise over 40,000 data blocks of size 512 KB. If such a database file is to be stored, its data blocks will likely span multiple container files, multiple chunk folders, and potentially multiple volume folders. Restoring such files may require accessing multiple container files, chunk folders, and/or volume folders to obtain the requisite data blocks.
Using Backup Data for Replication and Disaster Recovery (“Live Synchronization”)
There is an increased demand to off-load resource intensive information management tasks (e.g., data replication tasks) away from production devices (e.g., physical or virtual client computing devices) in order to maximize production efficiency. At the same time, enterprises expect access to readily-available up-to-date recovery copies in the event of failure, with little or no production downtime.
FIG. 2A illustrates a system 200 configured to address these and other issues by using backup or other secondary copy data to synchronize a source subsystem 201 (e.g., a production site) with a destination subsystem 203 (e.g., a failover site). Such a technique can be referred to as “live synchronization” and/or “live synchronization replication.” In the illustrated embodiment, the source client computing devices 202 a include one or more virtual machines (or “VMs”) executing on one or more corresponding VM host computers 205 a, though the source need not be virtualized. The destination site 203 may be at a location that is remote from the production site 201, or may be located in the same data center, without limitation. One or more of the production site 201 and destination site 203 may reside at data centers at known geographic locations, or alternatively may operate “in the cloud.”
The synchronization can be achieved by generally applying an ongoing stream of incremental backups from the source subsystem 201 to the destination subsystem 203, such as according to what can be referred to as an “incremental forever” approach. FIG. 2A illustrates an embodiment of a data flow which may be orchestrated at the direction of one or more storage managers (not shown). At step 1, the source data agent(s) 242 a and source media agent(s) 244 a work together to write backup or other secondary copies of the primary data generated by the source client computing devices 202 a into the source secondary storage device(s) 208 a. At step 2, the backup/secondary copies are retrieved by the source media agent(s) 244 a from secondary storage. At step 3, source media agent(s) 244 a communicate the backup/secondary copies across a network to the destination media agent(s) 244 b in destination subsystem 203.
As shown, the data can be copied from source to destination in an incremental fashion, such that only changed blocks are transmitted, and in some cases multiple incremental backups are consolidated at the source so that only the most current changed blocks are transmitted to and applied at the destination. An example of live synchronization of virtual machines using the “incremental forever” approach is found in U.S. Patent Application No. 62/265,339 entitled “Live Synchronization and Management of Virtual Machines across Computing and Virtualization Platforms and Using Live Synchronization to Support Disaster Recovery.” Moreover, a deduplicated copy can be employed to further reduce network traffic from source to destination. For instance, the system can utilize the deduplicated copy techniques described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,239,687, entitled “Systems and Methods for Retaining and Using Data Block Signatures in Data Protection Operations.”
At step 4, destination media agent(s) 244 b write the received backup/secondary copy data to the destination secondary storage device(s) 208 b. At step 5, the synchronization is completed when the destination media agent(s) and destination data agent(s) 242 b restore the backup/secondary copy data to the destination client computing device(s) 202 b. The destination client computing device(s) 202 b may be kept “warm” awaiting activation in case failure is detected at the source. This synchronization/replication process can incorporate the techniques described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/721,971, entitled “Replication Using Deduplicated Secondary Copy Data.”
Where the incremental backups are applied on a frequent, on-going basis, the synchronized copies can be viewed as mirror or replication copies. Moreover, by applying the incremental backups to the destination site 203 using backup or other secondary copy data, the production site 201 is not burdened with the synchronization operations. Because the destination site 203 can be maintained in a synchronized “warm” state, the downtime for switching over from the production site 201 to the destination site 203 is substantially less than with a typical restore from secondary storage. Thus, the production site 201 may flexibly and efficiently fail over, with minimal downtime and with relatively up-to-date data, to a destination site 203, such as a cloud-based failover site. The destination site 203 can later be reverse synchronized back to the production site 201, such as after repairs have been implemented or after the failure has passed.
Integrating with the Cloud Using File System Protocols
Given the ubiquity of cloud computing, it can be increasingly useful to provide data protection and other information management services in a scalable, transparent, and highly plug-able fashion. FIG. 2B illustrates an information management system 200 having an architecture that provides such advantages, and incorporates use of a standard file system protocol between primary and secondary storage subsystems 217, 218. As shown, the use of the network file system (NFS) protocol (or any another appropriate file system protocol such as that of the Common Internet File System (CIFS)) allows data agent 242 to be moved from the primary storage subsystem 217 to the secondary storage subsystem 218. For instance, as indicated by the dashed box 206 around data agent 242 and media agent 244, data agent 242 can co-reside with media agent 244 on the same server (e.g., a secondary storage computing device such as component 106), or in some other location in secondary storage subsystem 218.
Where NFS is used, for example, secondary storage subsystem 218 allocates an NFS network path to the client computing device 202 or to one or more target applications 210 running on client computing device 202. During a backup or other secondary copy operation, the client computing device 202 mounts the designated NFS path and writes data to that NFS path. The NFS path may be obtained from NFS path data 215 stored locally at the client computing device 202, and which may be a copy of or otherwise derived from NFS path data 219 stored in the secondary storage subsystem 218.
Write requests issued by client computing device(s) 202 are received by data agent 242 in secondary storage subsystem 218, which translates the requests and works in conjunction with media agent 244 to process and write data to a secondary storage device(s) 208, thereby creating a backup or other secondary copy. Storage manager 240 can include a pseudo-client manager 217, which coordinates the process by, among other things, communicating information relating to client computing device 202 and application 210 (e.g., application type, client computing device identifier, etc.) to data agent 242, obtaining appropriate NFS path data from the data agent 242 (e.g., NFS path information), and delivering such data to client computing device 202.
Conversely, during a restore or recovery operation client computing device 202 reads from the designated NFS network path, and the read request is translated by data agent 242. The data agent 242 then works with media agent 244 to retrieve, re-process (e.g., re-hydrate, decompress, decrypt), and forward the requested data to client computing device 202 using NFS.
By moving specialized software associated with system 200 such as data agent 242 off the client computing devices 202, the illustrative architecture effectively decouples the client computing devices 202 from the installed components of system 200, improving both scalability and plug-ability of system 200. Indeed, the secondary storage subsystem 218 in such environments can be treated simply as a read/write NFS target for primary storage subsystem 217, without the need for information management software to be installed on client computing devices 202. As one example, an enterprise implementing a cloud production computing environment can add VM client computing devices 202 without installing and configuring specialized information management software on these VMs. Rather, backups and restores are achieved transparently, where the new VMs simply write to and read from the designated NFS path. An example of integrating with the cloud using file system protocols or so-called “infinite backup” using NFS share is found in U.S. Patent Application No. 62/294,920, entitled “Data Protection Operations Based on Network Path Information.” Examples of improved data restoration scenarios based on network-path information, including using stored backups effectively as primary data sources, may be found in U.S. Patent Application No. 62/297,057, entitled “Data Restoration Operations Based on Network Path Information.”
Highly Scalable Managed Data Pool Architecture
Enterprises are seeing explosive data growth in recent years, often from various applications running in geographically distributed locations. FIG. 2C shows a block diagram of an example of a highly scalable, managed data pool architecture useful in accommodating such data growth. The illustrated system 200, which may be referred to as a “web-scale” architecture according to certain embodiments, can be readily incorporated into both open compute/storage and common-cloud architectures.
The illustrated system 200 includes a grid 245 of media agents 244 logically organized into a control tier 231 and a secondary or storage tier 233. Media agents assigned to the storage tier 233 can be configured to manage a secondary storage pool 208 as a deduplication store, and be configured to receive client write and read requests from the primary storage subsystem 217, and direct those requests to the secondary tier 233 for servicing. For instance, media agents CMA1-CMA3 in the control tier 231 maintain and consult one or more deduplication databases 247, which can include deduplication information (e.g., data block hashes, data block links, file containers for deduplicated files, etc.) sufficient to read deduplicated files from secondary storage pool 208 and write deduplicated files to secondary storage pool 208. For instance, system 200 can incorporate any of the deduplication systems and methods shown and described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,020,900, entitled “Distributed Deduplicated Storage System,” and U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2014/0201170, entitled “High Availability Distributed Deduplicated Storage System.”
Media agents SMA1-SMA6 assigned to the secondary tier 233 receive write and read requests from media agents CMA1-CMA3 in control tier 231, and access secondary storage pool 208 to service those requests. Media agents CMA1-CMA3 in control tier 231 can also communicate with secondary storage pool 208, and may execute read and write requests themselves (e.g., in response to requests from other control media agents CMA1-CMA3) in addition to issuing requests to media agents in secondary tier 233. Moreover, while shown as separate from the secondary storage pool 208, deduplication database(s) 247 can in some cases reside in storage devices in secondary storage pool 208.
As shown, each of the media agents 244 (e.g., CMA1-CMA3, SMA1-SMA6, etc.) in grid 245 can be allocated a corresponding dedicated partition 251A-2511, respectively, in secondary storage pool 208. Each partition 251 can include a first portion 253 containing data associated with (e.g., stored by) media agent 244 corresponding to the respective partition 251. System 200 can also implement a desired level of replication, thereby providing redundancy in the event of a failure of a media agent 244 in grid 245. Along these lines, each partition 251 can further include a second portion 255 storing one or more replication copies of the data associated with one or more other media agents 244 in the grid.
System 200 can also be configured to allow for seamless addition of media agents 244 to grid 245 via automatic configuration. As one illustrative example, a storage manager (not shown) or other appropriate component may determine that it is appropriate to add an additional node to control tier 231, and perform some or all of the following: (i) assess the capabilities of a newly added or otherwise available computing device as satisfying a minimum criteria to be configured as or hosting a media agent in control tier 231; (ii) confirm that a sufficient amount of the appropriate type of storage exists to support an additional node in control tier 231 (e.g., enough disk drive capacity exists in storage pool 208 to support an additional deduplication database 247); (iii) install appropriate media agent software on the computing device and configure the computing device according to a pre-determined template; (iv) establish a partition 251 in the storage pool 208 dedicated to the newly established media agent 244; and (v) build any appropriate data structures (e.g., an instance of deduplication database 247). An example of highly scalable managed data pool architecture or so-called web-scale architecture for storage and data management is found in U.S. Patent Application No. 62/273,286 entitled “Redundant and Robust Distributed Deduplication Data Storage System.”
The embodiments and components thereof disclosed in FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 2C, as well as those in FIGS. 1A-1H, may be implemented in any combination and permutation to satisfy data storage management and information management needs at one or more locations and/or data centers.
Automatic Failover of a Storage Manager
An information management system may include multiple client computing devices, storage managers, secondary storage computing devices, secondary storage devices, auxiliary storage computing devices, auxiliary storage devices, and other such devices. As the number of client computing devices increases within the information management system, it becomes increasingly important that the storage manager managing these client computing devices have a minimal amount of downtime. In the event that the storage manager should fail, a failover node in communicatively coupled to the storage manager may activate, and the failover node may select another storage manager to assume the duties and responsibilities of the failed storage manager. This process may be automated to reduce the recovery time objective (RTO) of the information management system. Furthermore, having multiple storage managers, which may be offline, synchronized to the active (or online) storage manager, ensures that the storage manager selected by the failover node has a recent (or most recent) copy of the information previously managed by the, now failed, storage manager.
FIG. 3A illustrates an information management system 302 configured to perform automatic failover of an active storage manager 308A, in accordance with an example embodiment. The information management system 302 may include multiple networks 304A-304C, where each network 304A-304C represents a subnet 306A-306C or cluster 306A-306C of various computing devices. In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the information management system 302 includes three networks 304A-304C, where each network 304A-304C represents a cluster 306A-306C of computing devices, and each cluster 306A-306C includes at least one storage manager 308A-308C.
In one embodiment, the storage managers 308A-308C are implemented similarly to the storage manger 140 illustrated in FIG. 1C. Accordingly, the storage manager 308A-308C may include one or more components illustrated in FIG. 1C, such as a management database that stores one or more information policies and/or an management index, a management agent, a jobs agent, or any other components discussed with reference to the storage manager 140. As discussed below with reference to FIG. 7 , the storage managers 308A-308C may also include additional components that facilitate the automatic failover of a storage manager.
A storage manager selected from the storage managers 308A-308C may be designated as the active storage manager. For example, the storage manager 308A may be designated as the active storage manager. The storage manager 308A may be initially designated as the active storage manager by an administrator or operator of the information management system 302. The active storage manager 308 may be responsible for implementing one or more information management policies and for managing the primary data and/or secondary copies of the primary data within the information management system 302. Although shown in subnet 306A, the active storage manager 308A may also communicate with one or more of the other devices in the subnets 306B-306C, such as the storage manager 308B, the storage manager 308C, the failover nodes 310B-310C, and the other computing devices.
In one embodiment, the active storage manager 308A backups and/or synchronizes one or more of its databases (e.g., the management database) to one or more of the other, offline storage managers 308B-308C. The active storage manager 308A may backup and/or synchronize one or more of its databases based on an information management policy, according to a predetermined schedule stored by the active storage manager 308A, and/or based on one or more predetermined conditions being satisfied. As one example, the active storage manager 308A may backup and/or synchronize its database with the other offline, storage managers 308B-308C once an hour, once a day, every other day, or according to any other schedule. In this regard, the active storage manager 308A is responsible for implementing one or more information management policies that instruct the active storage manager 308A when to back up and/or synchronize its one or more databases.
In another embodiment, one or more of the offline storage managers 308B-308C back up and/or synchronize their management databases (not shown) with the management database of the active storage manager 308A. In this instance, an offline storage manager 308B-308C may be in communication with the active storage manager 308A, but may not be directing the management of data for one or more client computing devices and/or secondary storage devices. An offline storage manager 308B-308C may retrieve data from one or more databases of the active storage manager 308A, and synchronize that data with its own database.
The information management system 302 may also include one or more failover nodes 310A-310C, where each failover node 310A-310C is associated with a corresponding storage manager 308A-308C. Furthermore, the one or more offline storage managers 308B-308C may also be categorized as failover nodes as the offline storage managers 308B-308C are activated in response to the active storage manager 308A entering a failed state. In one embodiment, a failover node 310A-310C is implemented similarly to a storage manager and/or a client computing device (e.g., having one or more processors, one or more computer-readable mediums, and so forth), but may also include additional components, applications, and/or data for facilitating the automatic failover of the active storage manager 308A. Additional details with regard to the components, applications, and/or data of a failover node 308A is further discussed with reference to FIG. 7 .
In general, a failover node 310A-310C is tasked with determining whether to perform a failover of the active storage manager (e.g., active storage manager 308A). Each storage manager 308A-308C may be associated with a corresponding failover node 310A-310C for redundancy to ensure that at least one failover node 310A-310C can perform the failover of the active storage manager. To determine whether to perform a failover, a failover node may first determine whether the active storage manager 308A is reachable (e.g., whether the active storage manager responds to one or more communications from the failover node). Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager 308A is not reachable, the failover node may then use or execute one or more failover rules to determine whether the active storage manager 308A is reachable and/or unavailable.
In determining whether the active storage manager 308A is unreachable, the failover node 310A may rely on the availability status of other devices in the information management system 302. The availability status of other devices in the information management system 302 may be used as a signal to the failover node 310A as to whether the storage manager 308A is unreachable by other devices or is simply unreachable by the failover node 310A. In one embodiment, selected devices of the information management 302 are designated as monitoring nodes, where each monitoring node is configured to communicate with each other monitoring node.
FIG. 3B illustrates the information management system 302 of FIG. 3A, where one or more devices have been designated as monitoring nodes, in accordance with an example embodiment. In one embodiment, an operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302 selects devices from among the devices of the information management system 302 to be monitoring nodes. The active storage manager 308A may maintain a database table (or other data structure) that identifies which of the devices have been designated as a monitoring node. The monitoring nodes may include any of the storage managers 308A-308C, any of the failover nodes 310A-310C, and one or more of the client computing devices selected from the subnets or clusters 306A-306C. The client computing devices that have been selected as monitoring nodes are illustrated with shading to distinguish from those client computing devices that have not been selected as monitoring nodes. To clarify, the first subnet or cluster 306A includes five monitoring nodes (e.g., three client computing devices, the active storage manager 308A, and the failover node 3010A), the second subnet or cluster 306B includes four monitoring nodes (e.g., two client computing devices, the offline storage manager 308B, and the failover node 310B), and the third subnet or cluster 306C includes four monitoring nodes (e.g., two client computing devices, the offline storage manager 308C, and the failover node 310C).
When a device is designated as a monitoring node, the active storage manager 308A may communicate a configuration file to the designated device that configures the designated device as a monitoring node. The configuration file may include one or more computer-executable instructions (e.g., one or more computer applications, scripts, etc.) that, when executed by the designated device, causes the designated device to instantiate a monitoring application or process that is configured to communicate with all other devices that been designated as monitoring nodes within the information management system 302. Similarly, the configuration file may configure the designated device to listen (e.g., via a process thread) for incoming messages from other monitoring nodes, and to respond to the messages from the other monitoring nodes. In one embodiment, a device configured as a monitoring node instantiates a listening process or thread that listens for incoming messages from other monitoring nodes; when the listening process or thread receives an incoming message from a monitoring node, the listening process or thread may communicate an acknowledgement message (e.g., an “ACK” message) to the monitoring node from which the incoming message originating. Where a response is received (e.g., an ACK message), the listening process or thread may update a data structure that indicates that the monitoring node was available. As discussed below with reference to FIGS. 5-7 , a monitoring node may also send out other messages to other monitoring nodes about the status of other monitoring nodes.
Referring to FIG. 4 is an illustration of communication pathways of a selected group of monitoring nodes illustrated in FIG. 3B, in accordance with an example embodiment. In FIG. 4 , three client computing devices 402-406 have been designated as monitoring nodes, and the active storage manager 308A and its associated failover node 310A are also monitoring nodes. Each device designated as a monitoring node is configured to communicate messages to each other monitoring node. In one embodiment, each monitoring node instantiates a session handler, where the session handler is an application and/or a process configured to send a status inquiry message to every other monitoring node. The session handler may wait for an acknowledgment message from a monitoring node to which the status inquiry message has been sent, where the session handler may wait for a predetermined time period for the acknowledgement message. Where the session handler receives the acknowledgement message, the session handler may update a data structure that indicates that the monitoring node to which the status inquiry message was sent is reachable and/or available. Where the session handler does not receive the acknowledgement message within the predetermined time period, the session handler may update a data structure indicating that the monitoring node to whom the status inquiry message was sent is not reachable and/or not available.
Although FIG. 4 illustrates that each monitoring node 402-406 communicates with every other monitoring node, the active storage manager 308A, and the failover node 310A, each monitoring node 402-406 may also communicate with every monitoring node, storage managers, and failover nodes of other subnets and/or clusters. For example, each monitoring node 402-406 may communicate with other monitoring nodes in the subnets and/or clusters 306B-306C. Furthermore, the monitoring nodes in the subnets and/or clusters 306A-306C may communicate with other storage managers and/or failover nodes, including the storage managers 308B-308C and the failover nodes 310B-310C. In addition, each of the storage managers 308A-308C and/or the failover nodes 310A-310C may communicate with other storage managers 308A-308C and/or failover nodes 310A-310C. Thus, in one embodiment, a monitoring node may be a client computing device, a storage manager, a failover node, and/or any other device within the information management system 302, and every monitoring node may be configured to communicate with all other monitoring nodes, including monitoring nodes separated by subnets and/or clusters.
FIG. 5 illustrates a client computing device 502 of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment. In one embodiment, the client computing device 502 includes one or more processor(s) 504, one or more communication interface(s) 506, one or more computer-readable medium(s) 508. The one or more computer-readable medium(s) 508 may include one or more application(s) 510 and data 512. The client computing device 502 may be designated as a monitoring node, such as monitoring node 402 illustrated in FIG. 4 .
The one or more processor(s) 504 may be any type of commercially available processor, such as processors available from the Intel Corporation, Advanced Micro Devices, Qualcomm, Texas Instruments, or other such processors. Further still, the one or more processor(s) 504 may include one or more special-purpose processors, such as a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The one or more processor(s) 504 may also include programmable logic or circuitry that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. Thus, once configured by such software, the one or more processor(s) 504 become specific machines (or specific components of a machine) uniquely tailored to perform the configured functions and are no longer general-purpose processors.
The one or more communication interface(s) 506 are configured to facilitate communications between the client computing device 502 and other devices within the information management system 302, such as other monitoring nodes, the storage managers 308A-308C, and/or the failover nodes 310A-310C. The one or more communication interface(s) 506 may include wired communication components, wireless communication components, cellular communication components, Near Field Communication (NFC) components, Bluetooth® components (e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy), Wi-Fi® components, and other communication components to provide communication via other modalities.
The client computing device 502 further includes one or more computer-readable medium(s) 508 that store one or more application(s) 510 and data 512 for monitoring and/or reporting the status of other monitoring nodes. The computer-readable medium(s) 508 may include one or more devices configured to store instructions and data temporarily or permanently and may include, but is not be limited to, random-access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), buffer memory, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media, cache memory, other types of storage (e.g., Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and/or any suitable combination thereof. The term “computer-readable medium” should be taken to include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, or associated caches and servers) able to store the application(s) 510 and the data 512. Accordingly, the computer-readable medium(s) 508 may be implemented as a single storage apparatus or device, or, alternatively and/or additionally, as a “cloud-based” storage systems or storage networks that include multiple storage apparatus or devices.
In one embodiment, the application(s) 510 are written in a computer-programming and/or scripting language. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, C, C++, C#, Java, JavaScript, Perl, Python, or any other computer programming and/or scripting language now known or later developed.
The client computing device 502 may include a variety of software such as an operating system, a web browser, a word processing application, an e-mail client, and so forth. A discussion of this software has been omitted for brevity. To explain the benefits provided by the disclosed systems and methods for performing an automatic failover of a storage manager, FIG. 5 illustrates that the client computing device 502 may include application(s) 510, which may include a session handler 514, a data agent 516, and a periodic thread 518.
The data agent 516 may be implemented similarly to the data agent 142 discussed with reference to FIG. 1D. More particularly, the data agent 516 be responsible for backing up primary data 522 which, as explained previously, may be an initial or first stored body of data generated by a source (e.g., the client computing device 502). The primary data 522 may be created substantially directly from data generated by a corresponding source application and may include files, directories, file system volumes, data blocks, extents, or any other hierarchies or organizations of data objects. The data agent 516 may back up the primary data 522 to one or more secondary storage devices (not shown) of the information management system 302.
The session handler 514 is configured to instantiate one or more periodic threads 518, and to manage the monitoring node statuses obtained from communicating the status inquiry message to one or more of the other monitoring nodes. The session handler 514 may instantiate a predetermined number of periodic threads 518, where each periodic thread 518 is configured to communicate with one or more of the other monitoring nodes. In addition, the session handler 514 may be tasked with maintaining and/or updating a data structure that includes one or more of the node statuses 520 based on whether a monitoring node responds to the status inquiry message communicated by the session handler 514.
In one embodiment, the session handler 514 communicates a status inquiry message to one or more of the designated monitoring nodes. A monitoring node may be configured to reply and/or send an acknowledgment message in response to the status inquiry message. Where a reply and/or an acknowledgment is received from a designated monitoring node, the session handler 514 may update a data structure that associates the designated monitoring nodes with their statuses 520. A node status may be a binary value, where the node status is selected from values corresponding to “available” or “not available.” As one example, a numerical value of “1” may indicate that a monitoring node replied and/or sent an acknowledgment message in response to the status inquiry message (e.g., the monitoring node is reachable and/or available), and a numerical value of “0” may indicate that a monitoring node did not reply and/or send an acknowledgement message (e.g., the monitoring node is not reachable and/or not available). The session handler 514 may record a monitoring node status as not being reachable and/or not available where the session handler 514 does not receive a reply and/or acknowledgment message within a predetermined time period after sending the status inquiry message to a corresponding monitoring node. The monitoring nodes to which the session handler 514 may send the status inquiry message may include, but are not limited to, the monitoring nodes designated by an operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302, the one or more storage managers 308A-308C (including any online and/or offline storage managers), the one or more failover nodes 310A-310C, and any other nodes in the information management system 302.
In addition to the status inquiry messages, a monitoring node may be configured to send one or more session messages to other monitoring nodes. In one embodiment, the client computing device 502 instantiates a periodic thread 518 configured to send a session message to each device designated as a monitoring node, where the session message includes the node statuses 520 obtained by the session handler 514. The periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every ten minutes, once an hour, etc.) and/or in response to updating the status of one or more of the monitoring nodes (e.g., an acknowledgment message has been received and/or a monitoring node has been determined as being nonresponsive). The periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message to each monitoring node regardless of whether the monitoring node is actually available (e.g., the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session message to a monitoring node that is offline). As explained previously, the periodic thread 518 may communicate the session messages to one or more of the client computing devices that been designated as monitoring nodes (e.g., the monitoring nodes shaded in FIG. 360 , the one or more storage managers 308A-308C, and/or the one or more failover nodes 310A-310C. The session handler 514 may also communicate the status inquiry message to other monitoring nodes not specifically illustrated in FIG. 3A and/or FIG. 3B, but illustrated in any of the other figures, including one or more secondary storage computing devices, auxiliary storage computing devices, or any other computing device.
To configure the client computing device 502 as a monitoring node, the client computing device 502 may be loaded with configuration data 524. The configuration data 524 may have instructions that configure the client computing device 502 to operate as a monitoring node and may include, among other things, instructions for obtaining and/or downloading the session handler 514, instructions for implementing the session handler 514, instructions for implementing the periodic thread 518, instructions for acting when an acknowledgement message is received, instructions for acting when an acknowledgement message is not received, timing data for the session handler 514 and/or the periodic thread 518, and other such configuration information that instruct the client computing device 502 to act as a monitoring node. The configuration data 524 may also include a data structure (e.g., a list, array, matrix, etc.), that identifies the other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 and how the client computing device 502 may communicate with the other monitoring nodes (e.g., an Internet Protocol (IP) address, port number, login credentials, authorization credentials, etc.).
In one embodiment, active storage manager 308A communicates the configuration data 524 to the client computing device 502. The active storage manager 308A may also communicate the configuration data 524 to one or more of the other devices in the information management system 302 including, but not limited to, another storage manager (e.g., offline storage managers 3086-308C), one or more of the failover nodes 310A-310C, one or more secondary storage computing devices, one or more auxiliary storage computing devices, or any other device in the information management system 302. The active storage manager 308A may communicate the configuration data 524 to the client computing device 502 in response to the client computing device 502 being designated as a monitoring node. The active storage manager 308A may also communicate the configuration data 524 to a device in the information management system 302 based on an instruction received by an operator or administrator interacting with the active storage manager 308A.
The configuration data may initially include a default or base set of instructions (e.g., timing intervals, destination nodes, actions to take in response to acknowledgement instructions, etc.), where the default or base set of instructions are generic to the devices of the information management system 302. As discussed with reference to FIG. 6 , the storage manager may include a generic set of configuration data that is then modified to accommodate a specific device (e.g., a client computing device, a storage manager, a failover node, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 5 , the configuration data 524 may be specific to the client computing device 502 and provide instructions and/or configuration information for the client computing device 502 to communicate with and/or interact with other monitoring nodes.
The data 512 may also include a data structure for storing and/or associating one or more node statuses 520 with corresponding monitoring nodes in the information management system 302. The node statuses 520 may be communicated by the client computing device 502 to one or more of the other monitoring nodes via the periodic thread 518. In one embodiment, the node statuses 520 identify whether a particular monitoring node is available or unavailable. In another embodiment, the node statuses 520 identify whether a particular node is available or unavailable for another monitoring node. In this other embodiment, the node statuses 520 may be implemented using an N×N array, where N is the number of monitoring nodes (including client computing devices, storage managers, secondary storage computing devices, etc.), and the intersections in the N×N array indicate whether a first monitoring node was available and/or reachable by a second monitoring node. The monitoring nodes may reach receive a session message to ensure that each monitoring node includes an up-to-date copy of the node statuses 520 within the information management system 302 in the event that one or more monitoring nodes become unavailable and/or unreachable.
FIG. 6 illustrates the active storage manager 308A of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment. In one embodiment, the storage manager 308A includes one or more processor(s) 604, and one or more communication interface(s) 606, and one or more computer-readable medium(s) 608. The one or more computer-readable medium(s) 608 may include one or more application(s) 610 and data 612. As with the client computing device 502, the storage manager 308A may be designated as a monitoring node. However, in some instances, the storage manager 308A may automatically be designated as a monitoring node when the storage manager 308A is communicatively coupled within the information management system 302.
The active storage manager 308A may be implemented similarly to the storage manager 140 illustrated in FIG. 1C. Accordingly, the active storage manager 308A may include one or more of the components of the storage manager 140 and implement similar functionalities. The active storage manager 308A may also include a management database (not shown) similar to the management database 146 illustrated in FIG. 1C. Furthermore, the active storage manager 308A may include the components, applications, and data illustrated in FIG. 6 in furtherance of the automatic failover mechanism discussed herein.
The one or more processor(s) 604 may be any type of commercially available processor, such as processors available from the Intel Corporation, Advanced Micro Devices, Qualcomm, Texas Instruments, or other such processors. Further still, the one or more processor(s) 604 may include one or more special-purpose processors, such as a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The one or more processor(s) 604 may also include programmable logic or circuitry that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. Thus, once configured by such software, the one or more processor(s) 604 become specific machines (or specific components of a machine) uniquely tailored to perform the configured functions and are no longer general-purpose processors.
The one or more communication interface(s) 606 are configured to facilitate communications between the storage manager 308A and other devices within the information management system 302, such as other monitoring nodes, the other storage managers 308B-308C, and/or the failover nodes 310A-310C. The one or more communication interface(s) 606 may include wired communication components, wireless communication components, cellular communication components, Near Field Communication (NFC) components, Bluetooth® components (e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy), Wi-Fi® components, and other communication components to provide communication via other modalities.
The storage manager 308A further includes one or more computer-readable medium(s) 608 that store one or more application(s) 610 and data 612 for configuring new devices in the information management system 302 as monitoring nodes, for monitoring and/or reporting the status of other monitoring nodes, and/or for synchronizing its management database with the other storage managers 308B-308C. The computer-readable medium(s) 608 may include one or more devices configured to store instructions and data temporarily or permanently and may include, but is not be limited to, random-access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), buffer memory, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media, cache memory, other types of storage (e.g., Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and/or any suitable combination thereof. The term “computer-readable medium” should be taken to include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, or associated caches and servers) able to store the application(s) 610 and the data 612. Accordingly, the computer-readable medium(s) 608 may be implemented as a single storage apparatus or device, or, alternatively and/or additionally, as a “cloud-based” storage systems or storage networks that include multiple storage apparatus or devices.
In one embodiment, the application(s) 610 are written in a computer-programming and/or scripting language. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, C, C++, C#, Java, JavaScript, Perl, Python, or any other computer programming and/or scripting language now known or later developed.
In one embodiment, the application(s) 610 include a session handler 614, a database synchronization application 616, one or more periodic threads 618, and a configuration application 620. The storage manager 308A may include other applications and/or components as discussed with reference to FIG. 1C, but these applications and/or components have been omitted for brevity.
The session handler 614 may be implemented similarly to the session handler 514 discussed with reference to the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 . Accordingly, the session handler 614 may be configured to send one or more status inquiry messages to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302, including those monitoring nodes that may be located at other subnets and/or clusters. Where a reply and/or an acknowledgment is received from a designated monitoring node, the session handler 614 may update a data structure that associates the designated monitoring nodes with their statuses 622. The monitoring nodes to which the session handler 614 may send the status inquiry message may include, but are not limited to, the monitoring nodes designated by an operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302, the offline storage managers 308B-308C, the one or more failover nodes 310A-310C, and any other nodes in the information management system 302.
In addition, the session handler 614 may instantiate one or more periodic threads 618, and manage the monitoring node statuses 622 obtained from communicating status inquiry messages to one or more of the other monitoring nodes. The one or more periodic threads 618 may be configured to communicate the monitoring node status 622 to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 via one or more session messages to the other monitoring nodes.
The database synchronization application 616 is configured to synchronize one or more databases of the active storage manager 308A with the other offline storage managers (e.g., storage managers 308B-308C). In one embodiment, the database synchronization application 616 determines differences between the one or more databases managed by the offline storage managers 308B-308C and the one or more databases managed by the active storage manager 308A. In this regard, the offline storage managers 308B-308C may mirror the active storage manager 308A, where the offline storage managers 308B-308C include a similar or identical configuration as the active storage manager 308A. In comparing the databases, the database synchronization application 616 may determine whether the offline databases include the same, or up-to-date, information as the active database (e.g., the management database 146). Where there are differences, the database synchronization application 616 updates and/or modifies the offline databases with the up-to-date information found in the active database. Thus, the offline databases represent identical, or nearly identical, copies of the active database.
The database synchronization application 616 may synchronize the active database with the offline database at periodic intervals, based on one or more information management policies stored in a management database, and/or based on one or more predetermined conditions being satisfied. For example, the database synchronization application 616 may synchronize the one or more databases of the active storage manager 308A on a daily basis (e.g., at the expiration of a 24-hour time period), when a new client computing device is added to the information management system 302 (e.g., a predetermined condition being satisfied), or when instructed to do so by an information management policy (e.g., the current day is a particular day established by the information management policy). By synchronizing its one or more databases with the other offline storage managers 308B-308C, the active storage manager 308A ensures that one of the offline storage managers can be brought online in the event of a failure, and that the offline storage manager includes the most recent information managed by the active storage manager 308A.
The application(s) 610 also include one or more periodic threads 618, which may be instantiated by the session handler 614. The one or more periodic threads 618 may be similar to the one or more periodic threads 518 instantiated by the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 . In this regard, the one or more periodic threads 618 may communicate one or more session messages to one or more of the designated monitoring nodes, where the one or more session messages including the node statuses 622.
The active storage manager 308A (or any of the other storage managers 308B-308C) may also include a configuration application 620 that sends device-specific configuration data 626 for causing the destination device to act as a monitoring node (in addition to performing its other functionalities). The device-specific configuration data 626 may be received by a monitoring node (e.g., the client computing device 502) as the configuration data 524. The device-specific configuration data 626 may be implemented as an executable script, where the destination device executes the executable script upon receiving the executable script. The device-specific configuration data 626 may be based on default configuration data 624, where the default configuration data 624 is modifiable depending on the destination device to which the device-specific configuration data 626 is being sent.
For example, an operator, user, or administrator of the information management system 302 may interact with the active storage manager 308A via a graphical user interface (e.g., a locally displayed graphical user interface, a web application displaying a web interface provided by the active storage manager 308A, etc.), and may select, via the graphical user interface, one or more devices in the information management system 302 to be monitoring nodes. Based on this selection, the active storage manager 308A may first generate device-specific configuration data 626 from the default configuration data 624 for each of the monitoring nodes. For example, the active storage manager 308A may first generate a list of the devices in the information management system 302 that are monitoring nodes, and this list may be incorporated into the device-specific configuration data 626.
Furthermore, different device types may modify the default configuration data 624 differently. For example, the default configuration data 624 may specify that a session handler is to send a status inquiry message every ten minutes. However, where the device being configured is a client computing device, the default configuration data 624 may be modified so that the session handler is to send a status inquiry message every hour. As another example, where the device being configured is a failover node, the default configuration data 624 may be modified so that the session handler is to send a status inquiry message every fifteen minutes. Other attributes or characteristics of the default configuration data 624 may also be modified, including the list of monitoring nodes to whom the status inquiry message is sent, the frequency of the status inquiry message, the values indicating whether a monitoring node is reachable and/or available, and any other attributes and/or characteristics used to configure a device as a monitoring node. In this manner, the default configuration data 624 can be used to support a wide variety of device types, and different types of devices can be added into the information management system 302 as monitoring nodes.
FIG. 7 illustrates a failover node 310A of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment. Although FIG. 7 illustrates that the failover node 310A is associated with the active storage manager 308A, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the components, applications, and data illustrated in FIG. 7 may also apply to other failover nodes, such as the failover nodes 310B-310C.
In one embodiment, the failover node 310A includes one or more processor(s) 704, one or more communication interface(s) 706, and one or more computer-readable medium(s) 708. The one or more computer-readable medium(s) 708 may include one or more application(s) 710 and data 712. As with the client computing device 502, the failover node 310A may be designated as a monitoring node. However, in some instances, the failover node 310A may automatically be designated as a monitoring node when the failover node 310A is communicatively coupled within the information management system 302.
The one or more processor(s) 704 may be any type of commercially available processor, such as processors available from the Intel Corporation, Advanced Micro Devices, Qualcomm, Texas Instruments, or other such processors. Further still, the one or more processor(s) 704 may include one or more special-purpose processors, such as a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The one or more processor(s) 704 may also include programmable logic or circuitry that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. Thus, once configured by such software, the one or more processor(s) 704 become specific machines (or specific components of a machine) uniquely tailored to perform the configured functions and are no longer general-purpose processors.
The one or more communication interface(s) 706 are configured to facilitate communications between the failover node 310A and other devices within the information management system 302, such as other monitoring nodes, the other storage managers 308A-308C, and/or the failover nodes 310B-310C. The one or more communication interface(s) 706 may include wired communication components, wireless communication components, cellular communication components, Near Field Communication (NFC) components, Bluetooth® components (e.g., Bluetooth® Low Energy), Wi-Fi® components, and other communication components to provide communication via other modalities.
The failover node 310A further includes one or more computer-readable medium(s) 708 that store one or more application(s) 710 and data 712 for determining whether to perform a failover of the active storage manager 308A. The computer-readable medium(s) 708 may include one or more devices configured to store instructions and data temporarily or permanently and may include, but is not be limited to, random-access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), buffer memory, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media, cache memory, other types of storage (e.g., Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)) and/or any suitable combination thereof. The term “computer-readable medium” should be taken to include a single medium or multiple media (e.g., a centralized or distributed database, or associated caches and servers) able to store the application(s) 710 and the data 712. Accordingly, the computer-readable medium(s) 708 may be implemented as a single storage apparatus or device, or, alternatively and/or additionally, as a “cloud-based” storage systems or storage networks that include multiple storage apparatus or devices.
In one embodiment, the application(s) 710 are written in a computer-programming and/or scripting language. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, C, C++, C#, Java, JavaScript, Perl, Python, or any other computer programming and/or scripting language now known or later developed.
In one embodiment, the application(s) 710 include a session handler 714, failover application 716, and one or more periodic thread(s) 718. The failover node 310A may include other applications or components found in a computing device, such as an operating system, display devices, human/machine interfaces (e.g., keyboard, mouse, etc.), and other such applications and/or components, and a discussion of these elements has been omitted for brevity and readability.
The session handler 714 may be implemented similarly to the session handler 514 discussed with reference to the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 . Accordingly, the session handler 714 may be configured to send one or more status inquiry messages to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302, including those monitoring nodes that may be located at other subnets and/or clusters. In addition, the session handler 714 may instantiate one or more periodic threads 718 and manage the monitoring node statuses 720 obtained from communicating status inquiry messages to one or more of the other monitoring nodes.
In one embodiment, the failover application 716 is configured to initiate a failover of the active storage manager 308A to one or more of the offline storage managers 310B-310C. To perform the failover of the active storage manager 308A, the failover application 716 may initially determine whether the storage manager 308A has entered a failover state. If the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308A is in a failover state, then the failover application 716 may then determine which of the offline storage managers 310B-310C to bring online (e.g., enter an active state) and replace the current storage manager 308A.
In determining whether the active storage manager 308A has entered a failover state, the failover application 716 may periodically analyze and/or monitor the node statuses 720. The node statuses 720 may be obtained by the session handler 714, and the one or more periodic threads 718 may communicate one or more session messages to one or more of the designated monitoring nodes that include the node statuses 720. In one embodiment, the one or more periodic threads 718 may be similar to the one or more periodic threads 518 instantiated by the client computing device 502 of FIG. 5 .
As the session handler 714 may send status inquiry messages to monitoring nodes and the active storage manager 308A, the node statuses 720 may include up-to-date information as to the status of the active storage manager 308A (e.g., based on whether the session handler 714 received an acknowledgement message from the active storage manager 710A). The failover application 716 may be configured to monitor and/or the analyze the node statuses 720 every ten minutes, every hour, every 24 hours, or at any other time period. An operator and/or administrator of the information management system 302 may also modify the time interval at which the failover application 716 checks the node statuses 720, such as by increasing or decreasing the time interval.
Where the failover application 716 initially determines that the node status of the active storage manager 308A is unavailable (e.g., the node status associated with the active storage manager 308A indicates that the active storage manager 308A is unavailable and/or unreachable), the failover application 716 may then apply one or more failover rule(s) 724 to the other node statuses 720 to determine whether the active storage manager 308A is, in fact, unavailable and/or unreachable. In some instances, the active storage manager 308A may not be responsive to the status inquiry messages of the failover node 310A. For example, the active storage manager 308A may be delayed in responding to the failover node 310A. Accordingly, the statuses of the node statuses 720 may indicate whether other monitoring nodes are able to reach the active storage manager 308A.
The failover rules 724 may specify and/or define when the active storage manager 308A is unavailable and/or unreachable by other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302. For example, one failover rule 724 may specify that the failover application 716 should first determine whether the network and/or subnet on which the active storage manager 308A is located is reachable by other monitoring nodes outside of the network and/or subnet. To perform this determination, the failover application 716 may analyze the responses of monitoring nodes within the same cluster and/or subnet as the active storage manager 308A relative to the status inquiry messages of monitoring nodes outside of the cluster and/or subnet of the active monitoring node 308A. As one example, the failover application 716 may analyze the responses of monitoring nodes within the first subnet 306A to status inquiry messages of monitoring nodes within the second subnet 306B and/or within the third subnet 306C. If a threshold number of the node statuses indicate that the monitoring nodes within the first subnet 3006A were unavailable and/or unreachable (e.g., more than 50% of the monitoring nodes), the first rule may specify that failover application 716 should determine that the subnet and/or cluster in which the active storage manager 308A is located is unreachable and/or unavailable.
In another embodiment, one or more of the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that a subnet and/or cluster is network accessible when at least one monitoring node within the subnet and/or cluster responds to a status inquiry message. Accordingly, in this example, the failover application 716 may determine that the first subnet 306A is network accessible when at least one monitoring node of the first subnet 306A responds to a status inquiry message sent by one of the monitoring nodes within the second subnet 306B and/or within the third subnet 306C.
In yet another embodiment, the failover rule(s) 724 may specify and/or define that the failover application 716 is to first attempt to contact the active storage manager 308A a predetermined number of times. Each time the failover application 716 sends a status inquiry message to the active storage manager 308A, the failover application 716 increases a counter (e.g., an attempt counter) that records the number of times the failover application 716 has tried to contact the active storage manager 308A. When the failover application 716 receives a response from the active storage manager 308A (e.g., receives an acknowledgement message), the attempt counter is reset (e.g., returned to a zero value). Where the attempt counter meets or exceeds a threshold value, the failover application 716 may determine that the active storage manager 308A is unreachable and/or non-responsive. The failover application 716 may attempt to contact the active storage manager 308A any number of times, such as two, three, four, five, or any other number of times.
In a similar embodiment, the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that the periodic thread(s) 718 should attempt to contact the active storage manager 308A and then store any responses (e.g., an acknowledgment message) as part of the node statuses 720, and the failover application 716 may be configured to check the node statuses 720 to determine whether a response was received from the active storage manager 308A in reply to the status inquiry message sent by the one or more periodic thread(s) 718. The failover rule(s) 724 may further specify that the failover application 716 is to check the node statuses 720 after waiting for a predetermined period of time, and to perform this check a predetermined number of times.
For example, the failover application 716 may be configured to check the node statuses 720 every 10 minutes to determine whether the active storage manager 308A is reachable and/or unavailable, and to perform this check three times. After the third time of determining that the node statuses 720 indicate that the active storage manager 308A is unreachable and/or unavailable, the failover application 716 may then proceed to enter a failover state and/or execute one or more of the other failover rule(s) 724. Determining that the active storage manager 308A is unavailable and/or unreachable by the failover node 310A may be a first step in entering a failover state as there may be any number of reasons why the active storage manager 308A is not responsive to the failover node 310A. Unnecessarily entering a failover state may lead to loss of data, excessive downtimes, loss of communications, or any other undesirable effects, so ensuring that the active storage manager 308A is, in fact, unavailable and/or unreachable may be a preferable course of action in implementing the failover rule(s) 724.
In addition to determining whether the active storage manager 308A is unavailable and/or unreachable by the failover node 310A, the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that the failover node 310A is to determine whether the active storage manager 308A is network accessible by other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302. Accordingly, one or more of the failover rule(s) 724 may specify whether the active storage manager 308A is network accessible and/or network inaccessible. For example, if a threshold number of monitoring nodes (including other storage managers and/or failover nodes) are unable to access and/or reach the active storage manager 308A, the failover rule(s) 724 may specify that the active storage manager 308A is inaccessible and/or unreachable. In one embodiment, the failover application 716 may perform this determination by referencing one or more of the node statuses 720 and determine whether the node statuses 720 indicate whether monitoring nodes outside of the subnet and/or cluster of the active storage manager 308A (e.g., monitoring nodes outside of the subnet and/or cluster 306A) have received an acknowledgment message from the active storage manager 308A in response to their own status inquiry messages. To recall, for a given monitoring node, that monitoring node may communicate a data structure that includes node status information about other nodes to which the given monitoring node sent a status inquiry message. Since each monitoring node is communicating this data structure to each other monitoring node, each monitoring node includes a set of node statuses 720 for monitoring nodes that have been communicating with each other. Therefore, by analyzing responses in the node statuses 720 between monitoring nodes that are outside the subnet 306A and monitoring nodes that are inside the subnet 306A, the failover application 716 determines whether the active storage manager 308A is network accessible.
The one or more failover rule(s) 724 may further specify that the failover application 716 is to obtain consensus from the other failover nodes in the information management system 302 that the active storage manager 308A is not network accessible. Accordingly, the failover application 716 may send a message or instruction to the other failover nodes 310B-310C that the other failover nodes 310B-310C are to determine whether the active storage manager 308A is network accessible. The other failover nodes 310B-310C may then perform one or more of the operations previously discussed in determining whether the active storage manager 308A is network accessible. After the other failover nodes 310B-310C have made their determinations, the other failover nodes 310B-310C may communicate their results to the failover node 310A. Where a consensus, majority, or other predetermined amount of failover nodes, confirm that the active storage manager is not network accessible, the failover application 716 may then determine that the active storage manager 308A is not network accessible. Where a consensus, majority, or other predetermined amount of failover nodes, confirm that the active storage manager is network accessible, the failover application 716 may then determine that the active storage manager 308A is network accessible, and may halt the failover of the active storage manager.
Where the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308A is not responsive and/or not network accessible, failover rule(s) 726 may specify that the failover application 716 is to enter a failover state. When the failover application 716 enters the failover state, the failover application 716 may determine which of the offline storage managers (e.g., offline storage managers 308B-308C) are to replace the active storage manager 308A and to become the new, active storage manager. In performing this determination, the failover application 716 may reference and/or analyze one or more database sync statuses 722. In one embodiment, the database sync statuses 722 include the status of database synchronizations between the active storage manager 308A and other storage managers (e.g., offline storage managers 308B-308C). Each time the active storage manager 308A completes a synchronization with another storage manager, the active storage manager 308A may send a message to the failover node 310A that updates the database sync status 722 with updated synchronization information. The synchronization information may include, but is not limited to, the source storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308A), the destination storage manager (e.g., an offline storage manager 308B-308C), the database involved in the synchronization, the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization completed, the amount of elapsed time in performing the synchronization, the date on which the synchronization started and/or ended, and other such database synchronization information and/or various combinations thereof. Additionally, and/or alternatively, a target storage manager may send a message to the failover node 310A that informs the failover node 310A of the database synchronization and updates the database sync statuses 722. In a further embodiment, each storage manager may send a database synchronization message to their corresponding failover node (e.g., the offline storage manager 308B sends a database synchronization message to its failover node 310B and the offline storage manager 308C sends a database synchronization message to its failover node 310C).
By referencing the database sync statuses 722, the failover node 310A associated with the non-responsive, active storage manager 308A determines which offline storage manager was most recently updated. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the failover node 310A selects a storage manager with the most recent database sync status 722 to be the new active storage manager. The failover node 310A may select the storage manager with the most recent database sync status 722 to be the new active storage manager because it is likely that this storage manager has a most up-to-date copy of the databases managed by the previous, non-responsive storage manager 308A. In the event that there are two or more storage managers that have database sync statuses 722 that are identical, the failover application 310A may select the storage manager that is listed first in the database sync statuses 722. In an alternative embodiment, where there are two or more storage managers that have database sync statuses 722 that are identical, the failover application 716 may randomly select a storage manager to be the new, active storage manager.
After selecting a storage manager to be a new, active storage manager (e.g., now-active storage manager 308B), the active storage manager 308B may send a message to managed devices (e.g., devices in the various subnets 306A-306C) that the devices are to receive and/or follow instructions from the active storage manager 308B. The storage manager 308B then performs the operations previously performed by the now-offline storage manager 308A, and the failover node 3108 associated with the active storage manager 308B begins performing the operations previously performed by the failover node 310A. In this way, storage manager 308B becomes the new, active storage manager for the information management system 302 where the failover node 310A determines that the storage manager 308A has entered a failover state.
FIG. 8 illustrates a messaging diagram 802 for updating monitoring node statuses of the information management system 302 of FIG. 3A, in accordance with an example embodiment. The messaging diagram 802 is discussed with reference to the active storage manager 308A, but the messaging diagram 802 may be implemented by other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302, such as the monitoring nodes 402-406 highlighted in FIG. 4 .
As shown in FIG. 8 , and in one embodiment, the session handler 614 receives various messages from the other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302. These messages include, but are not limited to, status inquiry messages, database synchronization messages, acknowledgment messages, session messages, and any other message previously described. The session handler 614 may update one or more node statuses (e.g., the node statuses 622 illustrated in FIG. 6 ), and may propagate the node statuses to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302 via one or more periodic threads 618. As explained above, the one or more periodic threads 618 may send the session messages to other monitoring nodes, where the one or more periodic threads may be configured to repeatedly send the session messages at predetermined time intervals.
FIG. 8 further illustrates that a failover process may be initiated by one or more of the failover nodes 310A-310C of the information management system 302. As discussed above, the failover process may first include determining whether the active storage manager is available and/or reachable. Where the active storage manager is not available and/or reachable, the failover process may further include determining whether the active storage manager is network accessible. Where the active storage manager is not network accessible, a designated failover node (e.g., the failover node associated with the active storage manager) may then determine that the active storage manager is in a failover state, and the designated failover node may then perform a failover of the active storage manager. As explained previously, performing the failover may include determining which of the offline storage managers has been most recently synchronized with the previous active storage manager, and then assigning the determined offline storage manager as the new, active storage manager. Additional details regarding the failover process are discussed with reference to FIGS. 9A-9B and FIGS. 10A-10B.
FIGS. 9A-9B illustrate a method 902, in accordance with an example embodiment, for updating node statuses within the information management system 302 of FIG. 3A and determining whether to enter a failover state of an active storage manager 308A. The method 902 may be implemented by one or more of the devices illustrated in FIGS. 3A-3B, and is discussed by way of reference thereto.
As an initial manner, each of the monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 may perform the method 902 (labeled as Operation 904). The various branches off of Operation 904 may each be performed simultaneously and/or in parallel. A first operation may include generating a session message by one or more of the periodic threads, where the session message may include one or more node statuses (Operation 906). In some instances, the session message may include zero or NULL values for some of the node statuses, as not every monitoring node will have a corresponding node status when the session messages are first communicated. After an initial set of status inquiry messages are communicated by the session handler to the various monitoring nodes, the node statuses may include non-zero or non-NULL values for the node statuses. The session message is then communicated to one or more of the monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 (Operation 908).
The session handler may then monitor for one or more acknowledgement messages to the session message (Operation 910). The session handler may monitor for the one or more acknowledgment messages for a predetermined period of time (e.g., a timeout value). An acknowledgment from a monitoring node to the session message may indicate that the monitoring node to which the session message was sent is reachable and/or accessible. Accordingly, where an acknowledgement message is received (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 910), the session handler may update the node status corresponding to the monitoring node that communicated the acknowledgment as being reachable and/or accessible (Operation 914). Where an acknowledgment message is not received (e.g., not received on or before the expiration of the timeout value), the session handler may update the node statuses to indicate that the monitoring node that did not send the acknowledgment message is not available and/or not accessible (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 912). The method 902 then returns to Operation 904 where the session handler iteratively performs Operations 906-914. In addition, the monitoring node may periodically communicate status inquiry messages to inquire as to the status of other monitoring nodes, where an acknowledgement to the status inquiry message is used to update the corresponding node status.
Simultaneously and/or in parallel, the monitoring node may also perform Operations 916-930. At Operation 916, and in one embodiment, the monitoring node determines whether it is a failover node (Operation 916). Where the monitoring node is not a failover node (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 916), the method 902 returns back to Operation 904. Where the monitoring node is a failover node (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 916), the method 902 may proceed to Operation 918, where the given monitoring node determines whether the active storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308A) is accessible and/or reachable (e.g., determining whether the active storage manager 308A responds to status inquiry messages). With regard to Operation 916, the monitoring node may be configured to skip Operation 916 where the monitoring node is a failover node and, thus, does not need to perform the determination of whether it is a failover node. Furthermore, Operations 916-930 may not be performed where the monitoring node is a device or component other than a failover node (e.g., a client computing device, a secondary storage computing device, and so forth).
The failover node may perform Operation 918 periodically at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 10 minutes, every 30 minutes, every hour, etc.), and the predetermined time intervals may be configured by an administrator and/or operator of the information management system 302.
As explained above, and in one embodiment, determining whether the active storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308A), is accessible and/or reachable may include sending a status inquiry message to the active storage manager via the session handler 714. Should the failover node not receive an acknowledgement message from the active storage manager (e.g., on and/or after a predetermined time period elapses), the failover node may determine that the active storage manager is not reachable and/or accessible. In another embodiment, determining whether the active storage manager is accessible and/or reachable may include referencing the node statuses 720 and determining whether the node status corresponding to the active storage manager 308A indicates that the active storage manager 308A is accessible and/or reachable. Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is reachable and/or accessible (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 918), the method 902 may proceed to the “END” label, but one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that Operations 916-918 may be repeated by the failover node at predetermined time intervals. Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is not reachable and/or accessible (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 918), the method 902 may proceed to Operation 920 on FIG. 9B.
At Operation 920, the failover node determines whether a predetermined retry threshold has been reached in attempting to contact the active storage manager (Operation 920). For example, the failover node may be configured to attempt to contact the active storage manager three times where, after the third attempt, the failover node proceeds to Operation 922. A retry threshold may be established for the failover node because, in some instances, the active storage manager may be delayed in responding or may be performing processes that detract from its ability to effectively respond to status inquiry messages. Accordingly, it may be preferable not to perform a failover simply because the active storage manager is busy with other tasks; thus, having a retry threshold ensures that the failover is performed where there is a relatively high probability that the active storage manager is, in fact, in a failover state and not unavailable due to other reasons.
Where the number of retries has not been reached (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 920), the failover part of the method 902 effectively ends, but the failover node may be configured to return to Operation 916 and/or Operation 918 on FIG. 9A. Where the number of retries has been reached (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 920), the method 902 proceeds to Operation 922.
At Operation 922, the failover node determines whether the active storage manager is network accessible. As explained previously, the failover node may determined whether the active storage manager is network accessible by analyzing the node statuses and applying one or more failover rule(s) using the node statuses. The application of the one or more failover rule(s) may result in the failover node determining whether the active storage manager is or is not available. Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is not network accessible (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 922), the failover part of the method 902 effectively ends, but the failover node may be configured to return to Operation 916 and/or Operation 918 on FIG. 9A. Where the failover node determines that the active storage manager is network accessible (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 922), the method 902 proceeds to Operation 924.
At Operation 924, the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers should be used for failover (Operation 924). As explained above, the active storage manager may be synchronizing one or more of its databases with the offline storage managers, and then updating a database sync status (e.g., the database sync status 722) managed by the failover node. The database sync status may include various synchronization information such as the source storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308A), the destination storage manager (e.g., an offline storage manager 308B-308C), the database involved in the synchronization, the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization completed, the amount of elapsed time in performing the synchronization, the date on which the synchronization started and/or ended, and other such database synchronization information and/or various combinations thereof. By reference the database sync status, the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers was most recently synchronized with the active storage manager.
The failover node may then determine whether the selected offline storage manager should be used for the failover of the active storage manager (Operation 926). In one embodiment, the failover node may perform this determination by communicating a status inquiry message to the offline storage manager to confirm that the offline storage manager is network accessible. Additionally, and/or alternatively, the failover node may reference the node statuses (e.g., the node statuses 720) to determine the last known node status of the selected offline storage manager. Should the node status indicate that the offline storage manager is not reachable and/or not accessible, then the failover node may determine that the selected storage manager should not be used for failover (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 926). Where the failover node determines that the selected storage manager should not be used for failover, the method 902 may return to Operation 924, where the failover node then selects a different, offline storage manager for failover. Alternatively, where the failover node determines that the offline storage manager is reachable and/or accessible (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 926), the failover node may instruct the offline storage manager to activate (Operation 928).
At Operation 928, the selected, offline storage manager activates and becomes the new, active storage manager. In this regard, the new, active storage manager may inform the other nodes in the information management system 302 that the other nodes should accept directions and/or instructions from the new, active storage manager (Operation 930). The new, active storage manager then assumes the duties and responsibilities of the previous, active storage manager. In this fashion, the method 902 implements a failover process that occurs automatically, ensures minimal downtime of a storage manager, and reduces the potential for data loss within the information management system 302.
FIGS. 10A-10B illustrate a method 1002, in accordance with an example embodiment, for activating a failover node of the information management system 302 illustrated in FIG. 3A. The method 1002 may be implemented by one or more of the devices illustrated in FIGS. 3A-7 and is discussed by way of reference thereto. In addition, one or more of the operations discussed with reference to FIGS. 10A-10B may also be implemented additionally and/or alternatively to one or more of the operations of the method 902 discussed with reference to FIGS. 9A-9B.
Referring initially to FIG. 10A, a failover node may instantiate a failover application (e.g., failover application 716) for performing a failover of an active storage manager within the information management system 302 (Operation 1004). As explained with reference to FIG. 7 , the failover application 716 may be configured to determine whether the active storage manager has entered a failover state and, if so, to perform a failover of the active storage manager.
At Operation 1006, the failover node may receive one or more session messages from other monitoring nodes in the information management system 302 (Operation 1006). The one or more session messages may include node status information for one or more of the nodes within the information management system 302. The session handler 714 may update one or more node statuses 720 based on the node status information contained within the session message (Operation 1008). As explained previously, the node status information may indicate whether the active storage manager is responsive to the failover node and/or to other monitoring nodes within the information management system 302. The failover application 716 may then apply one or more of the failover rule(s) 724 to the node statuses 720 (Operation 1010).
At Operation 1012, the failover application 716 determines whether there is a failover condition based on result of applying the one or more failover rule(s) 724 (Operation 1012). In determining whether a failover condition exists, the failover application 716 may determine whether the active storage manager (e.g., active storage manager 308A) is reachable and/or accessible and, if not, whether the active storage manager is network reachable and/or accessible. Furthermore, the failover application 716 may request that other failover nodes in the information management system 302 determine whether the actives storage manager is network accessible and/or reachable.
Based on the application of the one or more failover rule(s) 724, the failover application 716 determines whether the active storage manager 308A has entered a failover state. Where the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308A has not entered a failover state (e.g., the “NO” branch of Operation 1012), the method 1002 may return to Operation 1006). Alternatively, where the failover application 716 determines that the active storage manager 308A has entered a failover state (e.g., the “YES” branch of Operation 1012), the method 1002 then proceeds to Operation 1014.
At Operation 1014, the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers should be used for failover (Operation 1014). As explained above, the active storage manager may be synchronizing one or more of its databases with the offline storage managers, and then updating a database sync status (e.g., the database sync status 722) managed by the failover node. The database sync status may include various synchronization information such as the source storage manager (e.g., the active storage manager 308A), the destination storage manager (e.g., an offline storage manager 308B-308C), the database involved in the synchronization, the time at which the synchronization started, the time at which the synchronization completed, the amount of elapsed time in performing the synchronization, the date on which the synchronization started and/or ended, and other such database synchronization information and/or various combinations thereof. By reference the database sync status, the failover node determines which of the offline storage managers was most recently synchronized with the active storage manager. The failover node then selects the offline storage manager that has been most recently synchronized with the active storage manager to be the new, active storage manager (Operation 1016).
At Operation 1018, the selected, offline storage manager activates and becomes the new, active storage manager. In this regard, the new, active storage manager may inform the other nodes in the information management system 302 that the other nodes should accept directions and/or instructions from the new, active storage manager (Operation 1020). The new, active storage manager then assumes the duties and responsibilities of the previous, active storage manager. In this fashion, the method 1002 implements a failover process that occurs automatically, ensures minimal downtime of a storage manager, and reduces the potential for data loss within the information management system 302.
In this manner, the foregoing description provides an information management system that implements an automatic failover of a storage manager and leverages distributed computing techniques to determine whether the storage manager has actually failed and, if so, which potential offline storage manager should assume the duties of the failed storage manager. By using monitoring nodes distributed across various networks and/or subnets, a designated failover node can determine whether an active storage manager has entered a failover state and is non-responsive to any monitoring node, or whether the active storage manager is simply non-responsive to a particular monitoring node or failover node. The systems, methods, techniques, and operations disclosed herein provide a technological advancement in the field of data backup and recovery operations. These techniques ensure that potential downtime of a computing system is minimized and that a potential failed state of an active storage manager is an actual failed state, and not merely a false positive.
Example Embodiments
Some example enumerated embodiments of the present invention are recited in this section in the form of methods, systems, and non-transitory computer-readable media, without limitation. In one embodiment, this disclosure provides a method for determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the method comprising assigning selected nodes of a plurality of nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes to obtain a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node. The method also includes receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, and generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages. The method further includes transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes and determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message. The method additionally includes activating a failover node selected from the plurality of failover nodes to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred, and instructing, by the activated second storage manager, that the plurality of monitoring nodes is to communicate with the activated second storage manager instead of the first storage manager, wherein the activated second storage manager performs the functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
In another embodiment of the method, the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to process the received plurality of status messages, and update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
In a further embodiment of the method, the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
In yet another embodiment of the method, the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
In yet a further embodiment of the method, each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and the method further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is the most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to the other corresponding databases.
In another embodiment of the method, the method further comprises verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
In a further embodiment of the method, the method includes sending a configuration file to each selected node of the plurality of nodes that have been selected to be monitoring nodes, and automatically configuring each of the selected nodes to be a monitoring node based on the sent configuration file.
This disclosure also describes a system that determines whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the system comprising one or more non-transitory, computer-readable mediums having computer-executable instructions stored thereon, and one or more processors that, having executed the computer-executable instructions, configure the system to perform a plurality of operations. The plurality of operations includes assigning selected nodes of a plurality of nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes to obtain a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node. The plurality of operations also includes receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes. The plurality of operations further includes generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages. The plurality of operations additionally includes transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes, and determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message. The plurality of operations also includes activating a failover node selected from the plurality of failover nodes to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred, and instructing, by the activated second storage manager, that the plurality of monitoring nodes is to communicate with the activated second storage manager instead of the first storage manager, wherein the activated second storage manager performs the functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
In another embodiment of the system, the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to process the received plurality of status messages, and update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
In a further embodiment of the system, the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
In yet another embodiment of the system, the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
In yet a further embodiment of the system, each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and the plurality of operations further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is the most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to the other corresponding databases.
In another embodiment of the system, the plurality of operations further comprises verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
In a further embodiment of the system, the plurality of operations further comprises sending a configuration file to each selected node of the plurality of nodes that have been selected to be monitoring nodes, and automatically configuring each of the selected nodes to be a monitoring node based on the sent configuration file.
This disclosure further describes a non-transitory, computer-readable medium having computer-executable instructions stored thereon that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to perform a plurality of operations determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the plurality of operations comprising assigning selected nodes of a plurality of nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes to obtain a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node. The plurality of operations further includes receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, and generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages. The plurality of operations also includes transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes, and determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message. The plurality of operations additionally includes activating a failover node selected from the plurality of failover nodes to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred, and instructing, by the activated second storage manager, that the plurality of monitoring nodes is to communicate with the activated second storage manager instead of the first storage manager, wherein the activated second storage manager performs the functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
In another embodiment of the non-transitory, computer-readable medium, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to process the received plurality of status messages, and update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
In a further embodiment of the non-transitory, computer-readable medium, the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node of the assigned plurality of monitoring nodes.
In yet another embodiment of the non-transitory, computer-readable medium, the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
In yet a further embodiment of the non-transitory, computer-readable medium, each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and the plurality of operations further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is the most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to the other corresponding databases.
In another embodiment of the non-transitory, computer-readable medium, the plurality of operations further comprises verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
This disclosure also provides for a method for determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the method comprising receiving, by a first failover node, a session message comprising status information for a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein each monitoring node is configured to transmit status information to each other monitoring node, wherein the first failover node is a backup node for a storage manager that manages information storage policies for the information management system. The method may also include determining, by the first failover node, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the received session message. The method may further include verifying, by the first failover node, that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that a second failover node confirm that the failover condition has occurred based on the received session message and activating the first failover node based on verification that the failover condition has occurred. The method may also include instructing, by the first failover node, each monitoring node of the plurality of monitoring nodes to communicate with the first failover node instead of the storage manager, wherein the first failover node performs the functionalities of the storage manager in the information management system.
This disclosure also provides for a system that determines whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the system comprising one or more non-transitory, computer-readable mediums having computer-executable instructions stored thereon, and one or more processors that, having executed the computer-executable instructions, configure the system to perform a plurality of operations that include receiving, by a first failover node, a session message comprising status information for a plurality of monitoring nodes, wherein each monitoring node is configured to transmit status information to each other monitoring node, wherein the first failover node is a backup node for a storage manager that manages information storage policies for the information management system. The plurality of operations may also include determining, by the first failover node, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the received session message. The plurality of operations may further include verifying, by the first failover node, that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that a second failover node confirm that the failover condition has occurred based on the received session message and activating the first failover node based on verification that the failover condition has occurred. The plurality of operations may also include instructing, by the first failover node, each monitoring node of the plurality of monitoring nodes to communicate with the first failover node instead of the storage manager, wherein the first failover node performs the functionalities of the storage manager in the information management system.
Terminology
Conditional language, such as, among others, “can,” “could,” “might,” or “may,” unless specifically stated otherwise, or otherwise understood within the context as used, is generally intended to convey that certain embodiments include, while other embodiments do not include, certain features, elements and/or steps. Thus, such conditional language is not generally intended to imply that features, elements and/or steps are in any way required for one or more embodiments or that one or more embodiments necessarily include logic for deciding, with or without user input or prompting, whether these features, elements and/or steps are included or are to be performed in any particular embodiment.
Unless the context clearly requires otherwise, throughout the description and the claims, the words “comprise,” “comprising,” and the like are to be construed in an inclusive sense, as opposed to an exclusive or exhaustive sense, i.e., in the sense of “including, but not limited to.” As used herein, the terms “connected,” “coupled,” or any variant thereof means any connection or coupling, either direct or indirect, between two or more elements; the coupling or connection between the elements can be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. Additionally, the words “herein,” “above,” “below,” and words of similar import, when used in this application, refer to this application as a whole and not to any particular portions of this application. Where the context permits, words using the singular or plural number may also include the plural or singular number respectively. The word “or” in reference to a list of two or more items, covers all of the following interpretations of the word: any one of the items in the list, all of the items in the list, and any combination of the items in the list. Likewise the term “and/or” in reference to a list of two or more items, covers all of the following interpretations of the word: any one of the items in the list, all of the items in the list, and any combination of the items in the list.
In some embodiments, certain operations, acts, events, or functions of any of the algorithms described herein can be performed in a different sequence, can be added, merged, or left out altogether (e.g., not all are necessary for the practice of the algorithms). In certain embodiments, operations, acts, functions, or events can be performed concurrently, e.g., through multi-threaded processing, interrupt processing, or multiple processors or processor cores or on other parallel architectures, rather than sequentially.
Systems and modules described herein may comprise software, firmware, hardware, or any combination(s) of software, firmware, or hardware suitable for the purposes described. Software and other modules may reside and execute on servers, workstations, personal computers, computerized tablets, PDAs, and other computing devices suitable for the purposes described herein. Software and other modules may be accessible via local computer memory, via a network, via a browser, or via other means suitable for the purposes described herein. Data structures described herein may comprise computer files, variables, programming arrays, programming structures, or any electronic information storage schemes or methods, or any combinations thereof, suitable for the purposes described herein. User interface elements described herein may comprise elements from graphical user interfaces, interactive voice response, command line interfaces, and other suitable interfaces.
Further, processing of the various components of the illustrated systems can be distributed across multiple machines, networks, and other computing resources. Two or more components of a system can be combined into fewer components. Various components of the illustrated systems can be implemented in one or more virtual machines, rather than in dedicated computer hardware systems and/or computing devices. Likewise, the data repositories shown can represent physical and/or logical data storage, including, e.g., storage area networks or other distributed storage systems. Moreover, in some embodiments the connections between the components shown represent possible paths of data flow, rather than actual connections between hardware. While some examples of possible connections are shown, any of the subset of the components shown can communicate with any other subset of components in various implementations.
Embodiments are also described above with reference to flow chart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems) and computer program products. Each block of the flow chart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of blocks in the flow chart illustrations and/or block diagrams, may be implemented by computer program instructions. Such instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, specially-equipped computer (e.g., comprising a high-performance database server, a graphics subsystem, etc.) or other programmable data processing apparatus to produce a machine, such that the instructions, which execute via the processor(s) of the computer or other programmable data processing apparatus, create means for implementing the acts specified in the flow chart and/or block diagram block or blocks. These computer program instructions may also be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including instruction means which implement the acts specified in the flow chart and/or block diagram block or blocks. The computer program instructions may also be loaded to a computing device or other programmable data processing apparatus to cause operations to be performed on the computing device or other programmable apparatus to produce a computer implemented process such that the instructions which execute on the computing device or other programmable apparatus provide steps for implementing the acts specified in the flow chart and/or block diagram block or blocks.
Any patents and applications and other references noted above, including any that may be listed in accompanying filing papers, are incorporated herein by reference. Aspects of the invention can be modified, if necessary, to employ the systems, functions, and concepts of the various references described above to provide yet further implementations of the invention. These and other changes can be made to the invention in light of the above Detailed Description. While the above description describes certain examples of the invention, and describes the best mode contemplated, no matter how detailed the above appears in text, the invention can be practiced in many ways. Details of the system may vary considerably in its specific implementation, while still being encompassed by the invention disclosed herein. As noted above, particular terminology used when describing certain features or aspects of the invention should not be taken to imply that the terminology is being redefined herein to be restricted to any specific characteristics, features, or aspects of the invention with which that terminology is associated. In general, the terms used in the following claims should not be construed to limit the invention to the specific examples disclosed in the specification, unless the above Detailed Description section explicitly defines such terms. Accordingly, the actual scope of the invention encompasses not only the disclosed examples, but also all equivalent ways of practicing or implementing the invention under the claims.
To reduce the number of claims, certain aspects of the invention are presented below in certain claim forms, but the applicant contemplates other aspects of the invention in any number of claim forms. For example, while only one aspect of the invention is recited as a means-plus-function claim under 35 U.S.C sec. 112(f) (AIA), other aspects may likewise be embodied as a means-plus-function claim, or in other forms, such as being embodied in a computer-readable medium. Any claims intended to be treated under 35 U.S.C. § 112(f) will begin with the words “means for,” but use of the term “for” in any other context is not intended to invoke treatment under 35 U.S.C. § 112(f). Accordingly, the applicant reserves the right to pursue additional claims after filing this application, in either this application or in a continuing application.

Claims (29)

What is claimed is:
1. A method for determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the method comprising:
assigning selected nodes of a plurality of client computing nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes, wherein:
each of the plurality of client computing nodes contain primary data protected by an active storage manager,
the active storage manager initiates data protection operations according to an information management policy assigned to the primary data,
the monitoring nodes are configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and
each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node;
receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node;
generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages;
transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes;
determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message; and
activating another storage manager selected from a plurality of storage managers to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred,
wherein the second storage manager performs functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to:
process the received plurality of status messages, and
update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein:
each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and
the method further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to other corresponding databases.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
7. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
sending a configuration file to each selected node of the plurality of client computing nodes that have been selected to be monitoring nodes; and,
automatically configuring each of the selected nodes to be a monitoring node based on the configuration file.
8. A system that determines whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the system comprising:
one or more processors that, having executed computer-executable instructions, configure the system to perform a plurality of operations comprising:
assigning selected nodes of a plurality of client computing nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes, wherein:
each of the plurality of client computing nodes contain primary data protected by an active storage manager,
the active storage manager initiates data protection operations according to an information management policy assigned to the primary data,
each of the plurality of client computing nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and
each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node;
receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node;
generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages;
transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes;
determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message; and
activating another storage manager selected from a plurality of storage managers to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred
, wherein the second storage manager performs functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
9. The system of claim 8, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to:
process the received plurality of status messages, and
update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
10. The system of claim 9, wherein the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring node.
11. The system of claim 8, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
12. The system of claim 8, wherein:
each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and
the plurality of operations further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to other corresponding databases.
13. The system of claim 8, wherein the plurality of operations further comprises:
verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
14. The system of claim 8, wherein the plurality of operations further comprises:
sending a configuration file to each selected node of the plurality of client computing nodes that have been selected to be monitoring nodes; and,
automatically configuring each of the selected nodes to be a monitoring node based on the configuration file.
15. A non-transitory, computer-readable medium having computer-executable instructions stored thereon that, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to perform a plurality of operations determining whether to initiate a failover of a storage manager in an information management system, the plurality of operations comprising:
assigning selected nodes of a plurality of client computing nodes in an information management system as monitoring nodes, wherein:
each of the plurality of client computing nodes contain primary data protected by an active storage manager,
the active storage manager initiates data protection operations according to an information management policy assigned to the primary data,
each of the plurality of client computing nodes is configured to communicate with a first storage manager of the information management system, and
each monitoring node is configured to transmit a status message to each other monitoring node;
receiving, at a monitoring node, a plurality of status messages, wherein each status message was transmitted by another monitoring node;
generating, at the monitoring node, a session message comprising status information for each monitoring node, wherein the status information is obtained from the received plurality of status messages;
transmitting the session message to a plurality of failover nodes;
determining, by at least one failover node of the plurality of failover nodes, whether a failover condition has occurred by applying a plurality of failover rules to the status information of the transmitted session message;
activating another storage manager selected from a plurality of storage managers to be a second storage manager based on a determination that the failover condition has occurred
, wherein the second storage manager performs functionalities of the first storage manager in the information management system.
16. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a session handler configured to:
process the received plurality of status messages, and
update a time and status for each monitoring node associated with a corresponding status message of the plurality of status messages.
17. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 16, wherein the status information comprises time and status for each monitoring.
18. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein the monitoring node instantiates a periodic thread to transmit the session message, wherein the periodic thread is configured to transmit the session message at predetermined time intervals.
19. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein:
each failover node is associated with a corresponding database, wherein the corresponding database is a backup of a database in communication with the first storage manager, and
the plurality of operations further comprises selecting the at least one failover node to activate based on which database of the corresponding databases is most recent backup of the database in communication with the storage manager relative to other corresponding databases.
20. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein the plurality of operations further comprises:
verifying that the failover condition has occurred by requesting that each failover node of the plurality of failover nodes confirm that the failover condition has occurred.
21. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein the plurality of storage managers are offline failover storage managers.
22. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein each of the plurality of failover nodes is executed on a separate machine from any of the plurality of storage managers.
23. The non-transitory, computer-readable medium of claim 15, wherein each of the plurality of client computing nodes further comprises a data agent for facilitating backup operations relating to the primary data stored within a client computing node.
24. The system of claim 8, wherein the plurality of storage managers are offline failover storage managers.
25. The system of claim 8, wherein each of the plurality of failover nodes is executed on a separate machine from any of the plurality of storage managers.
26. The system of claim 8, wherein each of the plurality of client computing nodes further comprises a data agent for facilitating backup operations relating to the primary data stored within a client computing node.
27. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of storage managers are offline failover storage managers.
28. The method of claim 1, wherein each of the plurality of failover nodes is executed on a separate machine from any of the plurality of storage managers.
29. The method of claim 1, wherein each of the plurality of client computing nodes further comprises a data agent for facilitating backup operations relating to the primary data stored within a client computing node.
US17/175,259 2021-02-12 2021-02-12 Automatic failover of a storage manager Active 2041-04-26 US11645175B2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/175,259 US11645175B2 (en) 2021-02-12 2021-02-12 Automatic failover of a storage manager
US18/127,575 US20230236940A1 (en) 2021-02-12 2023-03-28 Automatic failover of a storage manager

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/175,259 US11645175B2 (en) 2021-02-12 2021-02-12 Automatic failover of a storage manager

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/127,575 Continuation US20230236940A1 (en) 2021-02-12 2023-03-28 Automatic failover of a storage manager

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20220261321A1 US20220261321A1 (en) 2022-08-18
US11645175B2 true US11645175B2 (en) 2023-05-09

Family

ID=82801356

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/175,259 Active 2041-04-26 US11645175B2 (en) 2021-02-12 2021-02-12 Automatic failover of a storage manager
US18/127,575 Pending US20230236940A1 (en) 2021-02-12 2023-03-28 Automatic failover of a storage manager

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/127,575 Pending US20230236940A1 (en) 2021-02-12 2023-03-28 Automatic failover of a storage manager

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (2) US11645175B2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210182162A1 (en) * 2019-12-17 2021-06-17 Infosys Limited System and method of cloning a multi-tiered application

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220405170A1 (en) * 2021-06-18 2022-12-22 Fidelity Information Services, Llc Systems and methods for application failover management using a distributed director and probe system
JP2023104302A (en) * 2022-01-17 2023-07-28 株式会社日立製作所 Cluster system and recovery method
CN116594571B (en) * 2023-07-11 2023-09-29 苏州浪潮智能科技有限公司 Storage fault repairing method, system, equipment and medium

Citations (336)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4084231A (en) 1975-12-18 1978-04-11 International Business Machines Corporation System for facilitating the copying back of data in disc and tape units of a memory hierarchial system
US4267568A (en) 1975-12-03 1981-05-12 System Development Corporation Information storage and retrieval system
US4283787A (en) 1978-11-06 1981-08-11 British Broadcasting Corporation Cyclic redundancy data check encoding method and apparatus
US4417321A (en) 1981-05-18 1983-11-22 International Business Machines Corp. Qualifying and sorting file record data
US4641274A (en) 1982-12-03 1987-02-03 International Business Machines Corporation Method for communicating changes made to text form a text processor to a remote host
US4654819A (en) 1982-12-09 1987-03-31 Sequoia Systems, Inc. Memory back-up system
US4686620A (en) 1984-07-26 1987-08-11 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Database backup method
EP0259912A1 (en) 1986-09-12 1988-03-16 Hewlett-Packard Limited File backup facility for a community of personal computers
US4912637A (en) 1988-04-26 1990-03-27 Tandem Computers Incorporated Version management tool
EP0405926A2 (en) 1989-06-30 1991-01-02 Digital Equipment Corporation Method and apparatus for managing a shadow set of storage media
US4995035A (en) 1988-10-31 1991-02-19 International Business Machines Corporation Centralized management in a computer network
US5005122A (en) 1987-09-08 1991-04-02 Digital Equipment Corporation Arrangement with cooperating management server node and network service node
EP0467546A2 (en) 1990-07-18 1992-01-22 International Computers Limited Distributed data processing systems
US5093912A (en) 1989-06-26 1992-03-03 International Business Machines Corporation Dynamic resource pool expansion and contraction in multiprocessing environments
US5133065A (en) 1989-07-27 1992-07-21 Personal Computer Peripherals Corporation Backup computer program for networks
US5193154A (en) 1987-07-10 1993-03-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Buffered peripheral system and method for backing up and retrieving data to and from backup memory device
EP0541281A2 (en) 1991-11-04 1993-05-12 AT&T Corp. Incremental-computer-file backup using signatures
US5212772A (en) 1991-02-11 1993-05-18 Gigatrend Incorporated System for storing data in backup tape device
US5226157A (en) 1988-03-11 1993-07-06 Hitachi, Ltd. Backup control method and system in data processing system using identifiers for controlling block data transfer
US5239647A (en) 1990-09-07 1993-08-24 International Business Machines Corporation Data storage hierarchy with shared storage level
US5241668A (en) 1992-04-20 1993-08-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for automated termination and resumption in a time zero backup copy process
US5241670A (en) 1992-04-20 1993-08-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for automated backup copy ordering in a time zero backup copy session
US5276867A (en) 1989-12-19 1994-01-04 Epoch Systems, Inc. Digital data storage system with improved data migration
US5276860A (en) 1989-12-19 1994-01-04 Epoch Systems, Inc. Digital data processor with improved backup storage
US5287500A (en) 1991-06-03 1994-02-15 Digital Equipment Corporation System for allocating storage spaces based upon required and optional service attributes having assigned piorities
US5301286A (en) 1991-01-02 1994-04-05 At&T Bell Laboratories Memory archiving indexing arrangement
US5321816A (en) 1989-10-10 1994-06-14 Unisys Corporation Local-remote apparatus with specialized image storage modules
US5347653A (en) 1991-06-28 1994-09-13 Digital Equipment Corporation System for reconstructing prior versions of indexes using records indicating changes between successive versions of the indexes
EP0645709A2 (en) 1993-09-23 1995-03-29 AT&T Corp. Computer memory backup arrangement
US5410700A (en) 1991-09-04 1995-04-25 International Business Machines Corporation Computer system which supports asynchronous commitment of data
WO1995013580A1 (en) 1993-11-09 1995-05-18 Arcada Software Data backup and restore system for a computer network
US5420996A (en) 1990-04-27 1995-05-30 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Data processing system having selective data save and address translation mechanism utilizing CPU idle period
US5454099A (en) 1989-07-25 1995-09-26 International Business Machines Corporation CPU implemented method for backing up modified data sets in non-volatile store for recovery in the event of CPU failure
US5481694A (en) 1991-09-26 1996-01-02 Hewlett-Packard Company High performance multiple-unit electronic data storage system with checkpoint logs for rapid failure recovery
US5544359A (en) 1993-03-30 1996-08-06 Fujitsu Limited Apparatus and method for classifying and acquiring log data by updating and storing log data
US5548750A (en) 1992-12-08 1996-08-20 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson System for taking backup in a data base
EP0774715A1 (en) 1995-10-23 1997-05-21 Stac Electronics System for backing up files from disk volumes on multiple nodes of a computer network
US5638509A (en) 1994-06-10 1997-06-10 Exabyte Corporation Data storage and protection system
US5640561A (en) 1992-10-13 1997-06-17 International Business Machines Corporation Computerized method and system for replicating a database using log records
US5673381A (en) 1994-05-27 1997-09-30 Cheyenne Software International Sales Corp. System and parallel streaming and data stripping to back-up a network
EP0809184A1 (en) 1996-05-23 1997-11-26 International Business Machines Corporation Availability and recovery of files using copy storage pools
US5793867A (en) 1995-12-19 1998-08-11 Pitney Bowes Inc. System and method for disaster recovery in an open metering system
EP0899662A1 (en) 1997-08-29 1999-03-03 Hewlett-Packard Company Backup and restore system for a computer network
WO1999012098A1 (en) 1997-08-29 1999-03-11 Hewlett-Packard Company Data backup and recovery systems
EP0981090A1 (en) 1998-08-17 2000-02-23 Connected Place Limited A method of producing a checkpoint which describes a base file and a method of generating a difference file defining differences between an updated file and a base file
US6078932A (en) 1998-01-13 2000-06-20 International Business Machines Corporation Point-in-time backup utilizing multiple copy technologies
US6175904B1 (en) 1997-09-03 2001-01-16 Duocor, Inc. Apparatus and method for providing a transparent disk drive back-up
US6185474B1 (en) 1997-03-04 2001-02-06 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Exposure unit, exposure system and device manufacturing method
US6199074B1 (en) 1997-10-09 2001-03-06 International Business Machines Corporation Database backup system ensuring consistency between primary and mirrored backup database copies despite backup interruption
US6230166B1 (en) 1997-04-30 2001-05-08 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation System and method for implementing a transaction log
US6272631B1 (en) 1997-06-30 2001-08-07 Microsoft Corporation Protected storage of core data secrets
US20010044910A1 (en) 2000-05-19 2001-11-22 Glenn Ricart Data backup
EP1204922A1 (en) 1999-07-15 2002-05-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical backup and retrieval system
EP1209569A1 (en) 2000-04-12 2002-05-29 Annex Systems Incorporated Data backup/recovery system
US6415323B1 (en) 1999-09-03 2002-07-02 Fastforward Networks Proximity-based redirection system for robust and scalable service-node location in an internetwork
US6418478B1 (en) 1997-10-30 2002-07-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Pipelined high speed data transfer mechanism
US20020178143A1 (en) 2001-05-25 2002-11-28 Kazuhisa Fujimoto Storage system, a method of file data backup and method of copying of file data
US20030021223A1 (en) 2001-07-27 2003-01-30 International Business Machines Corporation Network node failover using path rerouting by manager component or switch port remapping
US6516327B1 (en) 1998-12-24 2003-02-04 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for synchronizing data in multiple databases
US20030056142A1 (en) 2001-09-17 2003-03-20 Ebrahim Hashemi Method and system for leveraging spares in a data storage system including a plurality of disk drives
US6542972B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2003-04-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to physical storage in modular data and storage management system
US20030074600A1 (en) 2000-04-12 2003-04-17 Masaharu Tamatsu Data backup/recovery system
US20030084076A1 (en) 2001-10-31 2003-05-01 Shihoko Sekiguchi Method for storage management of storage resource on a storage network
US20030126240A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2003-07-03 Frank Vosseler Method, system and computer program product for monitoring objects in an it network
US20030149750A1 (en) 2002-02-07 2003-08-07 Franzenburg Alan M. Distributed storage array
US20030163495A1 (en) 2002-02-28 2003-08-28 Veritas Software Corporation Methods and systems to backup data
US20030182301A1 (en) 2002-03-19 2003-09-25 Hugo Patterson System and method for managing a plurality of snapshots
US20030182329A1 (en) 2002-03-20 2003-09-25 Hitachi, Ltd. File backup method and storage apparatus, computer program therefor and computer-readable medium containing the same
US6658436B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2003-12-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to data managed by a modular data and storage management system
US20030236956A1 (en) 2002-06-20 2003-12-25 International Business Machines Corpoaration File system backup in a logical volume management data storage environment
US20040019892A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2004-01-29 Sandhya E. Lock management thread pools for distributed data systems
EP1387269A1 (en) 2002-08-02 2004-02-04 Hewlett Packard Company, a Delaware Corporation Backup system and method of generating a checkpoint for a database
US20040044642A1 (en) 2002-08-16 2004-03-04 Fujitsu Limited Apparatus, method and program for managing database logs
US6704839B2 (en) 2000-10-14 2004-03-09 International Business Machines Corporation Data storage system and method of storing data
US6704885B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2004-03-09 Oracle International Corporation Performing data backups with a stochastic scheduler in a distributed computing environment
CA2498174A1 (en) 2002-09-09 2004-03-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dynamic storage device pooling in a computer system
US6721767B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2004-04-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application specific rollback in a computer system
US20040078654A1 (en) 2002-03-29 2004-04-22 Holland Mark C. Hybrid quorum/primary-backup fault-tolerance model
US6732124B1 (en) 1999-03-30 2004-05-04 Fujitsu Limited Data processing system with mechanism for restoring file systems based on transaction logs
US20040128442A1 (en) 2002-09-18 2004-07-01 Netezza Corporation Disk mirror architecture for database appliance
US6760723B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2004-07-06 Commvault Systems Inc. Storage management across multiple time zones
US6769003B2 (en) 2001-05-28 2004-07-27 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Parallel logging method for transaction processing system
US20040153823A1 (en) 2003-01-17 2004-08-05 Zubair Ansari System and method for active diagnosis and self healing of software systems
US6795904B1 (en) 2002-03-28 2004-09-21 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. System and method for improving performance of a data backup operation
AU2004227949A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2004-10-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for dynamically performing storage operations in a computer network
US20040250033A1 (en) 2002-10-07 2004-12-09 Anand Prahlad System and method for managing stored data
US6836830B1 (en) 1999-06-01 2004-12-28 Hitachi, Ltd. Method of data backup in a computer system and a storage system therefor
US20040268175A1 (en) 2003-06-11 2004-12-30 Eternal Systems, Inc. Transparent TCP connection failover
US20040267838A1 (en) 2003-06-24 2004-12-30 International Business Machines Corporation Parallel high speed backup for a storage area network (SAN) file system
US6839747B1 (en) 1998-06-30 2005-01-04 Emc Corporation User interface for managing storage in a storage system coupled to a network
US20050039069A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2005-02-17 Anand Prahlad Remote disaster data recovery system and method
US6880101B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2005-04-12 Dell Products L.P. System and method for providing automatic data restoration after a storage device failure
EP1533701A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2005-05-25 TSX Inc. System and method for failover
US20050131996A1 (en) 2003-12-16 2005-06-16 Mastrianni Steven J. Autonomous storage for backup, restore, and file access
US20050183072A1 (en) 1999-07-29 2005-08-18 Intertrust Technologies Corporation Software self-defense systems and methods
US20050187891A1 (en) 2004-02-06 2005-08-25 Johnson Charles S. Transaction processing apparatus and method
US20050216788A1 (en) 2002-11-20 2005-09-29 Filesx Ltd. Fast backup storage and fast recovery of data (FBSRD)
US20050235286A1 (en) 2004-04-15 2005-10-20 Raytheon Company System and method for topology-aware job scheduling and backfilling in an HPC environment
WO2005103955A1 (en) 2004-03-31 2005-11-03 Microsoft Corporation System and method for a consistency check of a database backup
US20050257062A1 (en) 1998-03-11 2005-11-17 Paul Ignatius System and method for providing encryption in pipelined storage operations in a storage network
US20050262033A1 (en) 2002-03-29 2005-11-24 Kazuhiko Yamashita Data recording apparatus, data recording method, program for implementing the method, and program recording medium
US20050262316A1 (en) 2004-05-18 2005-11-24 Junya Obayashi Backup acquisition method and disk array apparatus
US20050268156A1 (en) 2001-08-09 2005-12-01 Dell Products L.P. Failover system and method for cluster environment
US20050278397A1 (en) 2004-06-02 2005-12-15 Clark Kevin J Method and apparatus for automated redundant data storage of data files maintained in diverse file infrastructures
US20060005048A1 (en) 2004-07-02 2006-01-05 Hitachi Ltd. Method and apparatus for encrypted remote copy for secure data backup and restoration
US20060010227A1 (en) 2004-06-01 2006-01-12 Rajeev Atluri Methods and apparatus for accessing data from a primary data storage system for secondary storage
US20060026452A1 (en) 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Yoshio Suzuki Data duplication method in a disaster recovery system
US20060036658A1 (en) 2004-08-13 2006-02-16 Henrickson David L Combined computer disaster recovery and migration tool for effective disaster recovery as well as the backup and migration of user- and system-specific information
US7003641B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2006-02-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view with granular access to exchange data managed by a modular data and storage management system
US20060047626A1 (en) 2004-08-24 2006-03-02 Microsoft Corporation Generating an optimized restore plan
US20060085672A1 (en) 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Satoru Watanabe Method and program for creating determinate backup data in a database backup system
US7035880B1 (en) 1999-07-14 2006-04-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. Modular backup and retrieval system used in conjunction with a storage area network
WO2006052872A2 (en) 2004-11-05 2006-05-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method to support single instance storage operations
US7065537B2 (en) 2000-06-07 2006-06-20 Transact In Memory, Inc. Method and system for highly-parallel logging and recovery operation in main-memory transaction processing systems
US20060155594A1 (en) 2005-01-13 2006-07-13 Jess Almeida Adaptive step-by-step process with guided conversation logs for improving the quality of transaction data
US7082464B2 (en) 2001-07-06 2006-07-25 Juniper Networks, Inc. Network management system
US7100007B2 (en) 2003-09-12 2006-08-29 Hitachi, Ltd. Backup system and method based on data characteristics
US7103432B2 (en) 2004-06-02 2006-09-05 Research In Motion Limited Auto-configuration of hardware on a portable computing device
US7107298B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2006-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for archiving objects in an information store
US20060206547A1 (en) 2005-02-08 2006-09-14 Raghavendra Kulkarni Storing and retrieving computer data files using an encrypted network drive file system
US20060236054A1 (en) 2005-04-19 2006-10-19 Manabu Kitamura Highly available external storage system
US20060248283A1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2006-11-02 Galin Galchev System and method for monitoring threads in a clustered server architecture
US7143121B2 (en) 2003-06-27 2006-11-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and system for archiving and restoring data from an operations center in a utility data center
US7162496B2 (en) 2002-09-16 2007-01-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for blind media support
US7178059B2 (en) 2003-05-07 2007-02-13 Egenera, Inc. Disaster recovery for processing resources using configurable deployment platform
WO2007021678A2 (en) 2005-08-18 2007-02-22 Emc Corporation Searchable backups
US20070050526A1 (en) 2005-08-31 2007-03-01 Hitachi, Ltd. Storage control device and separation-type storage device
US20070074068A1 (en) 2005-09-28 2007-03-29 Lite-On Technology Corporation Method for protecting backup data of a computer system from damage
US7209972B1 (en) 1997-10-30 2007-04-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. High speed data transfer mechanism
US20070094467A1 (en) 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Yasuo Yamasaki Method for rolling back from snapshot with log
US20070094533A1 (en) 2002-03-18 2007-04-26 Net Integration Technologies Inc. System and method for data backup
US7234073B1 (en) 2003-09-30 2007-06-19 Emc Corporation System and methods for failover management of manageable entity agents
US20070150499A1 (en) 2005-02-07 2007-06-28 D Souza Roy P Dynamic bulk-to-brick transformation of data
US20070156793A1 (en) 2005-02-07 2007-07-05 D Souza Roy P Synthetic full copies of data and dynamic bulk-to-brick transformation
US7249150B1 (en) 2001-07-03 2007-07-24 Network Appliance, Inc. System and method for parallelized replay of an NVRAM log in a storage appliance
US20070185922A1 (en) 2006-02-07 2007-08-09 Aditya Kapoor Point-in-time database restore
US20070185938A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-08-09 Anand Prahlad Systems and methods for performing data replication
US20070186068A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-08-09 Agrawal Vijay H Network redirector systems and methods for performing data replication
US20070226535A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-09-27 Parag Gokhale Systems and methods of unified reconstruction in storage systems
US20070234108A1 (en) 2006-03-31 2007-10-04 Cox Gary H Failover to synchronous backup site in connection with triangular asynchronous replication
US20070250365A1 (en) 2006-04-21 2007-10-25 Infosys Technologies Ltd. Grid computing systems and methods thereof
US20070271471A1 (en) 2006-05-22 2007-11-22 Seagate Technology Llc Data storage device with built-in data protection for ultra sensitive applications
US20070282921A1 (en) 2006-05-22 2007-12-06 Inmage Systems, Inc. Recovery point data view shift through a direction-agnostic roll algorithm
US20070283355A1 (en) 2004-03-19 2007-12-06 International Business Machines Corporation Computer System, Servers Constituting the Same, and Job Execution Control Method and Program
US20070299930A1 (en) 2006-06-22 2007-12-27 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Continued transfer or streaming of a data file after loss of a local connection
US7315923B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2008-01-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for combining data streams in pipelined storage operations in a storage network
US7318134B1 (en) 2004-03-16 2008-01-08 Emc Corporation Continuous data backup using distributed journaling
US20080022058A1 (en) 2006-07-18 2008-01-24 Network Appliance, Inc. Removable portable data backup for a network storage system
US20080059704A1 (en) 2005-05-02 2008-03-06 Srinivas Kavuri System and method for allocation of organizational resources
US7343453B2 (en) 2004-04-30 2008-03-11 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical systems and methods for providing a unified view of storage information
US20080098049A1 (en) 2001-03-30 2008-04-24 Pillai Ananthan K Method and apparatus for computing file storage elements for backup and restore
US7380155B2 (en) 2002-02-22 2008-05-27 Bea Systems, Inc. System for highly available transaction recovery for transaction processing systems
US7383293B2 (en) 2003-09-10 2008-06-03 International Business Machines Corporation Database backup system using data and user-defined routines replicators for maintaining a copy of database on a secondary server
US7389311B1 (en) 1999-07-15 2008-06-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Modular backup and retrieval system
US20080147754A1 (en) 2006-12-18 2008-06-19 Duncan Littlefield Systems and methods for facilitating storage operations using network attached storage devices
US20080162840A1 (en) 2007-01-03 2008-07-03 Oliver Augenstein Methods and infrastructure for performing repetitive data protection and a corresponding restore of data
US20080201600A1 (en) 2007-02-15 2008-08-21 Inventec Corporation Data protection method of storage device
US7424519B2 (en) 2002-01-10 2008-09-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Distributed storage system, storage device and method of copying data
US20080228833A1 (en) 2007-03-12 2008-09-18 Hitachi, Ltd. System and method for managing consistency among volumes based on application information
US20080244204A1 (en) 2007-03-29 2008-10-02 Nick Cremelie Replication and restoration of single-instance storage pools
US7437388B1 (en) 2004-12-21 2008-10-14 Symantec Corporation Protecting data for distributed applications using cooperative backup agents
US20080253283A1 (en) 2007-04-10 2008-10-16 International Business Machines Corporation Methods and Apparatus for Effective On-Line Backup Selection for Failure Recovery in Distributed Stream Processing Systems
US7440982B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2008-10-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for stored data archive verification
US20080270488A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2008-10-30 Yohsuke Ozawa Fault recovery for transaction server
US7454569B2 (en) 2003-06-25 2008-11-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical system and method for performing storage operations in a computer network
US20080307020A1 (en) 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Steve Ko Electronic backup and restoration of encrypted data
US20090013258A1 (en) 2000-09-11 2009-01-08 International Business Machines Corporation Pictorial-based user interface management of computer hardware components
US20090037763A1 (en) 2007-08-03 2009-02-05 Saibal Adhya Systems and Methods for Providing IIP Address Stickiness in an SSL VPN Session Failover Environment
US7490207B2 (en) 2004-11-08 2009-02-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing auxillary storage operations
US20090055507A1 (en) 2007-08-20 2009-02-26 Takashi Oeda Storage and server provisioning for virtualized and geographically dispersed data centers
US20090077557A1 (en) 2007-09-19 2009-03-19 Naoko Ichikawa Method and computer for supporting construction of backup configuration
US7512595B1 (en) 2006-01-03 2009-03-31 Emc Corporation Methods and systems for utilizing configuration information
US7529782B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2009-05-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing a snapshot and for restoring data
US7543125B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-06-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing time-flexible calendric storage operations
US7546324B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2009-06-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for performing storage operations using network attached storage
US7546484B2 (en) 2006-02-08 2009-06-09 Microsoft Corporation Managing backup solutions with light-weight storage nodes
US20090161551A1 (en) * 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 Solar Winds.Net Internet protocol service level agreement router auto-configuration
US20090183145A1 (en) 2008-01-10 2009-07-16 Wei-Ming Hu Techniques for reducing down time in updating applications with metadata
US20090204649A1 (en) 2007-11-12 2009-08-13 Attune Systems, Inc. File Deduplication Using Storage Tiers
US7581077B2 (en) 1997-10-30 2009-08-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. Method and system for transferring data in a storage operation
US7594138B2 (en) 2007-01-31 2009-09-22 International Business Machines Corporation System and method of error recovery for backup applications
US7596721B1 (en) 2004-01-09 2009-09-29 Maxtor Corporation Methods and structure for patching embedded firmware
US20090243846A1 (en) 2008-03-28 2009-10-01 Fujitsu Limited Electronic apparatus system having a plurality of rack-mounted electronic apparatuses, and method for identifying electronic apparatus in electronic apparatus system
US7600125B1 (en) 2004-12-23 2009-10-06 Symantec Corporation Hash-based data block processing with intermittently-connected systems
US7606844B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-10-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing replication copy storage operations
US7613752B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2009-11-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for using metadata to enhance data management operations
US7613748B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2009-11-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Stored data reverification management system and method
US7617307B2 (en) 2004-02-19 2009-11-10 International Business Machines Corporation Architecture for a centralized management system
US7617253B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-11-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Destination systems and methods for performing data replication
US7617262B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-11-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for monitoring application data in a data replication system
US7620710B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-11-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing multi-path storage operations
EP1938192B1 (en) 2005-10-12 2009-11-25 QUALCOMM Incorporated Peer-to-peer distributed backup system for mobile devices
US7636743B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-12-22 Commvault Systems, Inc. Pathname translation in a data replication system
US20090319534A1 (en) 2008-06-24 2009-12-24 Parag Gokhale Application-aware and remote single instance data management
US20100017444A1 (en) 2008-07-15 2010-01-21 Paresh Chatterjee Continuous Data Protection of Files Stored on a Remote Storage Device
US20100031086A1 (en) 2008-07-31 2010-02-04 Andrew Charles Leppard Repair of a corrupt data segment used by a de-duplication engine
US7661028B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2010-02-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Rolling cache configuration for a data replication system
US20100042790A1 (en) 2008-08-12 2010-02-18 Netapp, Inc. Scalable deduplication of stored data
US20100070478A1 (en) 2008-09-15 2010-03-18 International Business Machines Corporation Retrieval and recovery of data chunks from alternate data stores in a deduplicating system
US20100077161A1 (en) 2008-09-24 2010-03-25 Timothy John Stoakes Identifying application metadata in a backup stream
US20100082672A1 (en) 2008-09-26 2010-04-01 Rajiv Kottomtharayil Systems and methods for managing single instancing data
US20100094981A1 (en) 2005-07-07 2010-04-15 Cordray Christopher G Dynamically Deployable Self Configuring Distributed Network Management System
US7702782B1 (en) 2006-10-18 2010-04-20 Emc Corporation Using watermarks to indicate alerts in a storage area network management console
US7707190B2 (en) 2003-12-04 2010-04-27 Wistron Corporation Method for restoring backup data
US7707184B1 (en) 2002-10-09 2010-04-27 Netapp, Inc. System and method for snapshot full backup and hard recovery of a database
US20100101300A1 (en) 2006-12-19 2010-04-29 Pcme Limited Methods and apparatus for monitoring particles flowing in a stack
US7734669B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2010-06-08 Commvault Systems, Inc. Managing copies of data
US20100162037A1 (en) 2008-12-22 2010-06-24 International Business Machines Corporation Memory System having Spare Memory Devices Attached to a Local Interface Bus
US20100223495A1 (en) 2009-02-27 2010-09-02 Leppard Andrew Minimize damage caused by corruption of de-duplicated data
US7797281B1 (en) 2007-01-12 2010-09-14 Symantec Operating Corporation Granular restore of data objects from a directory service
US20100250549A1 (en) 2009-03-30 2010-09-30 Muller Marcus S Storing a variable number of instances of data objects
US7822939B1 (en) 2007-09-25 2010-10-26 Emc Corporation Data de-duplication using thin provisioning
US20100281458A1 (en) 2009-04-30 2010-11-04 Business Objects, S.A. Application modification framework
US20100293439A1 (en) 2009-05-18 2010-11-18 David Flynn Apparatus, system, and method for reconfiguring an array to operate with less storage elements
US20100299490A1 (en) 2009-05-22 2010-11-25 Attarde Deepak R Block-level single instancing
WO2010140264A1 (en) 2009-06-04 2010-12-09 Hitachi,Ltd. Storage subsystem and its data processing method, and computer system
US20100332456A1 (en) 2009-06-30 2010-12-30 Anand Prahlad Data object store and server for a cloud storage environment, including data deduplication and data management across multiple cloud storage sites
US20110154109A1 (en) 2009-12-22 2011-06-23 Xerox Corporation Continuous, automated discovery of bugs in released software
US20110153570A1 (en) 2009-12-18 2011-06-23 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Data replication and recovery method in asymmetric clustered distributed file system
US20110218967A1 (en) 2010-03-08 2011-09-08 Microsoft Corporation Partial Block Based Backups
US20110234583A1 (en) 2010-01-04 2011-09-29 Reuven Bakalash Method and apparatus for parallel ray-tracing employing modular space division
US8051473B2 (en) 2004-07-19 2011-11-01 Sony Deutschland Gmbh Method for operating networks of devices
US20110289281A1 (en) 2010-05-24 2011-11-24 Quantum Corporation Policy Based Data Retrieval Performance for Deduplicated Data
US8108640B1 (en) 2009-04-16 2012-01-31 Network Appliance, Inc. Reserving a thin provisioned space in a storage system
US8108638B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2012-01-31 International Business Machines Corporation Backup of deduplicated data
US8131681B1 (en) 2010-01-21 2012-03-06 Netapp, Inc. Backup disk-tape integration method and system
US20120078881A1 (en) 2010-09-24 2012-03-29 Hitachi Data Systems Corporation System and method for aggregating query results in a fault-tolerant database management system
US20120084272A1 (en) 2010-10-04 2012-04-05 International Business Machines Corporation File system support for inert files
US20120101999A1 (en) 2010-10-26 2012-04-26 International Business Machines Corporation Performing a background copy process during a backup operation
US8170995B2 (en) 2006-10-17 2012-05-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Method and system for offline indexing of content and classifying stored data
US8185777B2 (en) 2003-04-23 2012-05-22 Dot Hill Systems Corporation Network storage appliance with integrated server and redundant storage controllers
US8199911B1 (en) 2008-03-31 2012-06-12 Symantec Operating Corporation Secure encryption algorithm for data deduplication on untrusted storage
US20120150826A1 (en) 2010-12-14 2012-06-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Distributed deduplicated storage system
US20120150949A1 (en) 2010-12-14 2012-06-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Client-side repository in a networked deduplicated storage system
US8204859B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2012-06-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for managing replicated database data
US8271443B1 (en) 2009-06-29 2012-09-18 Symantec Operating Corporation Backup system including a privately accessible primary backup server and a publicly accessible alternate backup server
US8291170B1 (en) 2010-08-19 2012-10-16 Symantec Corporation System and method for event driven backup data storage
US8291407B2 (en) 2002-06-12 2012-10-16 Symantec Corporation Systems and methods for patching computer programs
US8307177B2 (en) 2008-09-05 2012-11-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for management of virtualization data
US8364652B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2013-01-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Content aligned block-based deduplication
US8370542B2 (en) 2002-09-16 2013-02-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Combined stream auxiliary copy system and method
US20130138880A1 (en) 2011-11-30 2013-05-30 Hitachi, Ltd. Storage system and method for controlling storage system
US8479304B1 (en) 2009-03-31 2013-07-02 Symantec Corporation Selectively protecting against chosen plaintext attacks in untrusted storage environments that support data deduplication
US8504526B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2013-08-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations
US20130238562A1 (en) 2012-03-07 2013-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data storage system utilizing proxy device for storage operations
US20130262396A1 (en) 2012-03-30 2013-10-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data storage recovery automation
US8650389B1 (en) 2007-09-28 2014-02-11 F5 Networks, Inc. Secure sockets layer protocol handshake mirroring
US8667126B2 (en) * 2010-12-03 2014-03-04 International Business Machines Corporation Dynamic rate heartbeating for inter-node status updating
US20140082128A1 (en) 2012-09-18 2014-03-20 Netapp, Inc. Dynamic detection and selection of file servers in a caching application or system
US20140101300A1 (en) 2012-10-10 2014-04-10 Elisha J. Rosensweig Method and apparatus for automated deployment of geographically distributed applications within a cloud
US20140115287A1 (en) 2009-01-23 2014-04-24 Infortrend Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing volume replication using unified architecture
US20140143636A1 (en) 2009-08-11 2014-05-22 International Business Machines Corporation Memory system with variable length page stripes including data protection information
US20140195749A1 (en) 2013-01-10 2014-07-10 Pure Storage, Inc. Deduplication of Volume Regions
US20140196038A1 (en) 2013-01-08 2014-07-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Virtual machine management in a data storage system
US20140196037A1 (en) 2013-01-09 2014-07-10 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Gang migration of virtual machines using cluster-wide deduplication
US20140201157A1 (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for rule-based virtual machine data protection
US20140201153A1 (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Partial file restore in a data storage system
US20140201170A1 (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. High availability distributed deduplicated storage system
US20140201142A1 (en) 2013-01-14 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Partial sharing of secondary storage files in a data storage system
US8793222B1 (en) 2009-11-06 2014-07-29 Symantec Corporation Systems and methods for indexing backup content
US20140229451A1 (en) 2013-02-12 2014-08-14 Atlantis Computing, Inc. Deduplication metadata access in deduplication file system
US8825720B1 (en) 2011-04-12 2014-09-02 Emc Corporation Scaling asynchronous reclamation of free space in de-duplicated multi-controller storage systems
US20140258245A1 (en) 2013-03-07 2014-09-11 Jive Software, Inc. Efficient data deduplication
US20140281758A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2014-09-18 International Business Machines Corporation On-site visualization of component status
US20140337664A1 (en) 2013-05-08 2014-11-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of temporary secondary copies in failover operations
US8909980B1 (en) 2012-06-29 2014-12-09 Emc Corporation Coordinating processing for request redirection
US20150067391A1 (en) 2013-08-30 2015-03-05 Cisco Technology, Inc. Correcting operational state and incorporating additional debugging support into an online system without disruption
US20150074536A1 (en) 2013-09-12 2015-03-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. File manager integration with virtualization in an information management system, including user control and storage management of virtual machines
US20150088821A1 (en) 2013-09-23 2015-03-26 International Business Machines Corporation Data migration using multi-storage volume swap
US20150089185A1 (en) 2013-09-23 2015-03-26 International Business Machines Corporation Managing Mirror Copies without Blocking Application I/O
US9020987B1 (en) 2011-06-29 2015-04-28 Emc Corporation Managing updating of metadata of file systems
US20150199238A1 (en) 2014-01-15 2015-07-16 Ca, Inc. Extending the recovery and reporting ranges of objects
US20150268876A1 (en) 2014-03-18 2015-09-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. Efficient information management performed by a client in the absence of a storage manager
US20150347306A1 (en) 2014-05-30 2015-12-03 International Business Machines Corporation Synchronizing updates of page table status indicators in a multiprocessing environment
US20150350027A1 (en) 2014-06-03 2015-12-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Neighbor aware network cluster topology establishment based on proximity measurements
US20150370668A1 (en) 2013-01-30 2015-12-24 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Failover in response to failure of a port
US9239687B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2016-01-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for retaining and using data block signatures in data protection operations
US20160019317A1 (en) 2014-07-16 2016-01-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Volume or virtual machine level backup and generating placeholders for virtual machine files
US9244777B2 (en) 2013-03-01 2016-01-26 International Business Machines Corporation Balanced distributed backup scheduling
US20160026405A1 (en) 2005-09-30 2016-01-28 Cleversafe, Inc. Storing data in a dispersed storage network
US9280430B2 (en) 2014-05-13 2016-03-08 Netapp, Inc. Deferred replication of recovery information at site switchover
US9286110B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2016-03-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Seamless virtual machine recall in a data storage system
US20160085606A1 (en) 2014-09-19 2016-03-24 Netapp Inc. Cluster-wide outage detection
US9298386B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2016-03-29 Globalfoundries Inc. System and method for improved placement of blocks in a deduplication-erasure code environment
US9336076B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2016-05-10 Globalfoundries Inc. System and method for controlling a redundancy parity encoding amount based on deduplication indications of activity
US20160210064A1 (en) 2015-01-21 2016-07-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Database protection using block-level mapping
US20160226966A1 (en) 2013-10-15 2016-08-04 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited Task management among multiple servers
US20160299818A1 (en) 2015-04-09 2016-10-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Highly reusable deduplication database after disaster recovery
US20160308722A1 (en) 2011-09-30 2016-10-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. Migration of existing computing systems to cloud computing sites or virtual machines
US9495404B2 (en) 2013-01-11 2016-11-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods to process block-level backup for selective file restoration for virtual machines
US20160350391A1 (en) 2015-05-26 2016-12-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Replication using deduplicated secondary copy data
US20170031768A1 (en) 2015-07-31 2017-02-02 Atlantis Computing, Inc. Method and apparatus for reconstructing and checking the consistency of deduplication metadata of a deduplication file system
US9563518B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2017-02-07 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US9639274B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2017-05-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. Efficient deduplication database validation
US20170168903A1 (en) 2015-12-09 2017-06-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Live synchronization and management of virtual machines across computing and virtualization platforms and using live synchronization to support disaster recovery
US20170185488A1 (en) 2015-12-23 2017-06-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application-level live synchronization across computing platforms including synchronizing co-resident applications to disparate standby destinations and selectively synchronizing some applications and not others
US20170192866A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2017-07-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. System for redirecting requests after a secondary storage computing device failure
US9710465B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2017-07-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Efficiently restoring execution of a backed up virtual machine based on coordination with virtual-machine-file-relocation operations
US20170235647A1 (en) 2016-02-12 2017-08-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data protection operations based on network path information
US20170242871A1 (en) 2016-02-18 2017-08-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data restoration operations based on network path information
US20170315876A1 (en) 2014-09-30 2017-11-02 Code 42 Software, Inc. Shared file system predictive storage techniques
US9892276B2 (en) 2015-11-11 2018-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Verifiable data destruction in a database
US9983936B2 (en) 2014-11-20 2018-05-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Virtual machine change block tracking
US9990253B1 (en) 2011-03-31 2018-06-05 EMC IP Holding Company LLC System and method for recovering file systems without a replica
US10073649B2 (en) 2014-07-24 2018-09-11 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp Storing metadata
US20180267861A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application aware backup of virtual machines
US20180285215A1 (en) 2017-03-31 2018-10-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. Granular restoration of virtual machine application data
US20180285202A1 (en) 2017-03-29 2018-10-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. External fallback system for local computing systems
US20180285209A1 (en) 2017-03-29 2018-10-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. Live browsing of granular mailbox data
US10146643B2 (en) 2015-04-28 2018-12-04 International Business Machines Corporation Database recovery and index rebuilds
US20180373597A1 (en) 2017-06-14 2018-12-27 Commvault Systems, Inc. Live browsing of backed up data residing on cloned disks
US20190028375A1 (en) * 2017-07-18 2019-01-24 Vmware, Inc. Prioritized client-server communications based on server health
US10380072B2 (en) 2014-03-17 2019-08-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Managing deletions from a deduplication database
US10379892B2 (en) 2012-12-28 2019-08-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for repurposing virtual machines
US10387269B2 (en) 2012-06-13 2019-08-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dedicated client-side signature generator in a networked storage system
US20190278662A1 (en) 2018-03-07 2019-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Using utilities injected into cloud-based virtual machines for speeding up virtual machine backup operations
US20190312801A1 (en) * 2018-04-10 2019-10-10 Vmware, Inc. Optimized performance data collection at client nodes
US10454754B1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2019-10-22 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Hybrid cluster recovery techniques
US10474542B2 (en) 2017-03-24 2019-11-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Time-based virtual machine reversion
US10474638B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2019-11-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Accessing a file system using tiered deduplication
US20190370107A1 (en) 2018-05-31 2019-12-05 Capital One Services, Llc Data processing platform monitoring
US10503619B2 (en) 2015-10-22 2019-12-10 Netapp Inc. Implementing automatic switchover
US10540327B2 (en) 2009-07-08 2020-01-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Synchronized data deduplication
US20200073769A1 (en) * 2018-08-28 2020-03-05 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp Management of clusters
US10587470B2 (en) * 2015-09-25 2020-03-10 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Method and apparatus for presenting status of storage cluster
US10592350B2 (en) 2016-03-09 2020-03-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Virtual server cloud file system for virtual machine restore to cloud operations
US10628267B2 (en) 2018-05-02 2020-04-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Client managed data backup process within an enterprise information management system
US20200159627A1 (en) 2010-06-04 2020-05-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations, including heterogeneous indexing and load balancing of backup and indexing resources
US10673943B2 (en) 2018-05-02 2020-06-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. Network storage backup using distributed media agents
US10678758B2 (en) 2016-11-21 2020-06-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Cross-platform virtual machine data and memory backup and replication
US20200183802A1 (en) 2018-12-06 2020-06-11 Commvault Systems, Inc. Assigning backup resources based on failover of partnered data storage servers in a data storage management system
US10776209B2 (en) 2014-11-10 2020-09-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Cross-platform virtual machine backup and replication
US20200329004A1 (en) * 2019-04-12 2020-10-15 Google Llc Inter-operative message notification agent
US20210081287A1 (en) * 2019-09-13 2021-03-18 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Data service failover in shared storage clusters
US20210112118A1 (en) * 2019-10-10 2021-04-15 Dell Products L.P. Cluster formation offload using remote access controller group manager
US11016696B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2021-05-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. Redundant distributed data storage system

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3008879A4 (en) * 2013-06-13 2017-01-04 TSX Inc. Failover system and method

Patent Citations (418)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4267568A (en) 1975-12-03 1981-05-12 System Development Corporation Information storage and retrieval system
US4084231A (en) 1975-12-18 1978-04-11 International Business Machines Corporation System for facilitating the copying back of data in disc and tape units of a memory hierarchial system
US4283787A (en) 1978-11-06 1981-08-11 British Broadcasting Corporation Cyclic redundancy data check encoding method and apparatus
US4417321A (en) 1981-05-18 1983-11-22 International Business Machines Corp. Qualifying and sorting file record data
US4641274A (en) 1982-12-03 1987-02-03 International Business Machines Corporation Method for communicating changes made to text form a text processor to a remote host
US4654819A (en) 1982-12-09 1987-03-31 Sequoia Systems, Inc. Memory back-up system
US4686620A (en) 1984-07-26 1987-08-11 American Telephone And Telegraph Company, At&T Bell Laboratories Database backup method
EP0259912A1 (en) 1986-09-12 1988-03-16 Hewlett-Packard Limited File backup facility for a community of personal computers
US5193154A (en) 1987-07-10 1993-03-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Buffered peripheral system and method for backing up and retrieving data to and from backup memory device
US5005122A (en) 1987-09-08 1991-04-02 Digital Equipment Corporation Arrangement with cooperating management server node and network service node
US5226157A (en) 1988-03-11 1993-07-06 Hitachi, Ltd. Backup control method and system in data processing system using identifiers for controlling block data transfer
US4912637A (en) 1988-04-26 1990-03-27 Tandem Computers Incorporated Version management tool
US4995035A (en) 1988-10-31 1991-02-19 International Business Machines Corporation Centralized management in a computer network
US5093912A (en) 1989-06-26 1992-03-03 International Business Machines Corporation Dynamic resource pool expansion and contraction in multiprocessing environments
EP0405926A2 (en) 1989-06-30 1991-01-02 Digital Equipment Corporation Method and apparatus for managing a shadow set of storage media
US5454099A (en) 1989-07-25 1995-09-26 International Business Machines Corporation CPU implemented method for backing up modified data sets in non-volatile store for recovery in the event of CPU failure
US5133065A (en) 1989-07-27 1992-07-21 Personal Computer Peripherals Corporation Backup computer program for networks
US5321816A (en) 1989-10-10 1994-06-14 Unisys Corporation Local-remote apparatus with specialized image storage modules
US5276867A (en) 1989-12-19 1994-01-04 Epoch Systems, Inc. Digital data storage system with improved data migration
US5276860A (en) 1989-12-19 1994-01-04 Epoch Systems, Inc. Digital data processor with improved backup storage
US5420996A (en) 1990-04-27 1995-05-30 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Data processing system having selective data save and address translation mechanism utilizing CPU idle period
EP0467546A2 (en) 1990-07-18 1992-01-22 International Computers Limited Distributed data processing systems
US5239647A (en) 1990-09-07 1993-08-24 International Business Machines Corporation Data storage hierarchy with shared storage level
US5301286A (en) 1991-01-02 1994-04-05 At&T Bell Laboratories Memory archiving indexing arrangement
US5212772A (en) 1991-02-11 1993-05-18 Gigatrend Incorporated System for storing data in backup tape device
US5287500A (en) 1991-06-03 1994-02-15 Digital Equipment Corporation System for allocating storage spaces based upon required and optional service attributes having assigned piorities
US5347653A (en) 1991-06-28 1994-09-13 Digital Equipment Corporation System for reconstructing prior versions of indexes using records indicating changes between successive versions of the indexes
US5410700A (en) 1991-09-04 1995-04-25 International Business Machines Corporation Computer system which supports asynchronous commitment of data
US5481694A (en) 1991-09-26 1996-01-02 Hewlett-Packard Company High performance multiple-unit electronic data storage system with checkpoint logs for rapid failure recovery
EP0541281A2 (en) 1991-11-04 1993-05-12 AT&T Corp. Incremental-computer-file backup using signatures
US5559991A (en) 1991-11-04 1996-09-24 Lucent Technologies Inc. Incremental computer file backup using check words
US5241668A (en) 1992-04-20 1993-08-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for automated termination and resumption in a time zero backup copy process
US5241670A (en) 1992-04-20 1993-08-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for automated backup copy ordering in a time zero backup copy session
US5640561A (en) 1992-10-13 1997-06-17 International Business Machines Corporation Computerized method and system for replicating a database using log records
US5548750A (en) 1992-12-08 1996-08-20 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson System for taking backup in a data base
US5544359A (en) 1993-03-30 1996-08-06 Fujitsu Limited Apparatus and method for classifying and acquiring log data by updating and storing log data
EP0645709A2 (en) 1993-09-23 1995-03-29 AT&T Corp. Computer memory backup arrangement
US5642496A (en) 1993-09-23 1997-06-24 Kanfi; Arnon Method of making a backup copy of a memory over a plurality of copying sessions
WO1995013580A1 (en) 1993-11-09 1995-05-18 Arcada Software Data backup and restore system for a computer network
US5673381A (en) 1994-05-27 1997-09-30 Cheyenne Software International Sales Corp. System and parallel streaming and data stripping to back-up a network
US5638509A (en) 1994-06-10 1997-06-10 Exabyte Corporation Data storage and protection system
EP0774715A1 (en) 1995-10-23 1997-05-21 Stac Electronics System for backing up files from disk volumes on multiple nodes of a computer network
US5793867A (en) 1995-12-19 1998-08-11 Pitney Bowes Inc. System and method for disaster recovery in an open metering system
EP0809184A1 (en) 1996-05-23 1997-11-26 International Business Machines Corporation Availability and recovery of files using copy storage pools
US6185474B1 (en) 1997-03-04 2001-02-06 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Exposure unit, exposure system and device manufacturing method
US6230166B1 (en) 1997-04-30 2001-05-08 Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation System and method for implementing a transaction log
US6272631B1 (en) 1997-06-30 2001-08-07 Microsoft Corporation Protected storage of core data secrets
EP0899662A1 (en) 1997-08-29 1999-03-03 Hewlett-Packard Company Backup and restore system for a computer network
WO1999012098A1 (en) 1997-08-29 1999-03-11 Hewlett-Packard Company Data backup and recovery systems
US6175904B1 (en) 1997-09-03 2001-01-16 Duocor, Inc. Apparatus and method for providing a transparent disk drive back-up
US6199074B1 (en) 1997-10-09 2001-03-06 International Business Machines Corporation Database backup system ensuring consistency between primary and mirrored backup database copies despite backup interruption
US7401154B2 (en) 1997-10-30 2008-07-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Pipelined high speed data transfer mechanism
US7581077B2 (en) 1997-10-30 2009-08-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. Method and system for transferring data in a storage operation
US6418478B1 (en) 1997-10-30 2002-07-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Pipelined high speed data transfer mechanism
US7209972B1 (en) 1997-10-30 2007-04-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. High speed data transfer mechanism
US6078932A (en) 1998-01-13 2000-06-20 International Business Machines Corporation Point-in-time backup utilizing multiple copy technologies
US20050257062A1 (en) 1998-03-11 2005-11-17 Paul Ignatius System and method for providing encryption in pipelined storage operations in a storage network
US6839747B1 (en) 1998-06-30 2005-01-04 Emc Corporation User interface for managing storage in a storage system coupled to a network
EP0981090A1 (en) 1998-08-17 2000-02-23 Connected Place Limited A method of producing a checkpoint which describes a base file and a method of generating a difference file defining differences between an updated file and a base file
US6516327B1 (en) 1998-12-24 2003-02-04 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for synchronizing data in multiple databases
US6732124B1 (en) 1999-03-30 2004-05-04 Fujitsu Limited Data processing system with mechanism for restoring file systems based on transaction logs
US6836830B1 (en) 1999-06-01 2004-12-28 Hitachi, Ltd. Method of data backup in a computer system and a storage system therefor
US7035880B1 (en) 1999-07-14 2006-04-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. Modular backup and retrieval system used in conjunction with a storage area network
US7389311B1 (en) 1999-07-15 2008-06-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Modular backup and retrieval system
US7395282B1 (en) 1999-07-15 2008-07-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical backup and retrieval system
EP1204922A1 (en) 1999-07-15 2002-05-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical backup and retrieval system
US20050183072A1 (en) 1999-07-29 2005-08-18 Intertrust Technologies Corporation Software self-defense systems and methods
US6415323B1 (en) 1999-09-03 2002-07-02 Fastforward Networks Proximity-based redirection system for robust and scalable service-node location in an internetwork
US7003641B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2006-02-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view with granular access to exchange data managed by a modular data and storage management system
EP1393181A2 (en) 2000-01-31 2004-03-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to data managed by a modular data and storage management system
US6658436B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2003-12-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to data managed by a modular data and storage management system
US7447692B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2008-11-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to data managed by a modular data and storage management system
EP1384135A2 (en) 2000-01-31 2004-01-28 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to physical storage in modular data and storage management system
US7802067B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2010-09-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Interface systems and methods for accessing stored data
US6760723B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2004-07-06 Commvault Systems Inc. Storage management across multiple time zones
US7315924B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2008-01-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view with granular access to exchange data managed by a modular data and storage management system
US6721767B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2004-04-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application specific rollback in a computer system
US6542972B2 (en) 2000-01-31 2003-04-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Logical view and access to physical storage in modular data and storage management system
EP1209569A1 (en) 2000-04-12 2002-05-29 Annex Systems Incorporated Data backup/recovery system
US20030074600A1 (en) 2000-04-12 2003-04-17 Masaharu Tamatsu Data backup/recovery system
US20010044910A1 (en) 2000-05-19 2001-11-22 Glenn Ricart Data backup
US7065537B2 (en) 2000-06-07 2006-06-20 Transact In Memory, Inc. Method and system for highly-parallel logging and recovery operation in main-memory transaction processing systems
US6704885B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2004-03-09 Oracle International Corporation Performing data backups with a stochastic scheduler in a distributed computing environment
US20090013258A1 (en) 2000-09-11 2009-01-08 International Business Machines Corporation Pictorial-based user interface management of computer hardware components
US6704839B2 (en) 2000-10-14 2004-03-09 International Business Machines Corporation Data storage system and method of storing data
US20080098049A1 (en) 2001-03-30 2008-04-24 Pillai Ananthan K Method and apparatus for computing file storage elements for backup and restore
US20020178143A1 (en) 2001-05-25 2002-11-28 Kazuhisa Fujimoto Storage system, a method of file data backup and method of copying of file data
US6769003B2 (en) 2001-05-28 2004-07-27 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Parallel logging method for transaction processing system
JP4267443B2 (en) 2001-06-06 2009-05-27 コムヴォールト・システムズ・インコーポレーテッド Application-specific rollback in computer systems
JP4198050B2 (en) 2001-06-08 2008-12-17 コムヴォールト・システムズ・インコーポレーテッド Memory management over many time zones
US7249150B1 (en) 2001-07-03 2007-07-24 Network Appliance, Inc. System and method for parallelized replay of an NVRAM log in a storage appliance
US7082464B2 (en) 2001-07-06 2006-07-25 Juniper Networks, Inc. Network management system
US20030021223A1 (en) 2001-07-27 2003-01-30 International Business Machines Corporation Network node failover using path rerouting by manager component or switch port remapping
US20050268156A1 (en) 2001-08-09 2005-12-01 Dell Products L.P. Failover system and method for cluster environment
US20030056142A1 (en) 2001-09-17 2003-03-20 Ebrahim Hashemi Method and system for leveraging spares in a data storage system including a plurality of disk drives
US7107298B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2006-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for archiving objects in an information store
US6880101B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2005-04-12 Dell Products L.P. System and method for providing automatic data restoration after a storage device failure
US20030084076A1 (en) 2001-10-31 2003-05-01 Shihoko Sekiguchi Method for storage management of storage resource on a storage network
US20030126240A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2003-07-03 Frank Vosseler Method, system and computer program product for monitoring objects in an it network
US7424519B2 (en) 2002-01-10 2008-09-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Distributed storage system, storage device and method of copying data
US20030149750A1 (en) 2002-02-07 2003-08-07 Franzenburg Alan M. Distributed storage array
US7380155B2 (en) 2002-02-22 2008-05-27 Bea Systems, Inc. System for highly available transaction recovery for transaction processing systems
US20030163495A1 (en) 2002-02-28 2003-08-28 Veritas Software Corporation Methods and systems to backup data
US20070094533A1 (en) 2002-03-18 2007-04-26 Net Integration Technologies Inc. System and method for data backup
US20030182301A1 (en) 2002-03-19 2003-09-25 Hugo Patterson System and method for managing a plurality of snapshots
US20030182329A1 (en) 2002-03-20 2003-09-25 Hitachi, Ltd. File backup method and storage apparatus, computer program therefor and computer-readable medium containing the same
US6795904B1 (en) 2002-03-28 2004-09-21 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. System and method for improving performance of a data backup operation
US20040078654A1 (en) 2002-03-29 2004-04-22 Holland Mark C. Hybrid quorum/primary-backup fault-tolerance model
US20050262033A1 (en) 2002-03-29 2005-11-24 Kazuhiko Yamashita Data recording apparatus, data recording method, program for implementing the method, and program recording medium
US8291407B2 (en) 2002-06-12 2012-10-16 Symantec Corporation Systems and methods for patching computer programs
US20030236956A1 (en) 2002-06-20 2003-12-25 International Business Machines Corpoaration File system backup in a logical volume management data storage environment
US20040019892A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2004-01-29 Sandhya E. Lock management thread pools for distributed data systems
US20040139127A1 (en) 2002-08-02 2004-07-15 Lech Pofelski Backup system and method of generating a checkpoint for a database
EP1387269A1 (en) 2002-08-02 2004-02-04 Hewlett Packard Company, a Delaware Corporation Backup system and method of generating a checkpoint for a database
US20040044642A1 (en) 2002-08-16 2004-03-04 Fujitsu Limited Apparatus, method and program for managing database logs
CA2498174A1 (en) 2002-09-09 2004-03-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dynamic storage device pooling in a computer system
US7130970B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2006-10-31 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dynamic storage device pooling in a computer system
US7409509B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2008-08-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dynamic storage device pooling in a computer system
WO2004023317A1 (en) 2002-09-09 2004-03-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dynamic storage device pooling in a computer system
US7162496B2 (en) 2002-09-16 2007-01-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for blind media support
US7603386B2 (en) 2002-09-16 2009-10-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for managing location of media in a storage system
US8370542B2 (en) 2002-09-16 2013-02-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Combined stream auxiliary copy system and method
US20040128442A1 (en) 2002-09-18 2004-07-01 Netezza Corporation Disk mirror architecture for database appliance
US20040250033A1 (en) 2002-10-07 2004-12-09 Anand Prahlad System and method for managing stored data
US7707184B1 (en) 2002-10-09 2010-04-27 Netapp, Inc. System and method for snapshot full backup and hard recovery of a database
US20050216788A1 (en) 2002-11-20 2005-09-29 Filesx Ltd. Fast backup storage and fast recovery of data (FBSRD)
US20040153823A1 (en) 2003-01-17 2004-08-05 Zubair Ansari System and method for active diagnosis and self healing of software systems
US20050039069A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2005-02-17 Anand Prahlad Remote disaster data recovery system and method
AU2004227949A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2004-10-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for dynamically performing storage operations in a computer network
US7484054B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2009-01-27 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing storage operations in a computer network
US7739459B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2010-06-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for performing storage operations in a computer network
US7769961B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2010-08-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for sharing media in a computer network
US7246207B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2007-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for dynamically performing storage operations in a computer network
US7380072B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2008-05-27 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for sharing media in a computer network
US20050044114A1 (en) 2003-04-03 2005-02-24 Rajiv Kottomtharayil System and method for dynamically performing storage operations in a computer network
US7174433B2 (en) 2003-04-03 2007-02-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for dynamically sharing media in a computer network
US8185777B2 (en) 2003-04-23 2012-05-22 Dot Hill Systems Corporation Network storage appliance with integrated server and redundant storage controllers
US7178059B2 (en) 2003-05-07 2007-02-13 Egenera, Inc. Disaster recovery for processing resources using configurable deployment platform
US20040268175A1 (en) 2003-06-11 2004-12-30 Eternal Systems, Inc. Transparent TCP connection failover
US20040267838A1 (en) 2003-06-24 2004-12-30 International Business Machines Corporation Parallel high speed backup for a storage area network (SAN) file system
US7757043B2 (en) 2003-06-25 2010-07-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical systems and methods for performing storage operations in a computer network
US7454569B2 (en) 2003-06-25 2008-11-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical system and method for performing storage operations in a computer network
US7143121B2 (en) 2003-06-27 2006-11-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and system for archiving and restoring data from an operations center in a utility data center
US7383293B2 (en) 2003-09-10 2008-06-03 International Business Machines Corporation Database backup system using data and user-defined routines replicators for maintaining a copy of database on a secondary server
US7100007B2 (en) 2003-09-12 2006-08-29 Hitachi, Ltd. Backup system and method based on data characteristics
US7234073B1 (en) 2003-09-30 2007-06-19 Emc Corporation System and methods for failover management of manageable entity agents
US8156086B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2012-04-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for stored data verification
US7546324B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2009-06-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for performing storage operations using network attached storage
US7613748B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2009-11-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Stored data reverification management system and method
US7315923B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2008-01-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for combining data streams in pipelined storage operations in a storage network
US7529782B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2009-05-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing a snapshot and for restoring data
US8195623B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2012-06-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing a snapshot and for restoring data
US7440982B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2008-10-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for stored data archive verification
WO2005050449A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2005-06-02 Tsx Inc. System and method for failover
EP1533701A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2005-05-25 TSX Inc. System and method for failover
US20050138461A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2005-06-23 Tsx Inc. System and method for failover
US7707190B2 (en) 2003-12-04 2010-04-27 Wistron Corporation Method for restoring backup data
US20050131996A1 (en) 2003-12-16 2005-06-16 Mastrianni Steven J. Autonomous storage for backup, restore, and file access
US7596721B1 (en) 2004-01-09 2009-09-29 Maxtor Corporation Methods and structure for patching embedded firmware
US20050187891A1 (en) 2004-02-06 2005-08-25 Johnson Charles S. Transaction processing apparatus and method
US7617307B2 (en) 2004-02-19 2009-11-10 International Business Machines Corporation Architecture for a centralized management system
US7318134B1 (en) 2004-03-16 2008-01-08 Emc Corporation Continuous data backup using distributed journaling
US20070283355A1 (en) 2004-03-19 2007-12-06 International Business Machines Corporation Computer System, Servers Constituting the Same, and Job Execution Control Method and Program
WO2005103955A1 (en) 2004-03-31 2005-11-03 Microsoft Corporation System and method for a consistency check of a database backup
US20050235286A1 (en) 2004-04-15 2005-10-20 Raytheon Company System and method for topology-aware job scheduling and backfilling in an HPC environment
US8336040B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2012-12-18 Raytheon Company System and method for topology-aware job scheduling and backfilling in an HPC environment
US7343453B2 (en) 2004-04-30 2008-03-11 Commvault Systems, Inc. Hierarchical systems and methods for providing a unified view of storage information
US20050262316A1 (en) 2004-05-18 2005-11-24 Junya Obayashi Backup acquisition method and disk array apparatus
US20060010227A1 (en) 2004-06-01 2006-01-12 Rajeev Atluri Methods and apparatus for accessing data from a primary data storage system for secondary storage
US20050278397A1 (en) 2004-06-02 2005-12-15 Clark Kevin J Method and apparatus for automated redundant data storage of data files maintained in diverse file infrastructures
US7103432B2 (en) 2004-06-02 2006-09-05 Research In Motion Limited Auto-configuration of hardware on a portable computing device
US20060005048A1 (en) 2004-07-02 2006-01-05 Hitachi Ltd. Method and apparatus for encrypted remote copy for secure data backup and restoration
US8051473B2 (en) 2004-07-19 2011-11-01 Sony Deutschland Gmbh Method for operating networks of devices
US20060026452A1 (en) 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Yoshio Suzuki Data duplication method in a disaster recovery system
US20060036658A1 (en) 2004-08-13 2006-02-16 Henrickson David L Combined computer disaster recovery and migration tool for effective disaster recovery as well as the backup and migration of user- and system-specific information
US20060047626A1 (en) 2004-08-24 2006-03-02 Microsoft Corporation Generating an optimized restore plan
US20060085672A1 (en) 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Satoru Watanabe Method and program for creating determinate backup data in a database backup system
US20060224846A1 (en) 2004-11-05 2006-10-05 Amarendran Arun P System and method to support single instance storage operations
US7500053B1 (en) 2004-11-05 2009-03-03 Commvvault Systems, Inc. Method and system for grouping storage system components
GB2447361A (en) 2004-11-05 2008-09-10 Commvault Systems Inc Using characteristics to select and maintain virtual libraries
US7809914B2 (en) 2004-11-05 2010-10-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Methods and system of pooling storage devices
WO2006052872A2 (en) 2004-11-05 2006-05-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method to support single instance storage operations
US7490207B2 (en) 2004-11-08 2009-02-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing auxillary storage operations
US8230195B2 (en) 2004-11-08 2012-07-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing auxiliary storage operations
US7536291B1 (en) 2004-11-08 2009-05-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method to support simulated storage operations
US7437388B1 (en) 2004-12-21 2008-10-14 Symantec Corporation Protecting data for distributed applications using cooperative backup agents
US7600125B1 (en) 2004-12-23 2009-10-06 Symantec Corporation Hash-based data block processing with intermittently-connected systems
US20060155594A1 (en) 2005-01-13 2006-07-13 Jess Almeida Adaptive step-by-step process with guided conversation logs for improving the quality of transaction data
US20070156793A1 (en) 2005-02-07 2007-07-05 D Souza Roy P Synthetic full copies of data and dynamic bulk-to-brick transformation
US20070150499A1 (en) 2005-02-07 2007-06-28 D Souza Roy P Dynamic bulk-to-brick transformation of data
US20060206547A1 (en) 2005-02-08 2006-09-14 Raghavendra Kulkarni Storing and retrieving computer data files using an encrypted network drive file system
US20060236054A1 (en) 2005-04-19 2006-10-19 Manabu Kitamura Highly available external storage system
US20060248283A1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2006-11-02 Galin Galchev System and method for monitoring threads in a clustered server architecture
US20080059704A1 (en) 2005-05-02 2008-03-06 Srinivas Kavuri System and method for allocation of organizational resources
US20100094981A1 (en) 2005-07-07 2010-04-15 Cordray Christopher G Dynamically Deployable Self Configuring Distributed Network Management System
WO2007021678A2 (en) 2005-08-18 2007-02-22 Emc Corporation Searchable backups
US20080270488A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2008-10-30 Yohsuke Ozawa Fault recovery for transaction server
US20070050526A1 (en) 2005-08-31 2007-03-01 Hitachi, Ltd. Storage control device and separation-type storage device
US20070074068A1 (en) 2005-09-28 2007-03-29 Lite-On Technology Corporation Method for protecting backup data of a computer system from damage
US20160026405A1 (en) 2005-09-30 2016-01-28 Cleversafe, Inc. Storing data in a dispersed storage network
EP1938192B1 (en) 2005-10-12 2009-11-25 QUALCOMM Incorporated Peer-to-peer distributed backup system for mobile devices
US20070094467A1 (en) 2005-10-20 2007-04-26 Yasuo Yamasaki Method for rolling back from snapshot with log
US7801864B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2010-09-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for using metadata to enhance data identification operations
US7747579B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2010-06-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Metabase for facilitating data classification
US7613752B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2009-11-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for using metadata to enhance data management operations
US7660807B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2010-02-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for cataloging metadata for a metabase
US7657550B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2010-02-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. User interfaces and methods for managing data in a metabase
US8930496B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2015-01-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods of unified reconstruction in storage systems
US7661028B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2010-02-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Rolling cache configuration for a data replication system
US20070185938A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-08-09 Anand Prahlad Systems and methods for performing data replication
US7606844B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-10-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing replication copy storage operations
US7543125B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-06-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing time-flexible calendric storage operations
US20070186068A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-08-09 Agrawal Vijay H Network redirector systems and methods for performing data replication
US20070226535A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-09-27 Parag Gokhale Systems and methods of unified reconstruction in storage systems
US7617253B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-11-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Destination systems and methods for performing data replication
US7617262B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-11-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for monitoring application data in a data replication system
US7620710B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-11-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. System and method for performing multi-path storage operations
US7651593B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2010-01-26 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for performing data replication
US7636743B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2009-12-22 Commvault Systems, Inc. Pathname translation in a data replication system
US7512595B1 (en) 2006-01-03 2009-03-31 Emc Corporation Methods and systems for utilizing configuration information
US7822717B2 (en) 2006-02-07 2010-10-26 Emc Corporation Point-in-time database restore
US20070185922A1 (en) 2006-02-07 2007-08-09 Aditya Kapoor Point-in-time database restore
US7546484B2 (en) 2006-02-08 2009-06-09 Microsoft Corporation Managing backup solutions with light-weight storage nodes
US20070234108A1 (en) 2006-03-31 2007-10-04 Cox Gary H Failover to synchronous backup site in connection with triangular asynchronous replication
US20070250365A1 (en) 2006-04-21 2007-10-25 Infosys Technologies Ltd. Grid computing systems and methods thereof
US20070282921A1 (en) 2006-05-22 2007-12-06 Inmage Systems, Inc. Recovery point data view shift through a direction-agnostic roll algorithm
US20070271471A1 (en) 2006-05-22 2007-11-22 Seagate Technology Llc Data storage device with built-in data protection for ultra sensitive applications
US20070299930A1 (en) 2006-06-22 2007-12-27 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Continued transfer or streaming of a data file after loss of a local connection
US20080022058A1 (en) 2006-07-18 2008-01-24 Network Appliance, Inc. Removable portable data backup for a network storage system
US8170995B2 (en) 2006-10-17 2012-05-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Method and system for offline indexing of content and classifying stored data
US7702782B1 (en) 2006-10-18 2010-04-20 Emc Corporation Using watermarks to indicate alerts in a storage area network management console
US20080147754A1 (en) 2006-12-18 2008-06-19 Duncan Littlefield Systems and methods for facilitating storage operations using network attached storage devices
US20100101300A1 (en) 2006-12-19 2010-04-29 Pcme Limited Methods and apparatus for monitoring particles flowing in a stack
US7734669B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2010-06-08 Commvault Systems, Inc. Managing copies of data
US8229954B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2012-07-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. Managing copies of data
US20080162840A1 (en) 2007-01-03 2008-07-03 Oliver Augenstein Methods and infrastructure for performing repetitive data protection and a corresponding restore of data
US7797281B1 (en) 2007-01-12 2010-09-14 Symantec Operating Corporation Granular restore of data objects from a directory service
US7594138B2 (en) 2007-01-31 2009-09-22 International Business Machines Corporation System and method of error recovery for backup applications
US20080201600A1 (en) 2007-02-15 2008-08-21 Inventec Corporation Data protection method of storage device
US20080228833A1 (en) 2007-03-12 2008-09-18 Hitachi, Ltd. System and method for managing consistency among volumes based on application information
US20080244204A1 (en) 2007-03-29 2008-10-02 Nick Cremelie Replication and restoration of single-instance storage pools
US20080253283A1 (en) 2007-04-10 2008-10-16 International Business Machines Corporation Methods and Apparatus for Effective On-Line Backup Selection for Failure Recovery in Distributed Stream Processing Systems
US20080307020A1 (en) 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Steve Ko Electronic backup and restoration of encrypted data
US20090037763A1 (en) 2007-08-03 2009-02-05 Saibal Adhya Systems and Methods for Providing IIP Address Stickiness in an SSL VPN Session Failover Environment
US20090055507A1 (en) 2007-08-20 2009-02-26 Takashi Oeda Storage and server provisioning for virtualized and geographically dispersed data centers
US20090077557A1 (en) 2007-09-19 2009-03-19 Naoko Ichikawa Method and computer for supporting construction of backup configuration
US7822939B1 (en) 2007-09-25 2010-10-26 Emc Corporation Data de-duplication using thin provisioning
US8650389B1 (en) 2007-09-28 2014-02-11 F5 Networks, Inc. Secure sockets layer protocol handshake mirroring
US20090204649A1 (en) 2007-11-12 2009-08-13 Attune Systems, Inc. File Deduplication Using Storage Tiers
US20090161551A1 (en) * 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 Solar Winds.Net Internet protocol service level agreement router auto-configuration
US20090183145A1 (en) 2008-01-10 2009-07-16 Wei-Ming Hu Techniques for reducing down time in updating applications with metadata
US20090243846A1 (en) 2008-03-28 2009-10-01 Fujitsu Limited Electronic apparatus system having a plurality of rack-mounted electronic apparatuses, and method for identifying electronic apparatus in electronic apparatus system
US8199911B1 (en) 2008-03-31 2012-06-12 Symantec Operating Corporation Secure encryption algorithm for data deduplication on untrusted storage
US9098495B2 (en) 2008-06-24 2015-08-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application-aware and remote single instance data management
US20090319534A1 (en) 2008-06-24 2009-12-24 Parag Gokhale Application-aware and remote single instance data management
US20100017444A1 (en) 2008-07-15 2010-01-21 Paresh Chatterjee Continuous Data Protection of Files Stored on a Remote Storage Device
US20100031086A1 (en) 2008-07-31 2010-02-04 Andrew Charles Leppard Repair of a corrupt data segment used by a de-duplication engine
US20100042790A1 (en) 2008-08-12 2010-02-18 Netapp, Inc. Scalable deduplication of stored data
US20180011885A1 (en) 2008-09-05 2018-01-11 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for management of virtualization data
US8307177B2 (en) 2008-09-05 2012-11-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for management of virtualization data
US20100070478A1 (en) 2008-09-15 2010-03-18 International Business Machines Corporation Retrieval and recovery of data chunks from alternate data stores in a deduplicating system
US20100077161A1 (en) 2008-09-24 2010-03-25 Timothy John Stoakes Identifying application metadata in a backup stream
US20100082672A1 (en) 2008-09-26 2010-04-01 Rajiv Kottomtharayil Systems and methods for managing single instancing data
US8204859B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2012-06-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for managing replicated database data
US20100162037A1 (en) 2008-12-22 2010-06-24 International Business Machines Corporation Memory System having Spare Memory Devices Attached to a Local Interface Bus
US20140115287A1 (en) 2009-01-23 2014-04-24 Infortrend Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing volume replication using unified architecture
US8108638B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2012-01-31 International Business Machines Corporation Backup of deduplicated data
US20100223495A1 (en) 2009-02-27 2010-09-02 Leppard Andrew Minimize damage caused by corruption of de-duplicated data
US20100250549A1 (en) 2009-03-30 2010-09-30 Muller Marcus S Storing a variable number of instances of data objects
US8479304B1 (en) 2009-03-31 2013-07-02 Symantec Corporation Selectively protecting against chosen plaintext attacks in untrusted storage environments that support data deduplication
US8108640B1 (en) 2009-04-16 2012-01-31 Network Appliance, Inc. Reserving a thin provisioned space in a storage system
US20100281458A1 (en) 2009-04-30 2010-11-04 Business Objects, S.A. Application modification framework
US20100293439A1 (en) 2009-05-18 2010-11-18 David Flynn Apparatus, system, and method for reconfiguring an array to operate with less storage elements
US20100299490A1 (en) 2009-05-22 2010-11-25 Attarde Deepak R Block-level single instancing
US8578120B2 (en) 2009-05-22 2013-11-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Block-level single instancing
WO2010140264A1 (en) 2009-06-04 2010-12-09 Hitachi,Ltd. Storage subsystem and its data processing method, and computer system
US8271443B1 (en) 2009-06-29 2012-09-18 Symantec Operating Corporation Backup system including a privately accessible primary backup server and a publicly accessible alternate backup server
US20100332456A1 (en) 2009-06-30 2010-12-30 Anand Prahlad Data object store and server for a cloud storage environment, including data deduplication and data management across multiple cloud storage sites
US8285681B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2012-10-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data object store and server for a cloud storage environment, including data deduplication and data management across multiple cloud storage sites
US20130238572A1 (en) 2009-06-30 2013-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Performing data storage operations with a cloud environment, including containerized deduplication, data pruning, and data transfer
US10540327B2 (en) 2009-07-08 2020-01-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Synchronized data deduplication
US20140143636A1 (en) 2009-08-11 2014-05-22 International Business Machines Corporation Memory system with variable length page stripes including data protection information
US8793222B1 (en) 2009-11-06 2014-07-29 Symantec Corporation Systems and methods for indexing backup content
US20110153570A1 (en) 2009-12-18 2011-06-23 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Data replication and recovery method in asymmetric clustered distributed file system
US20110154109A1 (en) 2009-12-22 2011-06-23 Xerox Corporation Continuous, automated discovery of bugs in released software
US20110234583A1 (en) 2010-01-04 2011-09-29 Reuven Bakalash Method and apparatus for parallel ray-tracing employing modular space division
US8131681B1 (en) 2010-01-21 2012-03-06 Netapp, Inc. Backup disk-tape integration method and system
US20110218967A1 (en) 2010-03-08 2011-09-08 Microsoft Corporation Partial Block Based Backups
US20110289281A1 (en) 2010-05-24 2011-11-24 Quantum Corporation Policy Based Data Retrieval Performance for Deduplicated Data
US9026497B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2015-05-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations
US10990484B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2021-04-27 Commvault Systems, Inc. Performing backup operations and indexing backup data
US8504526B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2013-08-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations
US11099943B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2021-08-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. Indexing backup data generated in backup operations
US10534673B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2020-01-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations
US20150205682A1 (en) 2010-06-04 2015-07-23 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations
US20200159627A1 (en) 2010-06-04 2020-05-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Failover systems and methods for performing backup operations, including heterogeneous indexing and load balancing of backup and indexing resources
US8291170B1 (en) 2010-08-19 2012-10-16 Symantec Corporation System and method for event driven backup data storage
US20120078881A1 (en) 2010-09-24 2012-03-29 Hitachi Data Systems Corporation System and method for aggregating query results in a fault-tolerant database management system
US9239687B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2016-01-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for retaining and using data block signatures in data protection operations
US8364652B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2013-01-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Content aligned block-based deduplication
US20120084272A1 (en) 2010-10-04 2012-04-05 International Business Machines Corporation File system support for inert files
US20120101999A1 (en) 2010-10-26 2012-04-26 International Business Machines Corporation Performing a background copy process during a backup operation
US8667126B2 (en) * 2010-12-03 2014-03-04 International Business Machines Corporation Dynamic rate heartbeating for inter-node status updating
US8954446B2 (en) 2010-12-14 2015-02-10 Comm Vault Systems, Inc. Client-side repository in a networked deduplicated storage system
US9020900B2 (en) 2010-12-14 2015-04-28 Commvault Systems, Inc. Distributed deduplicated storage system
US20120150826A1 (en) 2010-12-14 2012-06-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Distributed deduplicated storage system
US20120150949A1 (en) 2010-12-14 2012-06-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Client-side repository in a networked deduplicated storage system
US20120150818A1 (en) 2010-12-14 2012-06-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Client-side repository in a networked deduplicated storage system
US10191816B2 (en) 2010-12-14 2019-01-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Client-side repository in a networked deduplicated storage system
US9990253B1 (en) 2011-03-31 2018-06-05 EMC IP Holding Company LLC System and method for recovering file systems without a replica
US8825720B1 (en) 2011-04-12 2014-09-02 Emc Corporation Scaling asynchronous reclamation of free space in de-duplicated multi-controller storage systems
US9020987B1 (en) 2011-06-29 2015-04-28 Emc Corporation Managing updating of metadata of file systems
US20160308722A1 (en) 2011-09-30 2016-10-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. Migration of existing computing systems to cloud computing sites or virtual machines
US20130138880A1 (en) 2011-11-30 2013-05-30 Hitachi, Ltd. Storage system and method for controlling storage system
US20130238562A1 (en) 2012-03-07 2013-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data storage system utilizing proxy device for storage operations
US20130262396A1 (en) 2012-03-30 2013-10-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data storage recovery automation
US10387269B2 (en) 2012-06-13 2019-08-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. Dedicated client-side signature generator in a networked storage system
US8909980B1 (en) 2012-06-29 2014-12-09 Emc Corporation Coordinating processing for request redirection
US20140082128A1 (en) 2012-09-18 2014-03-20 Netapp, Inc. Dynamic detection and selection of file servers in a caching application or system
US20140101300A1 (en) 2012-10-10 2014-04-10 Elisha J. Rosensweig Method and apparatus for automated deployment of geographically distributed applications within a cloud
US10379892B2 (en) 2012-12-28 2019-08-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for repurposing virtual machines
US20140196038A1 (en) 2013-01-08 2014-07-10 Commvault Systems, Inc. Virtual machine management in a data storage system
US20140196037A1 (en) 2013-01-09 2014-07-10 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Gang migration of virtual machines using cluster-wide deduplication
US20140195749A1 (en) 2013-01-10 2014-07-10 Pure Storage, Inc. Deduplication of Volume Regions
US20140201157A1 (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for rule-based virtual machine data protection
US9495404B2 (en) 2013-01-11 2016-11-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Systems and methods to process block-level backup for selective file restoration for virtual machines
US10229133B2 (en) 2013-01-11 2019-03-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. High availability distributed deduplicated storage system
US20140201170A1 (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. High availability distributed deduplicated storage system
US20140201153A1 (en) 2013-01-11 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Partial file restore in a data storage system
US9633033B2 (en) 2013-01-11 2017-04-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. High availability distributed deduplicated storage system
US20140201142A1 (en) 2013-01-14 2014-07-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Partial sharing of secondary storage files in a data storage system
US9286110B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2016-03-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Seamless virtual machine recall in a data storage system
US20150370668A1 (en) 2013-01-30 2015-12-24 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Failover in response to failure of a port
US20140229451A1 (en) 2013-02-12 2014-08-14 Atlantis Computing, Inc. Deduplication metadata access in deduplication file system
US9244777B2 (en) 2013-03-01 2016-01-26 International Business Machines Corporation Balanced distributed backup scheduling
US20140258245A1 (en) 2013-03-07 2014-09-11 Jive Software, Inc. Efficient data deduplication
US20140281758A1 (en) 2013-03-12 2014-09-18 International Business Machines Corporation On-site visualization of component status
US10001935B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2018-06-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of auxiliary data protection software in failover operations
US20140337664A1 (en) 2013-05-08 2014-11-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of temporary secondary copies in failover operations
US10884635B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2021-01-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of auxiliary data protection software in failover operations
US10365839B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2019-07-30 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of auxiliary data protection software in failover operations
US20140337285A1 (en) 2013-05-08 2014-11-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Synchronization of local secondary copies with a remote storage management component
US9483361B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2016-11-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management cell with failover management capability
US9483364B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2016-11-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Synchronization of local secondary copies with a remote storage management component
US9483363B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2016-11-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of temporary secondary copies in failover operations
US9483362B2 (en) 2013-05-08 2016-11-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Use of auxiliary data protection software in failover operations
US9336076B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2016-05-10 Globalfoundries Inc. System and method for controlling a redundancy parity encoding amount based on deduplication indications of activity
US9298386B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2016-03-29 Globalfoundries Inc. System and method for improved placement of blocks in a deduplication-erasure code environment
US20150067391A1 (en) 2013-08-30 2015-03-05 Cisco Technology, Inc. Correcting operational state and incorporating additional debugging support into an online system without disruption
US20150074536A1 (en) 2013-09-12 2015-03-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. File manager integration with virtualization in an information management system, including user control and storage management of virtual machines
US20150089185A1 (en) 2013-09-23 2015-03-26 International Business Machines Corporation Managing Mirror Copies without Blocking Application I/O
US20150088821A1 (en) 2013-09-23 2015-03-26 International Business Machines Corporation Data migration using multi-storage volume swap
US20160226966A1 (en) 2013-10-15 2016-08-04 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited Task management among multiple servers
US20150199238A1 (en) 2014-01-15 2015-07-16 Ca, Inc. Extending the recovery and reporting ranges of objects
US10380072B2 (en) 2014-03-17 2019-08-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Managing deletions from a deduplication database
US20150268876A1 (en) 2014-03-18 2015-09-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. Efficient information management performed by a client in the absence of a storage manager
US10534672B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2020-01-14 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US10013314B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2018-07-03 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US10838824B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2020-11-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US9811427B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2017-11-07 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US20210026741A1 (en) 2014-04-02 2021-01-28 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US9563518B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2017-02-07 Commvault Systems, Inc. Information management by a media agent in the absence of communications with a storage manager
US9280430B2 (en) 2014-05-13 2016-03-08 Netapp, Inc. Deferred replication of recovery information at site switchover
US20150347306A1 (en) 2014-05-30 2015-12-03 International Business Machines Corporation Synchronizing updates of page table status indicators in a multiprocessing environment
US20150350027A1 (en) 2014-06-03 2015-12-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Neighbor aware network cluster topology establishment based on proximity measurements
US20160019317A1 (en) 2014-07-16 2016-01-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Volume or virtual machine level backup and generating placeholders for virtual machine files
US10073649B2 (en) 2014-07-24 2018-09-11 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp Storing metadata
US20160085606A1 (en) 2014-09-19 2016-03-24 Netapp Inc. Cluster-wide outage detection
US9710465B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2017-07-18 Commvault Systems, Inc. Efficiently restoring execution of a backed up virtual machine based on coordination with virtual-machine-file-relocation operations
US20170315876A1 (en) 2014-09-30 2017-11-02 Code 42 Software, Inc. Shared file system predictive storage techniques
US10474638B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2019-11-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Accessing a file system using tiered deduplication
US10776209B2 (en) 2014-11-10 2020-09-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Cross-platform virtual machine backup and replication
US9983936B2 (en) 2014-11-20 2018-05-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Virtual machine change block tracking
US20160210064A1 (en) 2015-01-21 2016-07-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Database protection using block-level mapping
US20190196916A1 (en) 2015-01-21 2019-06-27 Commvault Systems, Inc. Object-level database restore
US20160299818A1 (en) 2015-04-09 2016-10-13 Commvault Systems, Inc. Highly reusable deduplication database after disaster recovery
US9639274B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2017-05-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. Efficient deduplication database validation
US10146643B2 (en) 2015-04-28 2018-12-04 International Business Machines Corporation Database recovery and index rebuilds
US10481826B2 (en) 2015-05-26 2019-11-19 Commvault Systems, Inc. Replication using deduplicated secondary copy data
US20160350391A1 (en) 2015-05-26 2016-12-01 Commvault Systems, Inc. Replication using deduplicated secondary copy data
US20170031768A1 (en) 2015-07-31 2017-02-02 Atlantis Computing, Inc. Method and apparatus for reconstructing and checking the consistency of deduplication metadata of a deduplication file system
US10587470B2 (en) * 2015-09-25 2020-03-10 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Method and apparatus for presenting status of storage cluster
US10503619B2 (en) 2015-10-22 2019-12-10 Netapp Inc. Implementing automatic switchover
US9892276B2 (en) 2015-11-11 2018-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Verifiable data destruction in a database
US20170168903A1 (en) 2015-12-09 2017-06-15 Commvault Systems, Inc. Live synchronization and management of virtual machines across computing and virtualization platforms and using live synchronization to support disaster recovery
US20170185488A1 (en) 2015-12-23 2017-06-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application-level live synchronization across computing platforms including synchronizing co-resident applications to disparate standby destinations and selectively synchronizing some applications and not others
US10061663B2 (en) 2015-12-30 2018-08-28 Commvault Systems, Inc. Rebuilding deduplication data in a distributed deduplication data storage system
US20190272220A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2019-09-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. Deduplication replication in a distributed deduplication data storage system
US20190272221A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2019-09-05 Commvault Systems, Inc. System for redirecting requests after a secondary storage computing device failure
US20170192866A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2017-07-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. System for redirecting requests after a secondary storage computing device failure
US20170193003A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2017-07-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. Redundant and robust distributed deduplication data storage system
US20170192868A1 (en) 2015-12-30 2017-07-06 Commvault Systems, Inc. User interface for identifying a location of a failed secondary storage device
US10255143B2 (en) 2015-12-30 2019-04-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Deduplication replication in a distributed deduplication data storage system
US10592357B2 (en) 2015-12-30 2020-03-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Distributed file system in a distributed deduplication data storage system
US20170235647A1 (en) 2016-02-12 2017-08-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data protection operations based on network path information
US20170242871A1 (en) 2016-02-18 2017-08-24 Commvault Systems, Inc. Data restoration operations based on network path information
US10592350B2 (en) 2016-03-09 2020-03-17 Commvault Systems, Inc. Virtual server cloud file system for virtual machine restore to cloud operations
US10678758B2 (en) 2016-11-21 2020-06-09 Commvault Systems, Inc. Cross-platform virtual machine data and memory backup and replication
US10454754B1 (en) * 2016-12-16 2019-10-22 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Hybrid cluster recovery techniques
US20180267861A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 Commvault Systems, Inc. Application aware backup of virtual machines
US10474542B2 (en) 2017-03-24 2019-11-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Time-based virtual machine reversion
US20180285202A1 (en) 2017-03-29 2018-10-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. External fallback system for local computing systems
US20180285209A1 (en) 2017-03-29 2018-10-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. Live browsing of granular mailbox data
US20180285215A1 (en) 2017-03-31 2018-10-04 Commvault Systems, Inc. Granular restoration of virtual machine application data
US20180373597A1 (en) 2017-06-14 2018-12-27 Commvault Systems, Inc. Live browsing of backed up data residing on cloned disks
US20190028375A1 (en) * 2017-07-18 2019-01-24 Vmware, Inc. Prioritized client-server communications based on server health
US20190278662A1 (en) 2018-03-07 2019-09-12 Commvault Systems, Inc. Using utilities injected into cloud-based virtual machines for speeding up virtual machine backup operations
US10877928B2 (en) 2018-03-07 2020-12-29 Commvault Systems, Inc. Using utilities injected into cloud-based virtual machines for speeding up virtual machine backup operations
US20190312801A1 (en) * 2018-04-10 2019-10-10 Vmware, Inc. Optimized performance data collection at client nodes
US10628267B2 (en) 2018-05-02 2020-04-21 Commvault Systems, Inc. Client managed data backup process within an enterprise information management system
US10673943B2 (en) 2018-05-02 2020-06-02 Commvault Systems, Inc. Network storage backup using distributed media agents
US20190370107A1 (en) 2018-05-31 2019-12-05 Capital One Services, Llc Data processing platform monitoring
US20200073769A1 (en) * 2018-08-28 2020-03-05 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp Management of clusters
US11016696B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2021-05-25 Commvault Systems, Inc. Redundant distributed data storage system
US20200183802A1 (en) 2018-12-06 2020-06-11 Commvault Systems, Inc. Assigning backup resources based on failover of partnered data storage servers in a data storage management system
US20200329004A1 (en) * 2019-04-12 2020-10-15 Google Llc Inter-operative message notification agent
US20210081287A1 (en) * 2019-09-13 2021-03-18 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Data service failover in shared storage clusters
US20210112118A1 (en) * 2019-10-10 2021-04-15 Dell Products L.P. Cluster formation offload using remote access controller group manager

Non-Patent Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Adjeroh, et al., "Multimedia database management-requirements and issues.", IEEE multimedia, vol. 4, No. 3, 1997, pp. 24-33.
Arneson, "Mass Storage Archiving in Network Environments" IEEE, Oct. 31-Nov. 1998, pp. 45-50.
Bhagwat et al., "Extreme Binning: Scalable, Parallel Deduplication for Chunk-based File Backup", IEEE International Symposium on Modeling, Analysis & Simulation of Computer and Telecommunication Systems, Sep. 2009, pp. 1-9.
Bonvin, et al., "Dynamic cost-efficient replication in data clouds.", Proceedings of the 1st Workshop on Automated Control for Datacenters and Clouds, 2009, pp. 49-56.
Cabrera, et al. "ADSM: A Multi-Platform, Scalable, Back-up and Archive Mass Storage System," Digest of Papers, Compcon '95, Proceedings of the 40th IEEE Computer Society International Conference, Mar. 5, 1995-Mar. 9, 1995, pp. 420-427, San Francisco, CA.
Diallo et al. "Distributed database management techniques for wireless sensor networks." IEEE Transactions on Parallel and Distributed Systems, vol. 26, No. 2, 2013, pp. 604-620.
Eitel, "Backup and Storage Management in Distributed Heterogeneous Environments," IEEE, 1994, pp. 124-126.
Fu et al., "Fine Grained Transaction Log for Data Recovery in Database Systems", Third Asia-Pacific Trusted Infrastructure Technologies Conference, IEEE, 2008, pp. 123-131.
Gorton et al., "Distribution, data, deployment: Software architecture convergence in big data systems." IEEE Software, vol. 32, No. 3, 2004, pp. 78-85.
Huff, KL, "Data Set Usage Sequence Number," IBM Technical Disclosure Bulletin, vol. 24, No. 5, Oct. 1981 New York, US, pp. 2404-2406.
IBM Technical Disclosure Bulletin, vol. 24, No. 5, Oct. 1981 New York, US, pp. 2404-2406, K.L. Huff, "Data Set Usage Sequence Number".
Levy et al., "Log-Driven Backups: A Recovery Scheme for Large Memory Database Systems", IEEE 1990, pp. 99-109.
Li et al., "Research on the Backup Mechanism of Oracle Database" International Conference on Environmental Science and Information Application Technology, Jul. 2009, pp. 423-426.
Rosenblum et al., "The Design and Implementation of a Log-Structure File System," Operating Systems Review SIGOPS, vol. 25, No. 5, May 1991, New York, US, pp. 1-15.
Terry et al. "Managing update conflicts in Bayou, a weakly connected replicated storage system." ACM SIGOPS Operating Systems Review, vol. 29, No. 5, 1995, pp. 172-182.
Weil, et al. "CRUSH: Controlled, scalable, decentralized placement of replicated data." SC'06: Proceedings of the 2006 ACM/IEEE Conference on Supercomputing. IEEE, 2006, pp. 1-12.

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210182162A1 (en) * 2019-12-17 2021-06-17 Infosys Limited System and method of cloning a multi-tiered application
US11809284B2 (en) * 2019-12-17 2023-11-07 Infosys Limited System and method of cloning a multi-tiered application

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20230236940A1 (en) 2023-07-27
US20220261321A1 (en) 2022-08-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11947990B2 (en) Cross-hypervisor live-mount of backed up virtual machine data
US11544155B2 (en) Granular restoration of virtual machine application data
US11422732B2 (en) Live browsing and private writable environments based on snapshots and/or backup copies provided by an ISCSI server
US20210208977A1 (en) Storing data to cloud libraries in cloud native formats
US10949308B2 (en) Application aware backup of virtual machines
US11677824B2 (en) Multi-threaded scanning of distributed file systems
US20200097369A1 (en) Data protection operations based on network path information
US11714568B2 (en) On-demand restore of virtual machine data
US11677632B2 (en) Smart network topology systems and methods
US20200241908A1 (en) Cross-hypervisor live mount of backed up virtual machine data, including management of cache storage for virtual machine data
US20180285209A1 (en) Live browsing of granular mailbox data
US11550680B2 (en) Assigning backup resources in a data storage management system based on failover of partnered data storage resources
US20180285383A1 (en) Managing pod cells using a global repository cell
US11442768B2 (en) Cross-hypervisor live recovery of virtual machines
US11829331B2 (en) Continuously run log backup with minimal configuration and resource usage from the source machine
US11669408B2 (en) Historical network data-based scanning thread generation
US20220113873A1 (en) Skipping data backed up in prior backup operations
US11645175B2 (en) Automatic failover of a storage manager
US20180121111A1 (en) Dynamic scanning thread generation
US20220237084A1 (en) Concurrent transmission of multiple extents during backup of extent-eligible files
US20230168970A1 (en) Providing status of data storage operations within an information management system
US20220091742A1 (en) Network data management protocol restore using logical seek

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

AS Assignment

Owner name: COMMVAULT SYSTEMS, INC., NEW JERSEY

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ZAKHARKIN, DMITRIY BORISOVICH;PRADHAN, MANOJ KUMAR;VIJAYAN, MANOJ KUMAR;REEL/FRAME:056011/0800

Effective date: 20210210

AS Assignment

Owner name: JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., AS ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT, ILLINOIS

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:COMMVAULT SYSTEMS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:058496/0836

Effective date: 20211213

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE